(5473,'The ID of the role to remove','','none'),(5474,'Unblock the selected users configuration','','none'),(5475,'List of permission','','none'),(5476,'List of roles','','none'),(5477,'User operations bulk form','','none'),(5478,'Default area','','none'),(5479,'Should replacement tokens be used from the first row','','none'),(5480,'The shown text of the area','','none'),(5481,'Text custom','','none'),(5482,'The shown text of the result summary area','','none'),(5483,'The title which will be overridden for the page','','none'),(5484,'Node Creation Time','','none'),(5485,'Node Update Time','','none'),(5486,'Day Date','','none'),(5487,'Formula','','none'),(5488,'Place Holder','','none'),(5489,'Formula Used','','none'),(5490,'Full Date','','none'),(5491,'Group by Numeric','','none'),(5492,'Month Date','','none'),(5493,'Week Date','','none'),(5494,'Year Date','','none'),(5495,'YearMonthDate','','none'),(5496,'Date Year month','','none'),(5497,'Basic validation','','none'),(5498,'Tag based caching','','none'),(5499,'Time based caching','','none'),(5500,'Exposed form type','','none'),(5501,'Row type','','none'),(5502,'Filter groups','','none'),(5503,'Display comment','','none'),(5504,'Plugin ID','','none'),(5505,'A string to identify the area instance in the admin UI.','','none'),(5506,'Should the area be displayed on empty results.','','none'),(5507,'A unique ID per handler type','','none'),(5508,'The views_data table for this handler','','none'),(5509,'The views_data field for this handler','','none'),(5510,'The ID of the relationship instance used by this handler','','none'),(5511,'A sql aggregation type','','none'),(5512,'A string to identify the handler instance in the admin UI.','','none'),(5513,'When the filter value is NOT available','','none'),(5514,'Default argument options','','none'),(5515,'Convert newlines to HTML <br> tags','','none'),(5516,'SQL pager','','none'),(5517,'Grouping field number %i','','none'),(5518,'Group items','','none'),(5519,'Group item','','none'),(5520,'Query comment','','none'),(5521,'Default display options','','none'),(5522,'Page display options','','none'),(5523,'Embed display options','','none'),(5524,'Attachment display options','','none'),(5525,'Text on demand format','','none'),(5526,'Default field','','none'),(5527,'Drop button','','none'),(5528,'Default filter','','none'),(5529,'Boolean string','','none'),(5530,'Group by numeric','','none'),(5531,'IN operator','','none'),(5532,'Equality','','none'),(5533,'Reduce duplicate','','none'),(5534,'Default pager','','none'),(5535,'Groupwise max','','none'),(5536,'Generate subquery each time view is run','','none'),(5537,'RSS field options','','none'),(5538,'Guid settings','','none'),(5539,'Display extender','','none'),(5540,'Field rewrite elements','','none'),(5541,'Display plugin','','none'),(5542,'Boolean sort','','none'),(5543,'Date sort','','none'),(5544,'Boolean sort expose settings','','none'),(5545,'Date sort expose settings','','none'),(5546,'Standard sort expose settings','','none'),(5547,'Random sort expose settings','','none'),(5548,'Custom row classes','','none'),(5549,'Default views row classes','','none'),(5550,'Custom column classes','','none'),(5551,'Default views column classes','','none'),(5552,'Columns name','','none'),(5553,'Columns info','','none'),(5554,'Column info','','none'),(5555,'Preview view','','none'),(5556,'Stark settings','','none'),(5557,'Visibility Conditions','','none'),(5558,'Visibility Condition','','none'),(5559,'Context assignments','','none'),(5560,'Display variant','','none'),(5561,'Requirements review','','none'),(5562,'Unable to send email. Contact the site administrator if the problem persists.','','10.4.5'),(5563,'Error sending email (from %from to %to with reply-to %reply).','','none'),(5564,'The label for this display variant.','','none'),(5565,'%name: the email address can not be longer than @max characters.','','none'),(5566,'Automated emails, such as registration information, will be sent from this address. Use an address ending in your site\'s domain to help prevent these emails from being flagged as spam.','','none'),(5567,'Receive email notifications','','none'),(5568,'There are two types of actions: simple and advanced. Simple actions do not require any additional configuration and are listed here automatically. Advanced actions need to be created and configured before they can be used because they have options that need to be specified; for example, sending an email to a specified address or unpublishing content containing certain words. To create an advanced action, select the action from the drop-down list in the advanced action section below and click the <em>Create</em> button.','','none'),(5569,'Send email configuration','','none'),(5570,'Enter a valid email address or use a token email address such as %author.','','none'),(5571,'Show for the listed pages','','10.4.5'),(5572,'Hide for the listed pages','','10.4.5'),(5573,'Duplicate @display_title','','10.4.5'),(5574,'Book navigation block','','none'),(5575,'Block display mode','','none'),(5576,'Book outline for @book.title','','none'),(5577,'Book traversal links for','','none'),(5578,'The field name from which the comment originated.','','10.2.3'),(5579,'Overriding default settings','','none'),(5580,'Approving and managing comments','','none'),(5581,'This page provides a list of all comment types on the site and allows you to manage the fields, form and display settings for each.','','none'),(5582,'Administer comment types and settings','','10.4.5'),(5583,'Comment types','','10.4.5'),(5584,'Comment type settings','','none'),(5585,'Target Entity Type ID','','none'),(5586,'Comment type %label has been updated.','','none'),(5587,'Comment type %label has been added.','','none'),(5588,'The comment author\'s email address.','','none'),(5589,'Comment Type','','none'),(5590,'The comment type.','','none'),(5591,'%label is used by the %field field on your site. You can not remove this comment type until you have removed the field.','','none'),(5592,'%label is used by 1 comment on your site. You can not remove this comment type until you have removed all of the %label comments.%label is used by @count comments on your site. You may not remove %label until you have removed all of the %label comments.','','none'),(5593,'Translating configuration text','','none'),(5594,'Translating date formats','','none'),(5595,'This page lists all configuration items on your site that have translatable text, like your site name, role names, etc.','','10.2.3'),(5596,'Allow other users to contact you via a personal contact form which keeps your email address hidden. Note that some privileged users such as site administrators are still able to contact you even if you choose to disable this feature.','','10.2.3'),(5597,'Example: \'webmaster@example.com\' or \'sales@example.com,support@example.com\' . To specify multiple recipients, separate each email address with a comma.','','none'),(5598,'%recipient is an invalid email address.','','none'),(5599,'%sender-name (@sender-from) sent %recipient-name an email.','','none'),(5600,'Enabling field translation','','none'),(5601,'If translation is enabled you can translate a content entity via the Translate tab (or Translate link). The Translations page of a content entity gives an overview of the translation status for the current content and lets you add, edit, and delete its translations. This process is similar for every translatable content entity on your site.','','none'),(5602,'Changing the source language for a translation','','none'),(5603,'When you add a new translation, the original text you are translating is displayed in the edit form as the <em>source</em>. If at least one translation of the original content already exists when you add a new translation, you can choose either the original content (default) or one of the other translations as the source, using the select list in the Source language section. After saving the translation, the chosen source language is then listed on the Translate tab of the content.','','none'),(5604,'Setting status of translations','','none'),(5605,'If you edit a translation in one language you may want to set the status of the other translations as <em>out-of-date</em>. You can set this status by selecting the <em>Flag other translations as outdated</em> checkbox in the Translation section of the content editing form. The status will be visible on the Translations page.','','none'),(5606,'Managing and displaying date fields','','none'),(5607,'Displaying dates','','none'),(5608,'Jan','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5609,'Feb','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5610,'Mar','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5611,'Apr','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5612,'May','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5613,'Jun','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5614,'Jul','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5615,'Aug','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5616,'Sep','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5617,'Oct','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5618,'Nov','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5619,'Dec','Abbreviated month name','none'),(5620,'Sun','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5621,'Mon','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5622,'Tue','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5623,'Wed','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5624,'Thu','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5625,'Fri','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5626,'Sat','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5627,'Su','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5628,'Mo','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5629,'Tu','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5630,'We','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5631,'Th','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5632,'Fr','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5633,'Sa','Abbreviated weekday','none'),(5634,'S','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Sunday','none'),(5635,'M','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Monday','none'),(5636,'T','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Tuesday','none'),(5637,'W','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Wednesday','none'),(5638,'T','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Thursday','none'),(5639,'F','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Friday','none'),(5640,'S','Abbreviated 1 letter weekday Saturday','none'),(5641,'Track images uploaded via a Text Editor','','10.4.4'),(5642,'The image exceeds the maximum allowed dimensions and an attempt to resize it failed.','','none'),(5643,'The status of the file, temporary (FALSE) and permanent (TRUE).','','none'),(5644,'Web page addresses and email addresses turn into links automatically.','','10.4.5'),(5645,'Active forum topics block','','none'),(5646,'New forum topics block','','none'),(5647,'Background color must be a hexadecimal color value.','','none'),(5648,'(upscaling allowed)','','none'),(5649,'Adding languages','','none'),(5650,'Adding custom languages','','none'),(5651,'You can add a language that is not provided in the drop-down list by choosing <em>Custom language</em> at the end of the list. You then have to configure its language code, name, and direction in the form provided.','','none'),(5652,'Configuring content languages','','none'),(5653,'Adding a language switcher block','','none'),(5654,'Making a block visible per language','','none'),(5655,'Choosing user languages','','none'),(5656,'Users can choose a <em>Site language</em> on their profile page. This language is used for email messages, and can be used by modules to determine a user\'s language. It can also be used for interface text, if the <em>User</em> method is enabled as a <em>Detection and selection</em> method (see below). Administrative users can choose a separate <em>Administration pages language</em> for the interface text on administration pages. This configuration is only available on the user\'s profile page if the <em>Account administration pages</em> method is enabled (see below).','','none'),(5657,'<em>URL</em> sets the interface language based on a path prefix or domain (for example specifying <em>de</em> for German would result in URLs like <em>example.com/de/contact</em>). The default language does not require a path prefix, but can have one assigned as well. If the language detection is done by domain name, a domain needs to be specified for each language.','','none'),(5658,'<em>Session</em> determines the interface language from a request or session parameter (for example <em>example.com?language=de</em> would set the interface language to German based on the use of <em>de</em> as the <em>language</em> parameter).','','none'),(5659,'<em>User</em> follows the language configuration set on the user\'s profile page.','','none'),(5660,'<em>Account administration pages</em> follows the configuration set as <em>Administration pages language</em> on the profile page of an administrative user. This method is similar to the <em>User</em> method, but only sets the interface text language on administration pages, independent of the interface text language on other pages.','','none'),(5661,'<em>Selected language</em> allows you to specify the site\'s default language or a specific language as the fall-back language. This method should be listed last.','','none'),(5662,'The comment author\'s email address from the comment form, if user is anonymous, and the \'Anonymous users may/must leave their contact information\' setting is turned on.','','none'),(5663,'Comma-separated list of recipient email addresses.','','none'),(5664,'Promote, change ownership, edit revisions, and perform other tasks across all content types.','','10.2.3'),(5665,'Syndicate block','','none'),(5666,'Use shortcuts','','10.4.5'),(5667,'Diff settings','','none'),(5668,'Number of leading lines in a diff','','none'),(5669,'Number of trailing lines in a diff','','none'),(5670,'Branding block','','none'),(5671,'Use site logo','','none'),(5672,'The current theme is not @theme','','none'),(5673,'The current theme is @theme','','none'),(5674,'Do not return true on the following pages: @pages','','none'),(5675,'Return true on the following pages: @pages','','none'),(5676,'Request Path','','none'),(5677,'Username or email address','','10.4.5'),(5678,'Email addresses to notify when updates are available','','none'),(5679,'Email notification threshold','','none'),(5680,'Whenever your site checks for available updates and finds new releases, it can notify a list of users via email. Put each address on a separate line. If blank, no emails will be sent.','','none'),(5681,'%emails are not valid email addresses.','','none'),(5682,'Configuring user roles','','none'),(5683,'Setting permissions','','none'),(5684,'Managing account settings','','none'),(5685,'This web page allows administrators to register new users. Users\' email addresses and usernames must be unique.','','10.2.3'),(5686,'This account\'s preferred language for emails and site presentation.','','none'),(5687,'This account\'s preferred language for emails.','','10.2.3'),(5688,'New users will be required to validate their email address prior to logging into the site, and will be assigned a system-generated password. With this setting disabled, users will be logged in immediately upon registering, and may select their own passwords during registration.','','none'),(5689,'Notification email address','','none'),(5690,'The email address to be used as the \'from\' address for all account notifications listed below. If <em>\'Visitors, but administrator approval is required\'</em> is selected above, a notification email will also be sent to this address for any new registrations. Leave empty to use the default system email address <em>(%site-email).</em>','','none'),(5691,'Edit the welcome email messages sent to new member accounts created by an administrator.','','none'),(5692,'Edit the welcome email messages sent to new members upon registering, when administrative approval is required.','','none'),(5693,'Edit the email notifying the site administrator that there are new members awaiting administrative approval.','','none'),(5694,'Edit the welcome email messages sent to new members upon registering, when no administrator approval is required.','','none'),(5695,'Edit the email messages sent to users who request a new password.','','none'),(5696,'Enable and edit email messages sent to users upon account activation (when an administrator activates an account of a user who has already registered, on a site where administrative approval is required).','','none'),(5697,'Enable and edit email messages sent to users when their accounts are blocked.','','none'),(5698,'Edit the email messages sent to users when they attempt to cancel their accounts.','','none'),(5699,'Enable and edit email messages sent to users when their accounts are canceled.','','none'),(5700,'A welcome message with further instructions has been sent to your email address.','','none'),(5701,'When enabled, the user must confirm the account cancellation via email.','','none'),(5702,'When enabled, the user will receive an email notification after the account has been canceled.','','none'),(5703,'A confirmation request to cancel your account has been sent to your email address.','','none'),(5704,'Password reset instructions will be mailed to %email. You must log out to use the password reset link in the email.','','none'),(5705,'When the user has the following roles','','10.4.5'),(5706,'If you select no roles, the condition will evaluate to TRUE for all users.','','none'),(5707,'The user is not a member of @roles','','none'),(5708,'The user is a member of @roles','','none'),(5709,'User email unique','Validation','none'),(5710,'Use Replica Server','','none'),(5711,'Query parameter','','none'),(5712,'The query parameter to use.','','none'),(5713,'Fallback value','','none'),(5714,'The fallback value to use when the above query parameter is not present.','','none'),(5715,'Conjunction to use when handling multiple values. E.g. \"?value[0]=a&value[1]=b\".','','none'),(5716,'Use Secondary Server','','none'),(5717,'This will make the query attempt to connect to a replica server if available.  If no replica server is defined or available, it will fall back to the default server.','','none'),(5718,'Type attribute','','none'),(5719,'The type of this row.','','none'),(5720,'Text attribute','','none'),(5721,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML text attribute for each row.','','none'),(5722,'Created attribute','','none'),(5723,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML created attribute for each row.','','none'),(5724,'Description attribute','','none'),(5725,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML description attribute for each row.','','none'),(5726,'HTML URL attribute','','none'),(5727,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML htmlUrl attribute for each row.','','none'),(5728,'Language attribute','','none'),(5729,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML language attribute for each row.','','none'),(5730,'XML URL attribute','','none'),(5731,'URL attribute','','none'),(5732,'Row style plugin requires specifying which views field to use for OPML text attribute.','','none'),(5733,'Row style plugin requires specifying which views field to use for XML URL attribute.','','none'),(5734,'Row style plugin requires specifying which views field to use for URL attribute.','','none'),(5735,'OPML fields','','none'),(5736,'Display fields as OPML items.','','none'),(5737,'OPML Feed','','none'),(5738,'Generates an OPML feed from a view.','','none'),(5739,'Duplicate view','','10.4.5'),(5740,'Duplicate of @label','','none'),(5741,'Toolbar item','','none'),(5742,'Authentication methods','','none'),(5743,'\"On\" label','','10.4.4'),(5744,'\"Off\" label','','10.4.4'),(5745,'The selected image handling toolkit \'@toolkit\' can not process operation \'@operation\'.','','none'),(5746,'Edit menu link %title','','none'),(5747,'This link is provided by the @name module. The title and path cannot be edited.','','none'),(5748,'The maximum depth for a link and all its children is fixed. Some menu links may not be available as parents if selecting them would exceed this limit.','','10.2.3'),(5749,'Link weight among links in the same menu at the same depth. In the menu, the links with high weight will sink and links with a low weight will be positioned nearer the top.','','10.2.3'),(5750,'Add comment type','','none'),(5751,'Manage form and displays settings of comments.','','10.4.5'),(5752,'Can not uninstall the Configuration module as part of a configuration synchronization through the user interface.','','none'),(5753,'The message UUID.','','none'),(5754,'Confirm delete recent log messages','','none'),(5755,'Are you sure you want to delete the recent logs?','','none'),(5756,'Format type machine name','','none'),(5757,'Label setting machine name','','none'),(5758,'@label referenced from @field_name','','none'),(5759,'@field_name: @label','','none'),(5760,'Boolean settings','','none'),(5761,'On label','','none'),(5762,'Off label','','none'),(5763,'Visually Hidden','','10.4.4'),(5764,'Updating translations for JavaScript and default configuration.','','none'),(5765,'Updating default configuration (@percent%).','','none'),(5766,'Updated default configuration.','','none'),(5767,'The Custom Menu Links module allows users to create menu links. These links can be translated if multiple languages are used for the site.','','none'),(5768,'Custom Menu Links','','none'),(5769,'The entity ID for this menu link content entity.','','none'),(5770,'The content menu link UUID.','','none'),(5771,'The content menu link bundle.','','none'),(5772,'The menu name. All links with the same menu name (such as \"tools\") are part of the same menu.','','none'),(5773,'Parent plugin ID','','10.4.5'),(5774,'The ID of the parent menu link plugin, or empty string when at the top level of the hierarchy.','','none'),(5775,'Custom menu link','','10.4.5'),(5776,'Default comments','','10.2.3'),(5777,'Allows commenting on content','','10.2.3'),(5778,'The value for this field.','','none'),(5779,'The language of the content or translation.','','10.2.3'),(5780,'The language the original content is in.','','none'),(5781,'Allowed value with label','','none'),(5782,'Enabling REST support for an entity type','','none'),(5783,'You will also need to grant anonymous users permission to perform each of the REST operations you want to be available, and set up authentication properly to authorize web requests.','','none'),(5784,'Configuring search pages','','none'),(5785,'Managing the search index','','none'),(5786,'Displaying the Search block','','none'),(5787,'Searching your site','','none'),(5788,'Extending the Search module','','none'),(5789,'Search index progress','','10.4.5'),(5790,'@percent% (@remaining remaining)','','10.4.5'),(5791,'Indexing progress','','none'),(5792,'%num_indexed of %num_total indexed','','none'),(5793,'Does not use index','','none'),(5794,'If checked, all searches will be logged. Uncheck to skip logging. Logging may affect performance.','','none'),(5795,'Crops an image to a rectangle specified by the given dimensions.','','none'),(5796,'The image \'@file\' could not be desaturated because the imagefilter() function is not available in this PHP installation.','','none'),(5797,'Converts an image to grayscale.','','none'),(5798,'Resizes an image to the given dimensions (ignoring aspect ratio).','','none'),(5799,'Rotates an image by the given number of degrees.','','none'),(5800,'Scales an image while maintaining aspect ratio. The resulting image can be smaller for one or both target dimensions.','','none'),(5801,'Site administration toolbar','','10.4.5'),(5802,'To follow a specific user\'s new and updated content, select the <em>Activity</em> tab from the user\'s profile page.','','none'),(5803,'Activity Tracker','','none'),(5804,'View user information','','10.4.5'),(5805,'Add \"…\" at the end of trimmed text','','none'),(5806,'This link is provided by the Views module from view %label.','','none'),(5807,'Change to','','none'),(5808,'- Not specified -','','10.4.5'),(5809,'Region for @title','','10.4.4'),(5810,'@path is not a valid path.','','none'),(5811,'Alignments','','none'),(5812,'First page','','10.4.4'),(5813,'Base field bundle override','','none'),(5814,'Datetime timestamp display format settings','','none'),(5815,'Boolean checkbox display format settings','','none'),(5816,'Installed themes','','none'),(5817,'The %file does not exist.','','none'),(5818,'The %file exists.','','none'),(5819,'The %file is not readable.','','none'),(5820,'The %file is not writable.','','none'),(5821,'The @file is writable.','','none'),(5822,'The @file is owned by the web server.','','none'),(5823,'Negate the condition','','10.4.5'),(5824,'Finalizing configuration synchronization.','','10.4.5'),(5825,'Datetime Timestamp','','10.4.4'),(5826,'%theme theme installed.','','none'),(5827,'Base field override','','10.4.5'),(5828,'Display prefix and suffix','','none'),(5829,'Text (plain)','','10.4.4'),(5830,'Text (plain, long)','','10.4.4'),(5831,'This path does not exist or you do not have permission to link to %path.','','none'),(5832,'Install newly added themes','','none'),(5833,'Blocks are placed and configured specifically for each theme. The Block layout page opens with the default theme, but you can toggle to other installed themes.','','none'),(5834,'Comment operation links','','none'),(5835,'The target entity type can not be changed after the comment type has been created.','','none'),(5836,'Enable the personal contact form by default for new users','','none'),(5837,'Add contact form','','10.4.5'),(5838,'Create and manage contact forms.','','10.4.5'),(5839,'Edit contact form','','none'),(5840,'Default form identifier','','none'),(5841,'When listing forms, those with lighter (smaller) weights get listed before forms with heavier (larger) weights. Forms with equal weights are sorted alphabetically.','','none'),(5842,'Make this the default form','','none'),(5843,'Contact form %label has been updated.','','none'),(5844,'Contact form %label has been added.','','none'),(5845,'Send yourself a copy','','none'),(5846,'%sender-name (@sender-from) sent an email regarding %contact_form.','','none'),(5847,'The ID of the associated form.','','none'),(5848,'Users may translate this field','','10.4.4'),(5849,'Content translation field settings','','none'),(5850,'Field properties for which to synchronize translations','','none'),(5851,'Field column for which to synchronize translations','','none'),(5852,'Contextual links for an area on a page are displayed using a contextual links button. There are two ways to make the contextual links button visible:','','none'),(5853,'Once the contextual links button for the area of interest is visible, click the button to display the links.','','none'),(5854,'The relative date value entered is invalid.','','none'),(5855,'Add new field: you need to provide a machine name for the field.','','none'),(5856,'Allowed types: @extensions.','','10.4.5'),(5857,'Back to content editing','','none'),(5858,'\n        <p>You can align images, videos, blockquotes and so on to the left, right or center. Examples:</p>\n        <ul>\n          <li>Align an image to the left: <code>&lt;img src=\"\" data-align=\"left\" /&gt;</code></li>\n          <li>Align an image to the center: <code>&lt;img src=\"\" data-align=\"center\" /&gt;</code></li>\n          <li>Align an image to the right: <code>&lt;img src=\"\" data-align=\"right\" /&gt;</code></li>\n          <li>… and you can apply this to other elements as well: <code>&lt;video src=\"\" data-align=\"center\" /&gt;</code></li>\n        </ul>','','none'),(5859,'Align images','','10.4.4'),(5860,'Uses a <code>data-align</code> attribute on <code>&lt;img&gt;</code> tags to align images.','','10.4.4'),(5861,'\n        <p>You can caption images, videos, blockquotes, and so on. Examples:</p>\n        <ul>\n            <li><code>&lt;img src=\"\" data-caption=\"This is a caption\" /&gt;</code></li>\n            <li><code>&lt;video src=\"\" data-caption=\"The Drupal Dance\" /&gt;</code></li>\n            <li><code>&lt;blockquote data-caption=\"Dries Buytaert\"&gt;Drupal is awesome!&lt;/blockquote&gt;</code></li>\n            <li><code>&lt;code data-caption=\"Hello world in JavaScript.\"&gt;alert(\"Hello world!\");&lt;/code&gt;</code></li>\n        </ul>','','none'),(5862,'Caption images','','10.4.4'),(5863,'Uses a <code>data-caption</code> attribute on <code>&lt;img&gt;</code> tags to caption images.','','10.4.4'),(5864,'One translation file could not be imported. See the log for details.@count translation files could not be imported. See the log for details.','','none'),(5865,'A flag for whether the link should be enabled in menus or hidden.','','10.2.3'),(5866,'The time that the menu link was last edited.','','none'),(5867,'The timestamp the latest revision of this node was created.','','none'),(5868,'Recently created','','none'),(5869,'Whether a new revision should be created by default','','none'),(5870,'Display author and date information','','10.4.5'),(5871,'Breakpoint ID','','none'),(5872,'Unable to delete the shortcut for %title.','','none'),(5873,'Drupal database update','','none'),(5874,'Maximum number of levels','','none'),(5875,'<strong>Back up your code</strong>. Hint: when backing up module code, do not leave that backup in the \'modules\' or \'sites/*/modules\' directories as this may confuse Drupal\'s auto-discovery mechanism.','','none'),(5876,'<strong>Back up your database</strong>. This process will change your database values and in case of emergency you may need to revert to a backup.','','none'),(5877,'When you have performed the steps above, you may proceed.','','none'),(5878,'This update will been skipped due to the following missing dependencies:','','none'),(5879,'This update will be skipped due to an error in the module\'s code.','','none'),(5880,'The version of Drupal you are updating from has been automatically detected.','','none'),(5881,'All errors have been logged.','','none'),(5882,'The update process was aborted prematurely while running <strong>update #@version in @module.module</strong>.','','none'),(5883,'You may need to check the <code>watchdog</code> database table manually.','','none'),(5884,'<strong>Reminder: don\'t forget to set the <code>$settings[\'update_free_access\']</code> value in your <code>settings.php</code> file back to <code>FALSE</code>.</strong>','','none'),(5885,'Failed:','','none'),(5886,'Update #@count','','none'),(5887,'The following updates returned messages:','','none'),(5888,'Review updates','','none'),(5889,'Starting updates','','none'),(5890,'Install and set as default','','10.4.5'),(5891,'Installed themeInstalled themes','','10.4.5'),(5892,'Uninstalled themeUninstalled themes','','10.4.5'),(5893,'%theme is the default theme and cannot be uninstalled.','','none'),(5894,'The %theme theme has been uninstalled.','','10.4.5'),(5895,'The %theme theme has been installed.','','none'),(5896,'Empty time zone','','none'),(5897,'Users may set their own time zone at registration','','none'),(5898,'Menu levels','','none'),(5899,'Whether or not the content related to a term is sticky.','','none'),(5900,'Whether or not the content related to a term is sticky. To list sticky content first, set this to descending.','','none'),(5901,'The date the content related to a term was posted.','','none'),(5902,'Telephone numbers can be displayed as links with the scheme name <em>tel:</em> by choosing the <em>Telephone</em> display format on the <em>Manage display</em> page. Any spaces will be stripped out of the link text. This semantic markup improves the user experience on mobile and assistive technology devices.','','none'),(5903,'Title to replace basic numeric telephone number display','','none'),(5904,'Text (formatted) settings','','none'),(5905,'Text (formatted, long) settings','','none'),(5906,'Text (formatted, long, with summary) settings','','none'),(5907,'Formatted text default display format settings','','none'),(5908,'Summary or trimmed formatted text display format settings','','none'),(5909,'Text (formatted)','','10.4.4'),(5910,'Text (formatted, long)','','10.4.4'),(5911,'Text (formatted, long, with summary)','','10.4.5'),(5912,'Require email verification when a visitor creates an account','','none'),(5913,'- No preference -','','none'),(5914,'Notify user when account is canceled','','none'),(5915,'The time that the user was last edited.','','10.2.3'),(5916,'Display the referenced author user entity.','','none'),(5917,'Add a read-more link if output is trimmed','','none'),(5918,'@entity_type revision','','10.4.5'),(5919,'@entity_type revisions','','none'),(5920,'Include reset button (resets all applied exposed filters)','','none'),(5921,'The <em>Exposed items per page</em> field\'s options must include the value from the <em>Items per page</em> field (@items_per_page).','','none'),(5922,'REST export settings','','none'),(5923,'Provide a REST export','','none'),(5924,'REST export path','','none'),(5925,'Default value callback','','none'),(5926,'URI as link display format settings','','none'),(5927,'Timestamp ago display format settings','','none'),(5928,'Link to URI','','none'),(5929,'Field storage','','10.4.5'),(5930,'%field settings for %bundle','','10.4.4'),(5931,'The minimum allowed image size expressed as WIDTH×HEIGHT (e.g. 640×480). Leave blank for no restriction. If a smaller image is uploaded, it will be rejected.','','none'),(5932,'Disabling drag-and-drop functionality','','10.4.5'),(5933,'Improving table accessibility','','none'),(5934,'Views tables include semantic markup to improve accessibility. Data cells are automatically associated with header cells through id and header attributes. To improve the accessibility of your tables you can add descriptive elements within the Views table settings. The <em>caption</em> element can introduce context for a table, making it easier to understand. The <em>summary</em> element can provide an overview of how the data has been organized and how to navigate the table. Both the caption and summary are visible by default and also implemented according to HTML5 guidelines.','','none'),(5935,'OPML field options','','none'),(5936,'Testing multilingual','','none'),(5937,'Minimal profile for running tests with a multilingual installer.','','none'),(5938,'Muted','','none'),(5939,'This block is broken or missing. You may be missing content or you might need to enable the original module.','','none'),(5940,'Broken/Missing','','none'),(5941,'Entity Reference reference access','Validation','none'),(5942,'You do not have access to the referenced entity (%type: %id).','','none'),(5943,'@label ID','','10.4.5'),(5944,'Email','Validation','none'),(5945,'Comments are responses to content.','','none'),(5946,'Filename: %name','','10.4.5'),(5947,'Recipient username','','none'),(5948,'You can align images (<code>data-align=\"center\"</code>), but also videos, blockquotes, and so on.','','none'),(5949,'You can caption images (<code>data-caption=\"Text\"</code>), but also videos, blockquotes, and so on.','','none'),(5950,'Making this field required is recommended.','','none'),(5951,'The title attribute is used as a tooltip when the mouse hovers over the image. Enabling this field is not recommended as it can cause problems with screen readers.','','none'),(5952,'Image convert failed using the %toolkit toolkit on %path (%mimetype)','','none'),(5953,'The domain may not be left blank for %language.','','none'),(5954,'Leave preview?','','none'),(5955,'Leave preview','','none'),(5956,'Search for @keywords','','none'),(5957,'Instructs the toolkit to save the image with a specified extension.','','none'),(5958,'Set a new image','','none'),(5959,'The text with the text format applied.','','none'),(5960,'Processed summary','','none'),(5961,'The summary text with the text format applied.','','none'),(5962,'Tabs are buttons, displayed in a bar across the top of the screen. Some tabs execute an action (such as starting Edit mode), while other tabs toggle which tray is open.','','none'),(5963,'Trays','','none'),(5964,'Trays are usually lists of links, which can be hierarchical like a menu. If a tray has been toggled open, it is displayed either vertically or horizontally below the tab bar, depending on the browser width. Only one tray may be open at a time. If you click another tab, that tray will replace the tray being displayed. In wide browser widths, the user has the ability to toggle from vertical to horizontal, using a link at the bottom or right of the tray. Hierarchical menus only have open/close behavior in vertical mode; if you display a tray containing a hierarchical menu horizontally, only the top-level links will be available.','','none'),(5965,'Your account will be blocked and you will no longer be able to log in. All of your content will remain attributed to your username.','','none'),(5966,'Language of the translation of user information','','10.2.3'),(5967,'Preferred language of the user','','10.2.3'),(5968,'Preferred admin language','','10.4.5'),(5969,'Preferred administrative language of the user','','10.2.3'),(5970,'Cache metadata','','none'),(5971,'Cache contexts','','none'),(5972,'Path is empty.','','none'),(5973,'No query allowed.','','none'),(5974,'Invalid path. Valid characters are alphanumerics as well as \"-\", \".\", \"_\" and \"~\".','','none'),(5975,'Wrapping','','10.4.4'),(5976,'tour','','none'),(5977,'tours','','none'),(5978,'Layout Builder','','none'),(5979,'Select a @context value:','','10.4.5'),(5980,'Number of plural indexes in this language.','','none'),(5981,'Domain to use for this language.','','none'),(5982,'Search result highlighting input','','10.2.3'),(5983,'Configuration entity dependencies','','none'),(5984,'Content entity dependencies','','none'),(5985,'Enforced configuration dependencies','','none'),(5986,'String (long) settings','','none'),(5987,'URI settings','','none'),(5988,'Created timestamp settings','','none'),(5989,'Changed timestamp settings','','none'),(5990,'If more than one application will be sharing this database, a unique table name prefix – such as %prefix – will prevent collisions.','','none'),(5991,'The author name of the comment.','','none'),(5992,'contextual links button','','none'),(5993,'No browser language mappings available.','','none'),(5994,'The mapping for the %browser browser language code has been deleted.','','none'),(5995,'The browser language detection mapping for the %browser browser language code has been deleted.','','none'),(5996,'The user or author name. This filter does not check if the user exists and allows partial matching. Does not use autocomplete.','','none'),(5997,'Page @items.current','','none'),(5998,'The selected style or row format does not use fields.','','none'),(5999,'The selected display type does not use @type plugins','','none'),(6000,'The entity type','','none'),(6001,'Entity Type ID','','none'),(6002,'Regex','Validation','none'),(6003,'Configure Image Styles','','none'),(6004,'Database storage size','','none'),(6005,'Text with text format','','none'),(6006,'Field widgets','','none'),(6007,'Field widget','','none'),(6008,'Widget type machine name','','none'),(6009,'Textarea display format settings','','none'),(6010,'Email field display format settings','','none'),(6011,'Link to the entity','','none'),(6012,'Synchronizing extensions: @op @name.','','10.4.5'),(6013,'Link to the @entity_label','','none'),(6014,'Linked to the @entity_label','','none'),(6015,'Simple page','','none'),(6016,'Page with blocks','','none'),(6017,'Jump to the first comment.','','none'),(6018,'Jump to the first new comment.','','none'),(6019,'Share your thoughts and opinions.','','10.4.5'),(6020,'Content translation content settings','','none'),(6021,'Content translation enabled','','none'),(6022,'Default date type','','none'),(6023,'Default date value','','none'),(6024,'Persist field storage with no fields','','none'),(6025,'Group by column','','none'),(6026,'Group by columns','','none'),(6027,'Re-use an existing field','','10.4.5'),(6028,'Provides a filter plugin that is in use in the following filter formats: %formats','','none'),(6029,'Log in to post new content in the forum.','','none'),(6030,'Providing page-specific help','','none'),(6031,'Effect settings','','none'),(6032,'Content Language Settings','','none'),(6033,'Allow to alter the language','','none'),(6034,'Influence of \'@title\'','','none'),(6035,'Installing supporting modules','','none'),(6036,'Default indexing settings','','none'),(6037,'The default search index will be rebuilt.','','none'),(6038,'This will re-index content in the search indexes of all active search pages. Searching will continue to work, but new content won\'t be indexed until all existing content has been re-indexed. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(6039,'All search indexes will be rebuilt.','','none'),(6040,'Add shortcut link','','none'),(6041,'Popular content block settings','','none'),(6042,'Number of day\\s top views to display','','none'),(6043,'An existing local file system path for storing private files. It should be writable by Drupal and not accessible over the web. This must be changed in settings.php','','10.4.5'),(6044,'Publish status','','none'),(6045,'Whether or not the content related to a term is published.','','none'),(6046,'Tray \"@tray\" @action.','','10.4.5'),(6047,'Tray @action.','','10.4.5'),(6048,'Major upgrade warning','','10.4.4'),(6049,'This update is a major version update which means that it may not be backwards compatible with your currently running version. It is recommended that you read the release notes and proceed at your own risk.','','10.4.4'),(6050,'User data field','','none'),(6051,'Only users with the selected permission flag will be able to access this display.','','none'),(6052,'Only the checked roles will be able to access this display.','','none'),(6053,'The formatted text of the area','','none'),(6054,'The corresponding entity field','','none'),(6055,'The plugin ID','','none'),(6056,'Row options','','none'),(6057,'Display extender settings','','none'),(6058,'View block','','none'),(6059,'Leave blank to use the time of form submission.','','none'),(6060,'Number integer display format settings','','none'),(6061,'Static menu link overrides','','none'),(6062,'Entities exist of type %entity_type and %bundle_label %bundle. These entities need to be deleted before importing.','','none'),(6063,'Disabled','Plural','10.4.4'),(6064,'The language code of the language the comment is written in.','','none'),(6065,'The message language code.','','10.2.3'),(6066,'The source language from which this translation was created.','','10.2.3'),(6067,'Translation outdated','','10.4.5'),(6068,'Translation author','','10.4.5'),(6069,'The author of this translation.','','none'),(6070,'A boolean indicating whether the translation is visible to non-translators.','','none'),(6071,'Translation created time','','10.4.5'),(6072,'The Unix timestamp when the translation was created.','','none'),(6073,'Translation changed time','','none'),(6074,'The Unix timestamp when the translation was most recently saved.','','none'),(6075,'Alternative text is required.<br />(Only in rare cases should this be left empty. To create empty alternative text, enter <code>\"\"</code> — two double quotes without any content).','','none'),(6076,'Entities and entity types','','none'),(6077,'Entity sub-types','','none'),(6078,'Some content entity types are further grouped into sub-types (for example, you could have article and page content types within the main site content entity type, and tag and category vocabularies within the taxonomy term entity type); other entity types, such as user accounts, do not have sub-types. Programmers use the term <em>bundle</em> for entity sub-types.','','none'),(6079,'Fields and field types','','none'),(6080,'Content entity types and sub-types store most of their text, file, and other information in <em>fields</em>. Fields are grouped by <em>field type</em>; field types define what type of data can be stored in that field, such as text, images, or taxonomy term references.','','none'),(6081,'Formatters and view modes','','none'),(6082,'Content entity types and sub-types can have one or more <em>view modes</em>, used for displaying the entity items. For instance, a content item could be viewed in full content mode on its own page, teaser mode in a list, or RSS mode in a feed. In each view mode, each field can be hidden or displayed, and if it is displayed, you can choose and configure the <em>formatter</em> that is used to display the field. For instance, a long text field can be displayed trimmed or full-length, and taxonomy term reference fields can be displayed in plain text or linked to the taxonomy term page.','','none'),(6083,'Widgets and form modes','','none'),(6084,'Content entity types and sub-types can have one or more <em>form modes</em>, used for editing. For instance, a content item could be edited in a compact format with only some fields editable, or a full format that allows all fields to be edited. In each form mode, each field can be hidden or displayed, and if it is displayed, you can choose and configure the <em>widget</em> that is used to edit the field. For instance, a taxonomy term reference field can be edited using a select list, radio buttons, or an autocomplete widget.','','none'),(6085,'Enabling field types, widgets, and formatters','','none'),(6086,'Views entity field handler','','none'),(6087,'Creating a field','','none'),(6088,'On the <em>Manage fields</em> page for your entity type or sub-type, you can add, configure, and delete fields for that entity type or sub-type. Each field has a <em>machine name</em>, which is used internally to identify the field and must be unique across an entity type; once a field is created, you cannot change the machine name. Most fields have two types of settings. The field-level settings depend on the field type, and affect how the data in the field is stored. Once they are set, they can no longer be changed; examples include how many data values are allowed for the field and where files are stored. The sub-type-level settings are specific to each entity sub-type the field is used on, and they can be changed later; examples include the field label, help text, default value, and whether the field is required or not. You can return to these settings by choosing the <em>Edit</em> link for the field from the <em>Manage fields</em> page.','','none'),(6089,'Re-using fields','','none'),(6090,'Configuring field editing','','none'),(6091,'On the <em>Manage form display</em> page of your entity type or sub-type, you can configure how the field data is edited by default and in each form mode. If your entity type has multiple form modes (on most sites, most entities do not), you can toggle between the form modes at the top of the page, and you can toggle whether each form mode uses the default settings or custom settings in the <em>Custom display settings</em> section. For each field in each form mode, you can select the widget to use for editing; some widgets have additional configuration options, such as the size for a text field, and these can be edited using the Edit button (which looks like a wheel). You can also change the order of the fields on the form. You can exclude a field from a form by choosing <em>Hidden</em> from the widget drop-down list, or by dragging it into the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','none'),(6092,'Configuring field display','','none'),(6093,'On the <em>Manage display</em> page of your entity type or sub-type, you can configure how each field is displayed by default and in each view mode. If your entity type has multiple view modes, you can toggle between the view modes at the top of the page, and you can toggle whether each view mode uses the default settings or custom settings in the <em>Custom display settings</em> section. For each field in each view mode, you can choose whether and how to display the label of the field from the <em>Label</em> drop-down list. You can also select the formatter to use for display; some formatters have configuration options, which you can edit using the Edit button (which looks like a wheel). You can also change the display order of fields. You can exclude a field from a specific view mode by choosing <em>Hidden</em> from the formatter drop-down list, or by dragging it into the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','none'),(6094,'Configuring view and form modes','','none'),(6095,'Listing fields','','none'),(6096,'Images must be exactly <strong>@size</strong> pixels.','','none'),(6097,'Images must be larger than <strong>@min</strong> pixels. Images larger than <strong>@max</strong> pixels will be resized.','','none'),(6098,'Images must be larger than <strong>@min</strong> pixels.','','none'),(6099,'Images larger than <strong>@max</strong> pixels will be resized.','','none'),(6100,'Define how text is handled by combining filters into text formats.','','10.2.3'),(6101,'Forum leaf','Validation','none'),(6102,'The menu link language code.','','10.2.3'),(6103,'Node authored by (uid)','','none'),(6104,'Revision authored by (uid)','','none'),(6105,'Content access view grants','','none'),(6106,'The location this shortcut points to.','','none'),(6107,'Trusted Host Settings','','10.4.5'),(6108,'The trusted_host_patterns setting is set to allow %trusted_host_patterns','','none'),(6109,'Change site name, email address, slogan, default front page, and error pages.','','10.4.5'),(6110,'This is only used when the site is configured to use a separate administration theme on the Appearance page.','','10.2.3'),(6111,'Link to any page','','10.4.5'),(6112,'This allows to bypass access checking when linking to internal paths.','','10.2.3'),(6113,'Unable to install @extension, %config_names already exists in active configuration.Unable to install @extension, %config_names already exist in active configuration.','','none'),(6114,'No access to execute %action on the @entity_type_label %entity_label.','','none'),(6115,'narrow','','none'),(6116,'Note: content may be kept, unpublished, deleted or transferred to the anonymous user depending on the configured user settings.','','10.2.3'),(6117,'The reference view %view_name cannot be found.','','none'),(6118,'Enabled','Plural','none'),(6119,'Pre-content','','none'),(6120,'Site version','','10.4.4'),(6121,'Active menu trail','','none'),(6122,'Configuration updates','','10.4.4'),(6123,'The listed configuration will be updated.','','10.4.4'),(6124,'An entity field containing a password value.','','none'),(6125,'An autocomplete text field with tagging support.','','none'),(6126,'Block Content revision is a history of changes to block content.','','none'),(6127,'Responsive image style %label saved.','','none'),(6128,'Field, widget, and formatter information','','none'),(6129,'Provided by modules','','none'),(6130,'Provided by Drupal core','','none'),(6131,'As mentioned previously, some field types, widgets, and formatters are provided by Drupal core. Here are some notes on how to use some of these:','','none'),(6132,'<strong>Number fields</strong>: When you add a number field you can choose from three types: <em>decimal</em>, <em>float</em>, and <em>integer</em>. The <em>decimal</em> number field type allows users to enter exact decimal values, with fixed numbers of decimal places. The <em>float</em> number field type allows users to enter approximate decimal values. The <em>integer</em> number field type allows users to enter whole numbers, such as years (for example, 2012) or values (for example, 1, 2, 5, 305). It does not allow decimals.','','none'),(6133,'Defining image styles','','none'),(6134,'Naming image styles','','none'),(6135,'When you define an image style, you will need to choose a displayed name and a machine name. The displayed name is shown in administrative pages, and the machine name is used to generate the URL for accessing an image processed in that style. There are two common approaches to naming image styles: either based on the effects being applied (for example, <em>Square 85x85</em>), or based on where you plan to use it (for example, <em>Profile picture</em>).','','none'),(6136,'Configuring image fields','','none'),(6137,'The maximum file size that can be uploaded is limited by PHP settings of the server, but you can restrict it further by configuring a <em>Maximum upload size</em> in the field settings (this setting can be changed later). The maximum file size, either from PHP server settings or field configuration, is automatically displayed to users in the help text of the image field.','','none'),(6138,'You can also configure a default image that will be used if no image is uploaded in an image field. This default can be defined for all instances of the field in the field storage settings when you create a field, and the setting can be overridden for each entity sub-type that uses the field.','','none'),(6139,'Configuring displays and form displays','','none'),(6140,'On the <em>Manage display</em> page, you can choose the image formatter, which determines the image style used to display the image in each display mode and whether or not to display the image as a link. On the <em>Manage form display</em> page, you can configure the image upload widget, including setting the preview image style shown on the entity edit form.','','none'),(6141,'Selected language configuration','','10.4.5'),(6142,'Selected default language no longer exists.','','none'),(6143,'Language detection configuration saved.','','none'),(6144,'Language codes or other custom text to use as a path prefix for URL language detection. For the selected fallback language, this value may be left blank. <strong>Modifying this value may break existing URLs. Use with caution in a production environment.</strong> Example: Specifying \"deutsch\" as the path prefix code for German results in URLs like \"example.com/deutsch/contact\".','','10.4.5'),(6145,'Link URI can be accessed by the user.','Validation','none'),(6146,'The path \'@uri\' is inaccessible.','','none'),(6147,'The path \'@uri\' is invalid.','','none'),(6148,'The location this menu link points to.','','10.2.3'),(6149,'Indicates whether the menu link should be rediscovered','','10.4.5'),(6150,'@title [%language translation]','','10.2.3'),(6151,'The username of the content author.','','10.4.5'),(6152,'Defining responsive image styles','','none'),(6153,'Using responsive image styles in Image fields','','none'),(6154,'A responsive image style associates an image style with each breakpoint defined by your theme.','','10.4.5'),(6155,'Responsive image styles','','10.4.5'),(6156,'Edit responsive image style','','10.4.5'),(6157,'Duplicate responsive image style','','none'),(6158,'Add responsive image style','','10.4.5'),(6159,'Responsive image style','','10.4.5'),(6160,'Image style mappings','','none'),(6161,'Image style mapping','','none'),(6162,'Responsive image mapping type','','none'),(6163,'Sizes attribute','','none'),(6164,'Image styles to be used when using the \'sizes\' attribute','','none'),(6165,'<em>Duplicate responsive image style</em> @label','','none'),(6166,'<em>Edit responsive image style</em> @label','','10.4.5'),(6167,'Responsive image style @label saved.','','none'),(6168,'Responsive image style: @responsive_image_style','','none'),(6169,'Select a responsive image style.','','none'),(6170,'The default drag-and-drop user interface for ordering tables in the administrative interface presents a challenge for some users, including users of screen readers and other assistive technology. The drag-and-drop interface can be disabled in a table by clicking a link labeled \"Show row weights\" above the table. The replacement interface allows users to order the table by choosing numerical weights instead of dragging table rows.','','none'),(6171,'Using maintenance mode','','none'),(6172,'Configuring the file system','','none'),(6173,'Configuring the image toolkit','','none'),(6174,'Are you sure you want to delete the format %name : %format?','','none'),(6175,'Managing vocabularies','','none'),(6176,'Managing terms','','none'),(6177,'Classifying entity content','','none'),(6178,'Adding new terms during content creation','','none'),(6179,'User email required','Validation','none'),(6180,'The target entity','','none'),(6181,'Append a destination query string to operation links.','','none'),(6182,'Provides links to perform entity operations.','','10.2.3'),(6183,'Content language of view row','','10.4.5'),(6184,'Original language of content in view row','','none'),(6185,'@entity_type_label ID','','none'),(6186,'Rendering Language','','10.4.5'),(6187,'All content that supports translations will be displayed in the selected language.','','10.4.5'),(6188,'The contextual filter values are provided by the URL.','','none'),(6189,'The following replacement tokens are available for this field. Note that due to rendering order, you cannot use fields that come after this field; if you need a field not listed here, rearrange your fields.','','none'),(6190,'Enter permission name','','10.2.3'),(6191,'@label (@id)','','none'),(6192,'Entity reference field storage settings','','none'),(6193,'Entity reference field settings','','none'),(6194,'Entity reference selection plugin settings','','none'),(6195,'Display in native language','','none'),(6196,'@local-task-title@active','','10.2.3'),(6197,'HTTP cookies','','none'),(6198,'HTTP headers','','none'),(6199,'Is super user','','none'),(6200,'Query arguments','','none'),(6201,'A flag indicating whether this is the default translation.','','10.2.3'),(6202,'Field settings (@on_label / @off_label)','','none'),(6203,'@on_label / @off_label','','none'),(6204,'Displayed in native language','','none'),(6205,'Hide lower priority columns','','10.4.5'),(6206,'Submitted by @username on @datetime','','none'),(6207,'By @author @time ago','','none'),(6208,'With multiple languages configured, registered users can select their preferred language and authors can assign a specific language to content.','','none'),(6209,'This page also provides an overview of how much of the site\'s interface has been translated for each configured language.','','none'),(6210,'If the Interface Translation module is enabled, this page will provide an overview of how much of the site\'s interface has been translated for each configured language.','','none'),(6211,'Depending on your site features, additional modules that you might want to enable are:','','none'),(6212,'This must be an external URL such as %url.','','none'),(6213,'No dangerous external protocols','Validation','none'),(6214,'No broken internal links','Validation','none'),(6215,'Submitted by @author_name on @date','','10.4.5'),(6216,'Search looks for exact, case-insensitive keywords; keywords shorter than a minimum length are ignored.','','none'),(6217,'Use upper-case OR to get more results. Example: cat OR dog (content contains either \"cat\" or \"dog\").','','none'),(6218,'You can use upper-case AND to require all words, but this is the same as the default behavior. Example: cat AND dog (same as cat dog, content must contain both \"cat\" and \"dog\").','','none'),(6219,'Use quotes to search for a phrase. Example: \"the cat eats mice\".','','none'),(6220,'You can precede keywords by - to exclude them; you must still have at least one \"positive\" keyword. Example: cat -dog (content must contain cat and cannot contain dog).','','none'),(6221,'User is admin','','none'),(6222,'Include the anonymous user in the matched entities.','','none'),(6223,'Include the anonymous user.','','none'),(6224,'User search looks for user names and partial user names. Example: mar would match usernames mar, delmar, and maryjane.','','none'),(6225,'You can use * as a wildcard within your keyword. Example: m*r would match user names mar, delmar, and elementary.','','none'),(6226,'No eligible views were found.','','none'),(6227,'The view is not based on a translatable entity type or the site is not multilingual.','','none'),(6228,'Display \"@display\" uses a \"more\" link but there are no displays it can link to. You need to specify a custom URL.','','none'),(6229,'Disabling SQL rewriting will omit all query tags, i. e. disable node access checks as well as override hook_query_alter() implementations in other modules.','','none'),(6230,'Testing config overrides','','none'),(6231,'Minimal profile for running tests with config overrides in a profile.','','none'),(6232,'@count second@count seconds','','10.4.5'),(6233,'Account\'s permissions','','none'),(6234,'The hashed password','','none'),(6235,'Existing password','','none'),(6236,'Display the author name.','','none'),(6237,'Are you sure you want to create a new %name @type?','','none'),(6238,'Using the personal contact form','','10.4.5'),(6239,'Site visitors can email registered users on your site by using the personal contact form, without knowing or learning the email address of the recipient. When a site visitor is viewing a user profile, the viewer will see a <em>Contact</em> tab or link, which leads to the personal contact form. The personal contact link is not shown when you are viewing your own profile, and users must have both <em>View user information</em> (to see user profiles) and <em>Use users\' personal contact forms</em> permission to see the link. The user whose profile is being viewed must also have their personal contact form enabled (this is a user account setting); viewers with <em>Administer users</em> permission can bypass this setting.','','none'),(6240,'Configuring contact forms','','none'),(6241,'Linking to contact forms','','none'),(6242,'Adding content to contact forms','','none'),(6243,'@label (Translation is not supported).','','10.2.3'),(6244,'@entity using @field_name','','none'),(6245,'Relate each @entity with a @field_name set to the @label.','','none'),(6246,'Configuring form displays','','none'),(6247,'Reference fields have several widgets available on the <em>Manage form display</em> page:','','none'),(6248,'The <em>Check boxes/radio buttons</em> widget displays the existing entities for the entity type as check boxes or radio buttons based on the <em>Allowed number of values</em> set for the field.','','none'),(6249,'The <em>Select list</em> widget displays the existing entities in a drop-down list or scrolling list box based on the <em>Allowed number of values</em> setting for the field.','','none'),(6250,'The <em>Autocomplete</em> widget displays text fields in which users can type entity labels based on the <em>Allowed number of values</em>. The widget can be configured to display all entities that contain the typed characters or restricted to those starting with those characters.','','none'),(6251,'The <em>Autocomplete (Tags style)</em> widget displays a multi-text field in which users can type in a comma-separated list of entity labels.','','none'),(6252,'Your server is not capable of displaying file upload progress. File upload progress requires an Apache server running PHP with mod_php or Nginx with PHP-FPM.','','none'),(6253,'Your server is not capable of displaying file upload progress. File upload progress requires PHP be run with mod_php or PHP-FPM and not as FastCGI.','','none'),(6254,'Display download path','','none'),(6255,'Display the filemime as icon','','none'),(6256,'Detect tar','','none'),(6257,'Link this field to the file download URL','','none'),(6258,'File link','','none'),(6259,'Include tar in extension','','none'),(6260,'If the part of the filename just before the extension is \'.tar\', include this in the extension output.','','none'),(6261,'Display the file download URI','','none'),(6262,'Display an icon','','none'),(6263,'The icon is representing the file type, instead of the MIME text (such as \"image/jpeg\")','','none'),(6264,'Using text fields with text formats','','none'),(6265,'Text fields that allow text formats are those with \"formatted\" in the description. These are <em>Text (formatted, long, with summary)</em>, <em>Text (formatted)</em>, and <em>Text (formatted, long)</em>. You cannot change the type of field once a field has been created.','','none'),(6266,'Setting the allowed link type','','none'),(6267,'In the field settings you can define the allowed link type to be <em>internal links only</em>, <em>external links only</em>, or <em>both internal and external links</em>. <em>Internal links only</em> and <em>both internal and external links</em> options enable an autocomplete widget for internal links, so a user does not have to copy or remember a URL.','','none'),(6268,'Revisions allow you to track differences between multiple versions of your content, and revert to older versions.','','10.2.3'),(6269,'@type %title has been reverted to the revision from %revision-date.','','none'),(6270,'Speeding up your site','','none'),(6271,'Site default language code','','none'),(6272,'Page caching','','none'),(6273,'Allowing users to add new terms gradually builds a vocabulary as content is added and edited. Users can add new terms if either of the two <em>Autocomplete</em> widgets is chosen for the Taxonomy term reference field in the <em>Manage form display</em> page for the field. You will also need to enable the <em>Create referenced entities if they don\'t already exist</em> option, and restrict the field to one vocabulary.','','none'),(6274,'If you choose <em>Text (plain)</em> or <em>Text (formatted)</em> as the field type on the <em>Manage fields</em> page, then a field with a single row is displayed. You can change the maximum text length in the <em>Field settings</em> when you set up the field.','','none'),(6275,'If you choose <em>Text (plain, long)</em>, <em>Text (formatted, long)</em>, or <em>Text (formatted, long, with summary)</em> on the <em>Manage fields</em> page, then users can insert text of unlimited length. On the <em>Manage form display</em> page, you can set the number of rows that are displayed to users.','','none'),(6276,'As an alternative to using a trimmed version of the text, you can enter a separate summary by choosing the <em>Text (formatted, long, with summary)</em> field type on the <em>Manage fields</em> page. Even when <em>Summary input</em> is enabled, and summaries are provided, you can display <em>trimmed</em> text nonetheless by choosing the appropriate format on the <em>Manage display</em> page.','','none'),(6277,'Performing updates through the Update page','','none'),(6278,'Link to the user','','none'),(6279,'Display the user or author name.','','none'),(6280,'Password required for protected field change','Validation','none'),(6281,'Text to use for this variant, @count will be replaced with the value.','','none'),(6282,'Text to use for the singular form, @count will be replaced with the value.','','none'),(6283,'Testing multilingual with English','','none'),(6284,'Contains US ASCII characters only','','none'),(6285,'Checkout complete! Thank you for your purchase.','','none'),(6286,'Resolving missing content','','none'),(6287,'The following @entity-type translations will be deleted:','','none'),(6288,'Delete @language translation','','10.2.3'),(6289,'The @entity-type %label @language translation has been deleted.','','none'),(6290,'Are you sure you want to delete the @language translation of the @entity-type %label?','','10.2.3'),(6291,'The core.extension configuration does not exist.','','none'),(6292,'Unable to install the %module module since it does not exist.','','10.4.5'),(6293,'Unable to uninstall the %module module since the %dependent_module module is installed.','','none'),(6294,'Unable to install the %theme theme since it does not exist.','','none'),(6295,'Unable to install the %theme theme since it requires the %required_theme theme.','','none'),(6296,'Unable to uninstall the %theme theme since the %dependent_theme theme is installed.','','none'),(6297,'Configuration %name depends on the %owner module that will not be installed after import.','','none'),(6298,'Configuration %name depends on the %owner theme that will not be installed after import.','','10.4.5'),(6299,'Configuration %name depends on the %owner extension that will not be installed after import.','','none'),(6300,'Unable to install the %module module since it requires the %required_module module.Unable to install the %module module since it requires the %required_module modules.','','none'),(6301,'Configuration %name depends on the %module module that will not be installed after import.Configuration %name depends on modules (%module) that will not be installed after import.','','none'),(6302,'Configuration %name depends on the %theme theme that will not be installed after import.Configuration %name depends on themes (%theme) that will not be installed after import.','','10.4.5'),(6303,'Configuration %name depends on the %config configuration that will not exist after import.Configuration %name depends on configuration (%config) that will not exist after import.','','10.4.5'),(6304,'Interface text','','10.4.5'),(6305,'Order of language detection methods for interface text. If a translation of interface text is available in the detected language, it will be displayed.','','10.4.5'),(6306,'Inaccessible','','10.4.5'),(6307,'NotNull','Validation','none'),(6308,'Null','Validation','none'),(6309,'Empty block library behavior','','none'),(6310,'Provides a link to add a new block.','','none'),(6311,'Books have a hierarchical structure, called a <em>book outline</em>. Each book outline can have nested pages up to nine levels deep. Multiple content types can be configured to behave as a book outline. From the content edit form, it is possible to add a page to a book outline or create a new book.','','none'),(6312,'Configuring content types for books','','none'),(6313,'Content type for the <em>Add child page</em> link','','none'),(6314,'The configuration cannot be imported because it failed validation for the following reasons:','','none'),(6315,'Link to translate @entity_type_label','','10.2.3'),(6316,'Provide a translation link to the @entity_type_label.','','10.2.3'),(6317,'The Forum module lets you create threaded discussion forums with functionality similar to other message board systems. In a forum, users post topics and threads in nested hierarchies, allowing discussions to be categorized and grouped.','','none'),(6318,'A forum is represented by a hierarchical structure, consisting of:','','none'),(6319,'<em>Forums</em> (for example, <em>Recipes for cooking vegetables</em>)','','none'),(6320,'<em>Forum topics</em> submitted by users (for example, <em>How to cook potatoes</em>), which start discussions.','','none'),(6321,'Threaded <em>comments</em> submitted by users (for example, <em>You wash the potatoes first and then...</em>).','','none'),(6322,'Optional <em>containers</em>, used to group similar forums. Forums can be placed inside containers, and vice versa.','','none'),(6323,'Setting up the forum structure','','none'),(6324,'Navigating in the forum','','none'),(6325,'Interface text language selected for page','','10.4.5'),(6326,'Customize %language_name language detection to differ from Interface text language detection settings','','10.4.5'),(6327,'The domain for %language may only contain the domain name, not a trailing slash, protocol and/or port.','','none'),(6328,'@language translation of the @type %label has been deleted.','','10.2.3'),(6329,'Xdebug settings','','none'),(6330,'xdebug.max_nesting_level is set to %value.','','none'),(6331,'Set <code>xdebug.max_nesting_level=@level</code> in your PHP configuration as some pages in your Drupal site will not work when this setting is too low.','','none'),(6332,'For more detailed information, see the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/upgrade\">upgrading handbook</a>. If you are unsure what these terms mean you should probably contact your hosting provider.','','none'),(6333,'Trimmed limit','','none'),(6334,'If the summary is not set, the trimmed %label field will end at the last full sentence before this character limit.','','none'),(6335,'Trimmed limit: @trim_length characters','','none'),(6336,'Working with multilingual views','','none'),(6337,'If your site has multiple languages and translated entities, each result row in a view will contain one translation of each involved entity (a view can involve multiple entities if it uses relationships). You can use a filter to restrict your view to one language: without filtering, if an entity has three translations it will add three rows to the results; if you filter by language, at most one result will appear (it could be zero if that particular entity does not have a translation matching your language filter choice). If a view uses relationships, each entity in the relationship needs to be filtered separately. You can filter a view to a fixed language choice, such as English or Spanish, or to the language selected by the page the view is displayed on (the language that is selected for the page by the language detection settings either for Content or User interface).','','none'),(6338,'Because each result row contains a specific translation of each entity, field-level filters are also relative to these entity translations. For example, if your view has a filter that specifies that the entity title should contain a particular English word, you will presumably filter out all rows containing Chinese translations, since they will not contain the English word. If your view also has a second filter specifying that the title should contain a particular Chinese word, and if you are using \"And\" logic for filtering, you will presumably end up with no results in the view, because there are probably not any entity translations containing both the English and Chinese words in the title.','','none'),(6339,'Independent of filtering, you can choose the display language (the language used to display the entities and their fields) via a setting on the display. Your language choices are the same as the filter language choices, with an additional choice of \"Content language of view row\" and \"Original language of content in view row\", which means to display each entity in the result row using the language that entity has or in which it was originally created. In theory, this would give you the flexibility to filter to French translations, for instance, and then display the results in Spanish. The more usual choices would be to use the same language choices for the display language and each entity filter in the view, or to use the Row language setting for the display.','','none'),(6340,'Entity link','','none'),(6341,'Entity delete link','','none'),(6342,'Entity edit link','','none'),(6343,'Link to @entity_type_label','','10.4.5'),(6344,'Provide a view link to the @entity_type_label.','','10.2.3'),(6345,'Link to edit @entity_type_label','','10.2.3'),(6346,'Provide an edit link to the @entity_type_label.','','10.2.3'),(6347,'Link to delete @entity_type_label','','10.2.3'),(6348,'Provide a delete link to the @entity_type_label.','','10.2.3'),(6349,'View','View entity type','10.4.5'),(6350,'Options such as paging, table sorting, and exposed filters will not initiate a page refresh.','','none'),(6351,'Select pager','','none'),(6352,'This can be an internal Drupal path such as node/add or an external URL such as \"https://www.drupal.org\". You may use the \"Replacement patterns\" above.','','none'),(6353,'Per default the table is hidden for an empty view. With this option it is possible to show an empty table with the text in it.','','10.4.5'),(6354,'Cache tags','','none'),(6355,'Timestamp display format settings','','none'),(6356,'Future format','','none'),(6357,'Past format','','none'),(6358,'@requirements_message (Currently using @item version @version)','','none'),(6359,'The MyISAM storage engine is not supported.','','none'),(6360,'0 seconds','','10.4.5'),(6361,'The validation failed because the value conflicts with the value in %field_name, which you cannot access.','','none'),(6362,'Unable to uninstall the %profile profile since it is the install profile.','','none'),(6363,'The @module module is required','','none'),(6364,'Use <em>@interval</em> where you want the formatted interval text to appear.','','none'),(6365,'How many time interval units should be shown in the formatted output.','','none'),(6366,'Future date: %display','','none'),(6367,'Past date: %display','','none'),(6368,'- Default site/user time zone -','','none'),(6369,'Date format: @date_format','','none'),(6370,'Time zone: @timezone','','none'),(6371,'Revision translation affected','','10.4.5'),(6372,'Indicates if the last edit of a translation belongs to current revision.','','10.2.3'),(6373,'To uninstall Book, delete all content that is part of a book','','none'),(6374,'To uninstall Book, delete all content that has the Book content type','','none'),(6375,'Configuration archive','','10.4.5'),(6376,'Your configuration files were successfully uploaded and are ready for import.','','none'),(6377,'Translate any configuration including those shipped with modules and themes.','','10.2.3'),(6378,'Time zone override','','10.4.4'),(6379,'Datetime custom display format settings','','none'),(6380,'Datetime time ago display format settings','','none'),(6381,'The time zone selected here will always be used','','10.4.4'),(6382,'File URI','Validation','none'),(6383,'To uninstall Forum, first delete all <em>Forum</em> content','','none'),(6384,'To uninstall Forum, first delete all %vocabulary terms','','none'),(6385,'Translate interface text','','10.4.5'),(6386,'Translate any interface text including configuration shipped with modules and themes.','','10.2.3'),(6387,'Pages requested by anonymous users are stored the first time they are requested and then are reused. Depending on your site configuration and the amount of your web traffic tied to anonymous visitors, the caching system may significantly increase the speed of your site.','','none'),(6388,'Configuring the internal page cache','','none'),(6389,'Internal Page Cache','','none'),(6390,'Specify the existing path you wish to alias. For example: /node/28, /forum/1, /taxonomy/term/1.','','none'),(6391,'Configuring for performance','','none'),(6392,'Last run: %time ago.','','none'),(6393,'The path \'%path\' has to start with a slash.','','none'),(6394,'Allow user to control selected display options for this view.','','none'),(6395,'Allow user to control the number of items displayed in this view','','none'),(6396,'Allow user to specify number of items skipped from beginning of this view.','','none'),(6397,'Testing config import','','none'),(6398,'Tests install profiles in the config importer.','','none'),(6399,'Media library','','10.4.5'),(6400,'Plural variants','','none'),(6401,'No blocks available.','','none'),(6402,'Exporting the full configuration','','none'),(6403,'Importing a full configuration','','none'),(6404,'Exporting a single configuration item','','none'),(6405,'Importing a single configuration item','','none'),(6406,'Configuration synchronization','','10.4.5'),(6407,'Import and export your configuration.','','10.4.5'),(6408,'@date by @username','','10.2.3'),(6409,'You must include at least one keyword to match in the content, and punctuation is ignored.You must include at least one keyword to match in the content. Keywords must be at least @count characters, and punctuation is ignored.','','none'),(6410,'Manage responsive image styles.','','10.4.5'),(6411,'This theme is missing a \'content\' region.','','none'),(6412,'Apache version','','none'),(6413,'Due to the settings for ServerTokens in httpd.conf, it is impossible to accurately determine the version of Apache running on this server. The reported value is @reported, to run Drupal without mod_rewrite, a minimum version of 2.2.16 is needed.','','none'),(6414,'Module %name has been enabled.@count modules have been enabled: %names.','','none'),(6415,'Filter by name or description','','10.4.5'),(6416,'Enter a part of the module name or description','','10.4.5'),(6417,'The callback URL is not local and not trusted: !url','','10.4.5'),(6418,'CustomMessage: !customMessage','','10.4.5'),(6419,'Container cannot be saved to cache.','','none'),(6420,'The MySQLnd driver version %version is less than the minimum required version. Upgrade to MySQLnd version %mysqlnd_minimum_version or up, or alternatively switch mysql drivers to libmysqlclient version %libmysqlclient_minimum_version or up.','','none'),(6421,'The libmysqlclient driver version %version is less than the minimum required version. Upgrade to libmysqlclient version %libmysqlclient_minimum_version or up, or alternatively switch mysql drivers to MySQLnd version %mysqlnd_minimum_version or up.','','none'),(6422,'Drupal could not be correctly setup with the existing database due to the following error: @error.','','none'),(6423,'The database server version %version is less than the minimum required version %minimum_version.','','none'),(6424,'A value must be selected for %part.','','none'),(6425,'@title (value @number)','','10.4.5'),(6426,'1 error has been found: @count errors have been found: ','','none'),(6427,'Primary admin actions','','10.4.4'),(6428,'Shown tabs','','none'),(6429,'Select tabs being shown in the block','','none'),(6430,'Show primary tabs','','none'),(6431,'Show secondary tabs','','none'),(6432,'The blocked IP address.','','none'),(6433,'Generating accessible content','','none'),(6434,'The time that the comment was created, as a Unix timestamp.','','none'),(6435,'The time that the comment was edited by its author, as a Unix timestamp.','','none'),(6436,'The module that implements the field type.','','none'),(6437,'The entity bundle.','','none'),(6438,'The original machine name of the view mode.','','none'),(6439,'The view mode ID.','','none'),(6440,'The name of the format.','','none'),(6441,'Whether the format is cacheable.','','none'),(6442,'The role IDs which can use the format.','','none'),(6443,'The filters configured for the format.','','none'),(6444,'The status of the format','','none'),(6445,'The weight of the format','','none'),(6446,'Weight for @title language detection method','','10.4.5'),(6447,'Enable @title language detection method','','10.4.5'),(6448,'Core (Experimental)','','10.4.5'),(6449,'Migration @id is busy with another operation: @status','','none'),(6450,'@label (@type)','','none'),(6451,'Flag indicating the node type is enable','','none'),(6452,'base node.','','none'),(6453,'Breakpoint groups: viewport sizing vs art direction','','none'),(6454,'Breakpoint settings: sizes vs image styles','','none'),(6455,'Sizes field','','none'),(6456,'Image styles for sizes','','none'),(6457,'Failed to load responsive image style: “@style“ while displaying responsive image.','','none'),(6458,'Viewport Sizing','','none'),(6459,'Select a breakpoint group from the installed themes and modules. Below you can select which breakpoints to use from this group. You can also select which image style or styles to use for each breakpoint you use.','','10.4.5'),(6460,'Warning: if you change the breakpoint group you lose all your image style selections for each breakpoint.','','10.4.5'),(6461,'Select a breakpoint group from the installed themes and modules.','','none'),(6462,'Enable the Help module for more information on the sizes attribute.','','none'),(6463,'Select multiple image styles and use the sizes attribute.','','10.4.5'),(6464,'Select a single image style.','','10.4.5'),(6465,'Do not use this breakpoint.','','10.4.5'),(6466,'Select image styles with widths that range from the smallest amount of space this image will take up in the layout to the largest, bearing in mind that high resolution screens will need images 1.5x to 2x larger.','','10.4.5'),(6467,'Experimental modules enabled','','10.2.3'),(6468,'Entity/field definitions','','10.4.5'),(6469,'Tabs block','','none'),(6470,'Whether primary tabs are shown','','none'),(6471,'Whether secondary tabs are shown','','none'),(6472,'The existing format/name combination has not been altered.','','none'),(6473,'Run database updates','','none'),(6474,'The weight of the role.','','none'),(6475,'A title semantically associated with your table for increased accessibility.','','10.4.5'),(6476,'Comment_forum','','none'),(6477,'Default comment field','','none'),(6478,'Large (480×480)','','10.2.3'),(6479,'Medium (220×220)','','10.2.3'),(6480,'Thumbnail (100×100)','','10.2.3'),(6481,'D, m/d/Y - H:i','PHP date format','10.2.3'),(6482,'HTML Date','','10.2.3'),(6483,'HTML Datetime','','10.2.3'),(6484,'HTML Month','','10.2.3'),(6485,'HTML Time','','10.2.3'),(6486,'HTML Week','','10.2.3'),(6487,'HTML Year','','10.2.3'),(6488,'HTML Yearless date','','10.2.3'),(6489,'Default long date','','10.2.3'),(6490,'l, F j, Y - H:i','PHP date format','10.2.3'),(6491,'Default medium date','','10.2.3'),(6492,'Default short date','','10.2.3'),(6493,'m/d/Y - H:i','PHP date format','10.2.3'),(6494,'User account menu','','10.2.3'),(6495,'Block the selected user(s)','','10.2.3'),(6496,'Cancel the selected user account(s)','','10.2.3'),(6497,'Unblock the selected user(s)','','10.2.3'),(6498,'Basic block','','10.2.3'),(6499,'A basic block contains a title and a body.','','10.2.3'),(6500,'Website feedback','','10.2.3'),(6501,'Enter a comma-separated list. For example: Amsterdam, Mexico City, \"Cleveland, Ohio\"','','10.2.3'),(6502,'Basic HTML','','10.4.5'),(6503,'Restricted HTML','','10.2.3'),(6504,'Overridden block the selected user(s)','','none'),(6505,'The installer requires that you create a translations directory as part of the installation process. Create the directory %translations_directory . More details about installing Drupal are available in <a href=\":install_txt\">INSTALL.txt</a>.','','none'),(6506,'The installer requires read permissions to %translations_directory at all times. The <a href=\":handbook_url\">webhosting issues</a> documentation section offers help on this and other topics.','','none'),(6507,'The installer requires write permissions to %translations_directory during the installation process. The <a href=\":handbook_url\">webhosting issues</a> documentation section offers help on this and other topics.','','none'),(6508,'The installer requires to contact the translation server to download a translation file. Check your internet connection and verify that your website can reach the translation server at <a href=\":server_url\">@server_url</a>.','','none'),(6509,'The %language translation file is not available at the translation server. <a href=\":url\">Choose a different language</a> or select English and translate your website later.','','none'),(6510,'The %language translation file could not be downloaded. <a href=\":url\">Choose a different language</a> or select English and translate your website later.','','none'),(6511,'The @drupal installer requires that you create a %file as part of the installation process. Copy the %default_file file to %file. More details about installing Drupal are available in <a href=\":install_txt\">INSTALL.txt</a>.','','none'),(6512,'@drupal requires read permissions to %file at all times. The <a href=\":handbook_url\">webhosting issues</a> documentation section offers help on this and other topics.','','none'),(6513,'The @drupal installer requires write permissions to %file during the installation process. The <a href=\":handbook_url\">webhosting issues</a> documentation section offers help on this and other topics.','','none'),(6514,'The @drupal installer failed to create a %file file with proper file ownership. Log on to your web server, remove the existing %file file, and create a new one by copying the %default_file file to %file. More details about installing Drupal are available in <a href=\":install_txt\">INSTALL.txt</a>. The <a href=\":handbook_url\">webhosting issues</a> documentation section offers help on this and other topics.','','none'),(6515,'Check the messages and <a href=\":retry\">retry</a>, or you may choose to <a href=\":cont\">continue anyway</a>.','','none'),(6516,'Check the messages and <a href=\":url\">try again</a>.','','none'),(6517,'The following modules are required but were not found. Move them into the appropriate modules subdirectory, such as <em>/modules</em>. Missing modules: @modules','','none'),(6518,'Updating @module','','none'),(6519,'Entity type mismatch on rename. @old_type not equal to @new_type for existing configuration @old_name and staged configuration @new_name.','','none'),(6520,'Rename operation for simple configuration. Existing configuration @old_name and staged configuration @new_name.','','none'),(6521,'Your MySQL server and PHP MySQL driver must support utf8mb4 character encoding. Make sure to use a database system that supports this (such as MySQL/MariaDB/Percona 5.5.3 and up), and that the utf8mb4 character set is compiled in. See the <a href=\":documentation\" target=\"_blank\">MySQL documentation</a> for more information.','','none'),(6522,'The %driver database must use %encoding encoding to work with Drupal. Recreate the database with %encoding encoding. See <a href=\"INSTALL.pgsql.txt\">INSTALL.pgsql.txt</a> for more details.','','none'),(6523,'The %setting setting is currently set to \'%current_value\', but needs to be \'%needed_value\'. Change this by running the following query: <code>@query</code>','','none'),(6524,'@uri','','none'),(6525,'Operating in maintenance mode. <a href=\":url\">Go online.</a>','','none'),(6526,'Textfield size: @size','','10.4.4'),(6527,'Number of rows: @rows','','10.4.4'),(6528,'URI field size: @size','','none'),(6529,'WARNING: You are not using an encrypted connection, so your password will be sent in plain text. <a href=\":https-link\">Learn more</a>.','','none'),(6530,'@name cannot be longer than %max characters but is currently %length characters long.','','none'),(6531,'<ul>\n<li>To start over, you must empty your existing database and copy <em>default.settings.php</em> over <em>settings.php</em>.</li>\n<li>To upgrade an existing installation, proceed to the <a href=\":update-url\">update script</a>.</li>\n<li>View your <a href=\":base-url\">existing site</a>.</li>\n</ul>','','10.4.5'),(6532,'All necessary changes to %dir and %file have been made, so you should remove write permissions to them now in order to avoid security risks. If you are unsure how to do so, consult the <a href=\":handbook_url\">online handbook</a>.','','none'),(6533,'Unique field constraint','Validation','none'),(6534,'A @entity_type with @field_name %value already exists.','','none'),(6535,'The message that should be sent. You may include placeholders like [node:title], [user:account-name], [user:display-name] and [comment:body] to represent data that will be different each time message is sent. Not all placeholders will be available in all contexts.','','none'),(6536,'The message to be displayed to the current user. You may include placeholders like [node:title], [user:account-name], [user:display-name] and [comment:body] to represent data that will be different each time message is sent. Not all placeholders will be available in all contexts.','','none'),(6537,'The Ban module allows administrators to ban visits to their site from individual IP addresses. For more information, see the <a href=\":url\">online documentation for the Ban module</a>.','','none'),(6538,'Administrators can enter IP addresses to ban on the <a href=\":bans\">IP address bans</a> page.','','none'),(6539,'The HTTP Basic Authentication module supplies an <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_access_authentication\">HTTP Basic authentication</a> provider for web service requests. This authentication provider authenticates requests using the HTTP Basic Authentication username and password, as an alternative to using Drupal\'s standard cookie-based authentication system. It is only useful if your site provides web services configured to use this type of authentication (for instance, the <a href=\":rest_help\">RESTful Web Services module</a>). For more information, see the <a href=\":hba_do\">online documentation for the HTTP Basic Authentication module</a>.','','none'),(6540,'The Block module allows you to place blocks in regions of your installed themes, and configure block settings. For more information, see the <a href=\":blocks-documentation\">online documentation for the Block module</a>.','','none'),(6541,'You can see where the regions are for the current theme by clicking the <em>Demonstrate block regions</em> link on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>. Regions are specific to each theme.','','none'),(6542,'To change the settings of an individual block click on the <em>Configure</em> link on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>. The available options vary depending on the module that provides the block. For all blocks you can change the block title and toggle whether to display it.','','none'),(6543,'You have not created any block types yet. Go to the <a href=\":url\">block type creation page</a> to add a new block type.','','none'),(6544,'You can assign separate permissions for <em>creating new books</em> as well as <em>creating</em>, <em>editing</em> and <em>deleting</em> book content. Users with the <em>Administer book outlines</em> permission can add <em>any</em> type of content to a book by selecting the appropriate book outline while editing the content. They can also view a list of all books, and edit and rearrange section titles on the <a href=\":admin-book\">Book list page</a>.','','none'),(6545,'Users with the <em>Add content and child pages to books</em> permission will see a link to <em>Add child page</em> when viewing a content item that is part of a book outline. This link will allow users to create a new content item of the content type you select on the <a href=\":admin-settings\">Book settings page</a>. By default this is the <em>Book page</em> content type.','','none'),(6546,'Book pages have a default book-specific navigation block. This navigation block contains links that lead to the previous and next pages in the book, and to the level above the current page in the book\'s structure. This block can be enabled on the <a href=\':admin-block\'>Blocks layout page</a>. For book pages to show up in the book navigation, they must be added to a book outline.','','none'),(6547,'The outline feature allows you to include pages in the <a href=\":book\">Book hierarchy</a>, as well as move them within the hierarchy or to <a href=\":book-admin\">reorder an entire book</a>.','','none'),(6548,'The parent page in the book. The maximum depth for a book and all child pages is @maxdepth. Some pages in the selected book may not be available as parents if selecting them would exceed this limit.','','none'),(6549,'The Breakpoint module keeps track of the height, width, and resolution breakpoints where a responsive design needs to change in order to respond to different devices being used to view the site. This module does not have a user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":docs\">online documentation for the Breakpoint module</a>.','','none'),(6550,'<a href=\":w3\">Media  queries</a> are a formal way to encode breakpoints. For instance, a width breakpoint at 40em would be written as the media query \"(min-width: 40em)\". Breakpoints are really just media queries with some additional meta-data, such as a name and multiplier information.','','none'),(6551,'The Comment module allows users to comment on site content, set commenting defaults and permissions, and moderate comments. For more information, see the <a href=\":comment\">online documentation for the Comment module</a>.','','none'),(6552,'Enabling commenting','','none'),(6553,'Configuring commenting settings','','none'),(6554,'Users with the appropriate permissions can override the default commenting settings of an entity type when they create an item of that type.','','none'),(6555,'Comments from users who have the <em>Skip comment approval</em> permission are published immediately. All other comments are placed in the <a href=\":comment-approval\">Unapproved comments</a> queue, until a user who has permission to <em>Administer comments and comment settings</em> publishes or deletes them. Published comments can be bulk managed on the <a href=\":admin-comment\">Published comments</a> administration page. When a comment has no replies, it remains editable by its author, as long as the author has <em>Edit own comments</em> permission.','','none'),(6556,'In reply to @parent_title by @parent_username','','none'),(6557,'Name for @anonymous','','none'),(6558,'<a href=\":login\">Log in</a> or <a href=\":register\">register</a> to post comments','','10.2.3'),(6559,'<a href=\":login\">Log in</a> to post comments','','none'),(6560,'Select the Comment type to use for this comment field. Manage the comment types from the <a href=\":url\">administration overview page</a>.','','none'),(6561,'The Configuration Manager module provides a user interface for importing and exporting configuration changes between installations of your website in different environments. Configuration is stored in YAML format. For more information, see the <a href=\":url\">online documentation for the Configuration Manager module</a>.','','none'),(6562,'You can create and download an archive consisting of all your site\'s configuration exported as <em>*.yml</em> files on the <a href=\":url\">Export</a> page.','','none'),(6563,'You can upload a full site configuration from an archive file on the <a href=\":url\">Import</a> page. When importing data from a different environment, the site and import files must have matching configuration values for UUID in the <em>system.site</em> configuration item. That means that your other environments should initially be set up as clones of the target site. Migrations are not supported.','','none'),(6564,'You can review differences between the active configuration and an imported configuration archive on the <a href=\":synchronize\">Synchronize</a> page to ensure that the changes are as expected, before finalizing the import. The Synchronize page also shows configuration items that would be added or removed.','','none'),(6565,'You can export a single configuration item by selecting a <em>Configuration type</em> and <em>Configuration name</em> on the <a href=\":single-export\">Single export</a> page. The configuration and its corresponding <em>*.yml file name</em> are then displayed on the page for you to copy.','','none'),(6566,'You can import a single configuration item by pasting it in YAML format into the form on the <a href=\":single-import\">Single import</a> page.','','none'),(6567,'Export and download the full configuration of this site as a gzipped tar file.','','10.4.5'),(6568,'Choose a configuration item to display its YAML structure.','','10.4.5'),(6569,'Import a single configuration item by pasting its YAML structure into the text field.','','10.4.5'),(6570,'Full archive','','10.4.5'),(6571,'Single item','','10.4.5'),(6572,'Staged','','10.4.5'),(6573,'The following items in your active configuration have changes since the last import that may be lost on the next import.','','10.4.5'),(6574,'@collection configuration collection','','10.4.5'),(6575,'@source_name to @target_name','','none'),(6576,'The Configuration Translation module allows you to translate configuration text; for example, the site name, vocabularies, menus, or date formats. Together with the modules <a href=\":language\">Language</a>, <a href=\":content-translation\">Content Translation</a>, and <a href=\":locale\">Interface Translation</a>, it allows you to build multilingual websites. For more information, see the <a href=\":doc_url\">online documentation for the Configuration Translation module</a>.','','none'),(6577,'In order to translate configuration, the website must have at least two <a href=\":url\">languages</a>.','','none'),(6578,'Users with the <em>Translate user edited configuration</em> permission can access the configuration translation overview, and manage translations for specific languages. The <a href=\":translation-page\">Configuration translation</a> page shows a list of all configuration text that can be translated, either as individual items or as lists. After you click on <em>Translate</em>, you are provided with a list of all languages. You can <em>add</em> or <em>edit</em> a translation for a specific language. Users with specific configuration permissions can also <em>edit</em> the text for the site\'s default language. For some configuration text items (for example for the site information), the specific translation pages can also be accessed directly from their configuration pages.','','none'),(6579,'You can choose to translate date formats on the <a href=\":translation-page\">Configuration translation</a> page. This allows you not only to translate the label text, but also to set a language-specific <em>PHP date format</em>.','','none'),(6580,'@label <span class=\"visually-hidden\">(@source_language)</span>','','10.2.3'),(6581,'The Contact module allows visitors to contact registered users on your site, using the personal contact form, and also allows you to set up site-wide contact forms. For more information, see the <a href=\":contact\">online documentation for the Contact module</a>.','','none'),(6582,'On the <a href=\":contact_admin\">Contact forms page</a>, you can configure the fields and display of the personal contact form, and you can set up one or more site-wide contact forms. Each site-wide contact form has a machine name, a label, and one or more defined recipients; when a site visitor submits the form, the field values are sent to those recipients.','','none'),(6583,'One site-wide contact form can be designated as the default contact form. If you choose to designate a default form, the <em>Contact</em> menu link in the <em>Footer</em> menu will link to it. You can modify this link from the <a href=\":menu-settings\">Menus page</a> if you have the Menu UI module installed. You can also create links to other contact forms; the URL for each form you have set up has format <em>contact/machine_name_of_form</em>.','','none'),(6584,'From the <a href=\":contact_admin\">Contact forms page</a>, you can configure the fields to be shown on contact forms, including their labels and help text. If you would like other content (such as text or images) to appear on a contact form, use a block. You can create and edit blocks on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>, if the Block module is installed.','','none'),(6585,'[@form] @subject','','none'),(6586,'@sender-name (@sender-url) sent a message using the contact form at @form-url.','','none'),(6587,'[@site-name] @subject','','none'),(6588,'Hello @recipient-name,','','none'),(6589,'@sender-name (@sender-url) has sent you a message via your contact form at @site-name.','','none'),(6590,'If you don\'t want to receive such emails, you can change your settings at @recipient-edit-url.','','none'),(6591,'@name (not verified)','','none'),(6592,'The contact form has not been configured. <a href=\":add\">Add one or more forms</a> .','','none'),(6593,'In order to translate content, the website must have at least two <a href=\":url\">languages</a>. When that is the case, you can enable translation for the desired content entities on the <a href=\":translation-entity\">Content language</a> page. When enabling translation you can choose the default language for content and decide whether to show the language selection field on the content editing forms.','','none'),(6594,'Before you can translate content, there must be at least two languages added on the <a href=\":url\">languages administration</a> page.','','none'),(6595,'To configure translation for this field, <a href=\":language-settings-url\">enable language support</a> for this type.','','10.4.4'),(6596,'<a href=\":settings_url\">Enable translation</a> for <em>content types</em>, <em>taxonomy vocabularies</em>, <em>accounts</em>, or any other element you wish to translate.','','none'),(6597,'The Contextual links module gives users with the <em>Use contextual links</em> permission quick access to tasks associated with certain areas of pages on your site. For example, a menu displayed as a block has links to edit the menu and configure the block. For more information, see the <a href=\":contextual\">online documentation for the Contextual Links module</a>.','','none'),(6598,'Hovering over the area of interest will temporarily make the contextual links button visible (which looks like a pencil in most themes, and is normally displayed in the upper right corner of the area). The icon typically looks like this: @picture','','none'),(6599,'The Datetime module provides a Date field that stores dates and times. It also provides the Form API elements <em>datetime</em> and <em>datelist</em> for use in programming modules. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI module help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":datetime_do\">online documentation for the Datetime module</a>.','','none'),(6600,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the Date field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6601,'Date part order: @order','','none'),(6602,'Time type: @time_type','','none'),(6603,'Time increments: @increment','','none'),(6604,'The Database Logging module logs system events in the Drupal database. For more information, see the <a href=\":dblog\">online documentation for the Database Logging module</a>.','','none'),(6605,'The Database Logging module allows you to view an event log on the <a href=\":dblog\">Recent log messages</a> page. The log is a chronological list of recorded events containing usage data, performance data, errors, warnings and operational information. Administrators should check the log on a regular basis to ensure their site is working properly.','','none'),(6606,'In case of errors or problems with the site, the <a href=\":dblog\">Recent log messages</a> page can be useful for debugging, since it shows the sequence of events. The log messages include usage information, warnings, and errors.','','none'),(6607,'The maximum number of messages to keep in the database log. Requires a <a href=\":cron\">cron maintenance task</a>.','','none'),(6608,'Pages which are suitable for caching are cached the first time they are requested, then the cached version is served for all later requests. Dynamic content is handled automatically so that both cache correctness and hit ratio is maintained.','','none'),(6609,'Internal Dynamic Page Cache','','none'),(6610,'On the <a href=\":formats\">Text formats and editors page</a> you can see which text editor is associated with each text format. You can change this by clicking on the <em>Configure</em> link, and then choosing a text editor or <em>none</em> from the <em>Text editor</em> drop-down list. The text editor will then be displayed with any text field for which this text format is chosen.','','none'),(6611,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the entity reference field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6612,'No eligible views were found. <a href=\":create\">Create a view</a> with an <em>Entity Reference</em> display, or add such a display to an <a href=\":existing\">existing view</a>.','','none'),(6613,'The Field module allows custom data fields to be defined for <em>entity</em> types (see below). The Field module takes care of storing, loading, editing, and rendering field data. Most users will not interact with the Field module directly, but will instead use the <a href=\":field-ui-help\">Field UI module</a> user interface. Module developers can use the Field API to make new entity types \"fieldable\" and thus allow fields to be attached to them. For more information, see the <a href=\":field\">online documentation for the Field module</a>.','','none'),(6614,'You can add, edit, and delete view modes for entities on the <a href=\":view_modes\">View modes page</a>, and you can add, edit, and delete form modes for entities on the <a href=\":form_modes\">Form modes page</a>. Once you have defined a view mode or form mode for an entity type, it will be available on the Manage display or Manage form display page for each sub-type of that entity.','','none'),(6615,'There are no fields yet added. You can add new fields on the <a href=\":link\">Manage fields</a> page.','','none'),(6616,'The %display_mode mode now uses custom display settings. You might want to <a href=\":url\">configure them</a>.','','none'),(6617,'@size limit.','','10.4.5'),(6618,'file from @field_name','','none'),(6619,'The File module allows you to create fields that contain files. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":file_documentation\">online documentation for the File module</a>.','','none'),(6620,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the file field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6621,'Uploaded files can either be stored as <em>public</em> or <em>private</em>, depending on the <a href=\":file-system\">File system settings</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":system-help\">System module help page</a>.','','none'),(6622,'The file used in the @name field may not be referenced.','','none'),(6623,'The file referenced by the @name field does not exist.','','none'),(6624,'Use the <a href=\":url\">@label</a> text format','','10.4.5'),(6625,'If you do encounter problems, try using HTML character entities. A common example looks like &amp;amp; for an ampersand &amp; character. For a full list of entities see HTML\'s <a href=\":html-entities\">entities</a> page. Some of the available characters include:','','10.4.5'),(6626,'Limit allowed HTML tags and correct faulty HTML','','10.4.5'),(6627,'The Forum module adds and uses a content type called <em>Forum topic</em>. For background information on content types, see the <a href=\":node_help\">Node module help page</a>.','','none'),(6628,'For more information, see the <a href=\":forum\">online documentation for the Forum module</a>.','','none'),(6629,'Visit the <a href=\":forums\">Forums page</a> to set up containers and forums to hold your discussion topics.','','none'),(6630,'The <a href=\":create-topic\">Forum topic</a> link on the <a href=\":content-add\">Add content</a> page creates the first post of a new threaded discussion, or thread.','','none'),(6631,'Adjust the display of your forum topics. Organize the forums on the <a href=\":forum-structure\">forum structure page</a>.','','none'),(6632,'To uninstall Forum, first delete all <a href=\":url\">%vocabulary</a> terms','','none'),(6633,'No containers or forums available. <a href=\":container\">Add container</a> or <a href=\":forum\">Add forum</a>.','','none'),(6634,'<strong>Configure your website</strong> Once logged in, visit the <a href=\":admin\">Administration page</a>, where you may <a href=\":config\">customize and configure</a> all aspects of your website.','','none'),(6635,'<strong>Customize your website design</strong> To change the \"look and feel\" of your website, visit the <a href=\":themes\">Appearance page</a>. You may choose from one of the included themes or download additional themes from the <a href=\":download_themes\">Drupal.org themes page</a>.','','none'),(6636,'<strong>Start posting content</strong> Finally, you may <a href=\":content\">add new content</a> to your website.','','none'),(6637,'The Help module displays explanations for using each module listed on the main <a href=\":help\">Help reference page</a>.','','none'),(6638,'Page-specific help text provided by modules is displayed in the Help block. This block can be placed and configured on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>.','','none'),(6639,'The History module keeps track of which content a user has read. It marks content as <em>new</em> or <em>updated</em> depending on the last time the user viewed it. History records that are older than one month are removed during cron, which means that content older than one month is always considered <em>read</em>. The History module does not have a user interface but it provides a filter to <a href=\":views-help\">Views</a> to show new or updated content. For more information, see the <a href=\":url\">online documentation for the History module</a>.','','none'),(6640,'image from @field_name','','none'),(6641,'The Image module allows you to create fields that contain image files and to configure <a href=\":image_styles\">Image styles</a> that can be used to manipulate the display of images. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for terminology and general information on entities, fields, and how to create and manage fields. For more information, see the <a href=\":image_documentation\">online documentation for the Image module</a>.','','none'),(6642,'The concept of image styles is that you can upload a single image but display it in several ways; each display variation, or <em>image style</em>, is the result of applying one or more <em>effects</em> to the original image. As an example, you might upload a high-resolution image with a 4:3 aspect ratio, and display it scaled down, square cropped, or black-and-white (or any combination of these effects). The Image module provides a way to do this efficiently: you configure an image style with the desired effects on the <a href=\":image\">Image styles page</a>, and the first time a particular image is requested in that style, the effects are applied. The resulting image is saved, and the next time that same style is requested, the saved image is retrieved without the need to recalculate the effects. Drupal core provides several effects that you can use to define styles; others may be provided by contributed modules.','','none'),(6643,'When you create an image field, you will need to choose whether the uploaded images will be stored in the public or private file directory defined in your settings.php file and shown on the <a href=\":file-system\">File system page</a>. This choice cannot be changed later. You can also configure your field to store files in a subdirectory of the public or private directory; this setting can be changed later and can be different for each entity sub-type using the field. For more information on file storage, see the <a href=\":system-help\">System module help page</a>.','','none'),(6644,'There are currently no styles. <a href=\":url\">Add a new one</a>.','','none'),(6645,'Both a height and width value must be specified in the @name field.','','none'),(6646,'The primary identifier for an image style.','','none'),(6647,'The style machine name.','','none'),(6648,'The style administrative name.','','none'),(6649,'By default, content is created in the site\'s default language and no language selector is displayed on content creation pages. On the <a href=\":content_language\">Content language</a> page you can customize the language configuration for any supported content entity on your site (for example for content types or menu links). After choosing an entity, you are provided with a drop-down menu to set the default language and a check-box to display language selectors.','','none'),(6650,'The <a href=\":detection\">Detection and selection</a> page provides several methods for deciding which language is used for displaying interface text. When a method detects and selects an interface language, then the following methods in the list are not applied. You can order them by importance, with your preferred method at the top of the list, followed by one or several fall-back methods.','','none'),(6651,'<em>Browser</em> sets the interface language based on the browser\'s language settings. Since browsers use different language codes to refer to the same languages, you can add and edit languages codes to map the browser language codes to the <a href=\":language_list\">language codes</a> used on your site.','','none'),(6652,'Reorder the configured languages to set their order in the language switcher block and, when editing content, in the list of selectable languages. This ordering does not impact <a href=\":detection\">detection and selection</a>.','','10.4.5'),(6653,'The site default language can also be set. It is not recommended to change the default language on a working site. <a href=\":language-detection\">Configure the Selected language</a> setting on the detection and selection page to change the fallback language for language selection.','','10.4.5'),(6654,'Define how to decide which language is used to display page elements (primarily text provided by modules, such as field labels and help text). This decision is made by evaluating a series of detection methods for languages; the first detection method that gets a result will determine which language is used for that type of text. Be aware that some language detection methods are unreliable under certain conditions, such as browser detection when page-caching is enabled and a user is not currently logged in. Define the order of evaluation of language detection methods on this page. The default language can be changed in the <a href=\":admin-change-language\">list of languages</a>.','','10.4.5'),(6655,'Browsers use different language codes to refer to the same languages. Internally, a best effort is made to determine the correct language based on the code that the browser sends. You can add and edit additional mappings from browser language codes to <a href=\":configure-languages\">site languages</a>.','','none'),(6656,'Changing the selected language here (and leaving this option as the last among the detection and selection options) is the easiest way to change the fallback language for the website, if you need to change how your site works by default (e.g., when using an empty path prefix or using the default domain). <a href=\":admin-change-language\">Changing the site\'s default language</a> itself might have other undesired side effects.','','10.4.5'),(6657,'Explanation of the language options is found on the <a href=\":languages_list_page\">languages list page</a>.','','10.4.5'),(6658,'Site\'s default language (@language)','','10.4.5'),(6659,'Use one of the language switcher blocks to allow site visitors to switch between languages. You can enable these blocks on the <a href=\":block-admin\">block administration page</a>.','','none'),(6660,'Use language codes as <a href=\":w3ctags\">defined by the W3C</a> for interoperability. <em>Examples: \"en\", \"en-gb\" and \"zh-hant\".</em>','','10.2.3'),(6661,'%field must be a valid language tag as <a href=\":url\">defined by the W3C</a>.','','none'),(6662,'The prefix may only be left blank for the <a href=\":url\">selected detection fallback language.</a>','','none'),(6663,'The Link module allows you to create fields that contain internal or external URLs and optional link text. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":link_documentation\">online documentation for the Link module</a>.','','none'),(6664,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the link field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6665,'One translation file could not be checked. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.@count translation files could not be checked. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.','','none'),(6666,'@message (@percent%).','','none'),(6667,'One translation file could not be imported. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.@count translation files could not be imported. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.','','none'),(6668,'One translation string was skipped because of disallowed or malformed HTML. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.@count translation strings were skipped because of disallowed or malformed HTML. <a href=\":url\">See the log</a> for details.','','none'),(6669,'The Interface Translation module allows you to translate interface text (<em>strings</em>) into different languages, and to switch between them for the display of interface text. It uses the functionality provided by the <a href=\":language\">Language module</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":doc-url\">online documentation for the Interface Translation module</a>.','','none'),(6670,'You can check how much of the interface on your site is translated into which language on the <a href=\":languages\">Languages</a> page. On the <a href=\":translation-updates\">Available translation updates</a> page, you can check whether interface translation updates are available on the <a href=\":server\">Drupal translation server</a>.','','none'),(6671,'You can translate individual strings directly on the <a href=\":translate\">User interface translation</a> page, or download the currently-used translation file for a specific language on the <a href=\":export\">Interface translation export</a> page. Once you have edited the translation file, you can then import it again on the <a href=\":import\">Interface translation import</a> page.','','none'),(6672,'This page allows a translator to search for specific translated and untranslated strings, and is used when creating or editing translations. (Note: Because translation tasks involve many strings, it may be more convenient to <a title=\"User interface translation export\" href=\":export\">export</a> strings for offline editing in a desktop Gettext translation editor.) Searches may be limited to strings in a specific language.','','none'),(6673,'This page allows translators to manually import translated strings contained in a Gettext Portable Object (.po) file. Manual import may be used for customized translations or for the translation of custom modules and themes. To customize translations you can download a translation file from the <a href=\":url\">Drupal translation server</a> or <a title=\"User interface translation export\" href=\":export\">export</a> translations from the site, customize the translations using a Gettext translation editor, and import the result using this page.','','none'),(6674,'Updates available for: @languages. See the <a href=\":updates\">Available translation updates</a> page for more information.','','none'),(6675,'Missing translations for: @languages. See the <a href=\":updates\">Available translation updates</a> page for more information.','','10.4.5'),(6676,'No translation status is available. See the <a href=\":updates\">Available translation updates</a> page for more information.','','none'),(6677,'Interface translation settings','','none'),(6678,'Interface translation import','','none'),(6679,'Interface translation export','','none'),(6680,'Select how frequently you want to check for new interface translations for your currently installed modules and themes. <a href=\":url\">Check updates now</a>.','','none'),(6681,'Translation files are stored locally in the  %path directory. You can change this directory on the <a href=\":url\">File system</a> configuration page.','','none'),(6682,'Translation files will not be stored locally. Change the Interface translation directory on the <a href=\":url\">File system configuration</a> page.','','none'),(6683,'You have selected local translation source, but no <a href=\":url\">Interface translation directory</a> was configured.','','none'),(6684,'No translatable languages available. <a href=\":add_language\">Add a language</a> first.','','none'),(6685,'No translation status available. <a href=\":check\">Check manually</a>.','','none'),(6686,'It is required by the Menu UI module, which provides an interface for managing menus and menu links. For more information, see the <a href=\":menu-help\">Menu UI module help page</a> and the <a href=\":drupal-org-help\">online documentation for the Custom Menu Links module</a>.','','none'),(6687,'The Menu UI module provides an interface for managing menus. A menu is a hierarchical collection of links, which can be within or external to the site, generally used for navigation. For more information, see the <a href=\":menu\">online documentation for the Menu UI module</a>.','','none'),(6688,'You can enable the newly-created block for this menu on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>.','','none'),(6689,'Each menu has a corresponding block that is managed on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>.','','10.2.3'),(6690,'There are no menu links yet. <a href=\":url\">Add link</a>.','','10.2.3'),(6691,'The Migrate module provides a framework for migrating data, usually from an external source into your site. It does not provide a user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":migrate\">online documentation for the Migrate module</a>.','','none'),(6692,'Memory usage is @usage (@pct% of limit @limit), reclaiming memory.','','none'),(6693,'Memory usage is now @usage (@pct% of limit @limit), not enough reclaimed, starting new batch','','none'),(6694,'Memory usage is now @usage (@pct% of limit @limit), reclaimed enough, continuing','','none'),(6695,'The Migrate Drupal module provides a framework based on the <a href=\":migrate\">Migrate module</a> to facilitate migration from a Drupal (6, 7, or 8) site to your website. It does not provide a user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":migrate_drupal\">online documentation for the Migrate Drupal module</a>.','','none'),(6696,'The content access permissions need to be rebuilt. <a href=\":node_access_rebuild\">Rebuild permissions</a>.','','10.4.5'),(6697,'The Node module manages the creation, editing, deletion, settings, and display of the main site content. Content items managed by the Node module are typically displayed as pages on your site, and include a title, some meta-data (author, creation time, content type, etc.), and optional fields containing text or other data (fields are managed by the <a href=\":field\">Field module</a>). For more information, see the <a href=\":node\">online documentation for the Node module</a>.','','none'),(6698,'When new content is created, the Node module records basic information about the content, including the author, date of creation, and the <a href=\":content-type\">Content type</a>. It also manages the <em>publishing options</em>, which define whether or not the content is published, promoted to the front page of the site, and/or sticky at the top of content lists. Default settings can be configured for each <a href=\":content-type\">type of content</a> on your site.','','none'),(6699,'The Node module gives users with the <em>Administer content types</em> permission the ability to <a href=\":content-new\">create new content types</a> in addition to the default ones already configured. Creating custom content types gives you the flexibility to add <a href=\":field\">fields</a> and configure default settings that suit the differing needs of various site content.','','none'),(6700,'The <a href=\":content\">Content</a> page lists your content, allowing you add new content, filter, edit or delete existing content, or perform bulk operations on existing content.','','none'),(6701,'The Node module makes a number of permissions available for each content type, which can be set by role on the <a href=\":permissions\">permissions page</a>.','','none'),(6702,'If the site is experiencing problems with permissions to content, you may have to rebuild the permissions cache. Rebuilding will remove all privileges to content and replace them with permissions based on the current modules and settings. Rebuilding may take some time if there is a lot of content or complex permission settings. After rebuilding has completed, content will automatically use the new permissions. <a href=\":rebuild\">Rebuild permissions</a>','','10.4.5'),(6703,'Maintain the types of content available and the fields that are associated with those types.','','10.2.3'),(6704,'No content types available. <a href=\":link\">Add content type</a>.','','none'),(6705,'Node from URL','','10.4.5'),(6706,'The Options module allows you to create fields where data values are selected from a fixed list of options. Usually these items are entered through a select list, checkboxes, or radio buttons. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":options_do\">online documentation for the Options module</a>.','','none'),(6707,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the list fields can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6708,'The Internal Page Cache module caches pages for anonymous users in the database. For more information, see the <a href=\":pagecache-documentation\">online documentation for the Internal Page Cache module</a>.','','none'),(6709,'Pages are usually identical for all anonymous users, while they can be personalized for each authenticated user. This is why entire pages can be cached for anonymous users, whereas they will have to be rebuilt for every authenticated user.','','none'),(6710,'To speed up your site for authenticated users, see the <a href=\":dynamic_page_cache-help\">Dynamic Page Cache module</a>.','','none'),(6711,'The Path module allows you to specify an alias, or custom URL, for any existing internal system path. Aliases should not be confused with URL redirects, which allow you to forward a changed or inactive URL to a new URL. In addition to making URLs more readable, aliases also help search engines index content more effectively. Multiple aliases may be used for a single internal system path. To automate the aliasing of paths, you can install the contributed module <a href=\":pathauto\">Pathauto</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":path\">online documentation for the Path module</a>.','','none'),(6712,'If you create or edit a taxonomy term you can add an alias (for example <em>music/jazz</em>) in the field \"URL alias\". When creating or editing content you can add an alias (for example <em>about-us/team</em>) under the section \"URL path settings\" in the field \"URL alias\". Aliases for any other path can be added through the page <a href=\":aliases\">URL aliases</a>. To add aliases a user needs the permission <a href=\":permissions\">Create and edit URL aliases</a>.','','none'),(6713,'The Path module provides a way to search and view a <a href=\":aliases\">list of all aliases</a> that are in use on your website. Aliases can be added, edited and deleted through this list.','','none'),(6714,'The internal system path.','','none'),(6715,'The path alias.','','none'),(6716,'The Responsive Image module provides an image formatter that allows browsers to select which image file to display based on media queries or which image file types the browser supports, using the HTML 5 picture and source elements and/or the sizes, srcset and type attributes. For more information, see the <a href=\":responsive_image\">online documentation for the Responsive Image module</a>.','','none'),(6717,'By creating responsive image styles you define which options the browser has in selecting which image file to display. In most cases this means providing different image sizes based on the viewport size. On the <a href=\":responsive_image_style\">Responsive image styles</a> page, click <em>Add responsive image style</em> to create a new style. First choose a label, a fallback image style and a breakpoint group and click Save.','','none'),(6718,'Below the Sizes field you can choose multiple image styles so the browser can choose the best image file size to fill the space defined in the Sizes field. Typically you will want to use image styles that resize your image to have options that range from the smallest px width possible for the space the image will appear in to the largest px width possible, with a variety of widths in between. You may want to provide image styles with widths that are 1.5x to 2x the space available in the layout to account for high resolution screens. Image styles can be defined on the <a href=\":image_styles\">Image styles page</a> that is provided by the <a href=\":image_help\">Image module</a>.','','none'),(6719,'After defining responsive image styles, you can use them in the display settings for your Image fields, so that the site displays responsive images using the HTML5 picture tag. Open the Manage display page for the entity type (content type, taxonomy vocabulary, etc.) that the Image field is attached to. Choose the format <em>Responsive image</em>, click the Edit icon, and select one of the responsive image styles that you have created. For general information on how to manage fields and their display see the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI module help page</a>. For background information about entities and fields see the <a href=\":field_help\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(6720,'See the <a href=\":responsive_image_help\">Responsive Image help page</a> for information on the sizes attribute.','','10.4.5'),(6721,'Configure Responsive Image Styles','','none'),(6722,'The Search module provides the ability to set up search pages based on plugins provided by other modules. In Drupal core, there are two page-type plugins: the Content page type provides keyword searching for content managed by the Node module, and the Users page type provides keyword searching for registered users. Contributed modules may provide other page-type plugins. For more information, see the <a href=\":search-module\">online documentation for the Search module</a>.','','none'),(6723,'To configure search pages, visit the <a href=\":search-settings\">Search pages page</a>. In the Search pages section, you can add a new search page, edit the configuration of existing search pages, enable and disable search pages, and choose the default search page. Each enabled search page has a URL path starting with <em>search</em>, and each will appear as a tab or local task link on the <a href=\":search-url\">search page</a>; you can configure the text that is shown in the tab. In addition, some search page plugins have additional settings that you can configure for each search page.','','none'),(6724,'Some search page plugins, such as the core Content search page, index searchable text using the Drupal core search index, and will not work unless content is indexed. Indexing is done during <em>cron</em> runs, so it requires a <a href=\":cron\">cron maintenance task</a> to be set up. There are also several settings affecting indexing that can be configured on the <a href=\":search-settings\">Search pages page</a>: the number of items to index per cron run, the minimum word length to index, and how to handle Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters.','','none'),(6725,'Users with <a href=\":search_permission\">Use search</a> permission can use the Search block and <a href=\":search\">Search page</a>. Users with the <a href=\":node_permission\">View published content</a> permission can use configured search pages of type <em>Content</em> to search for content containing exact keywords; in addition, users with <a href=\":search_permission\">Use advanced search</a> permission can use more complex search filtering. Users with the <a href=\":user_permission\">View user information</a> permission can use configured search pages of type <em>Users</em> to search for active users containing the keyword anywhere in the username, and users with the <a href=\":user_permission\">Administer users</a> permission can search for active and blocked users, by email address or username keyword.','','none'),(6726,'By default, the Search module only supports exact keyword matching in content searches. You can modify this behavior by installing a language-specific stemming module for your language (such as <a href=\":porterstemmer_url\">Porter Stemmer</a> for American English), which allows words such as walk, walking, and walked to be matched in the Search module. Another approach is to use a third-party search technology with stemming or partial word matching features built in, such as <a href=\":solr_url\">Apache Solr</a> or <a href=\":sphinx_url\">Sphinx</a>. There are also contributed modules that provide additional search pages. These and other <a href=\":contrib-search\">search-related contributed modules</a> can be downloaded by visiting Drupal.org.','','none'),(6727,'… @excerpt … @excerpt …','','none'),(6728,'This module does not have a user interface. It is used by other modules which need to serialize data, such as <a href=\":rest\">REST</a>.','','none'),(6729,'For more information, see the <a href=\":doc_url\">online documentation for the Serialization module</a>.','','none'),(6730,'The Shortcut module allows users to create sets of <em>shortcut</em> links to commonly-visited pages of the site. Shortcuts are contained within <em>sets</em>. Each user with <em>Select any shortcut set</em> permission can select a shortcut set created by anyone at the site. For more information, see the <a href=\":shortcut\">online documentation for the Shortcut module</a>.','','none'),(6731,'Users with the <em>Administer shortcuts</em> permission can manage shortcut sets and edit the shortcuts within sets from the <a href=\":shortcuts\">Shortcuts administration page</a>.','','none'),(6732,'Define which shortcut set you are using on the <a href=\":shortcut-link\">Shortcuts tab</a> of your account page.','','none'),(6733,'No shortcuts available. <a href=\":link\">Add a shortcut</a>','','none'),(6734,'You are now using the new %set_name shortcut set. You can edit it from this page or <a href=\":switch-url\">switch back to a different one.</a>','','none'),(6735,'The link for this shortcut.','','none'),(6736,'The title for this shortcut.','','none'),(6737,'The weight for this shortcut','','none'),(6738,'The name under which the set\'s links are stored.','','none'),(6739,'The title of the set.','','none'),(6740,'The users.uid for this set.','','none'),(6741,'The shortcut_set.set_name that will be displayed for this user.','','none'),(6742,'The Statistics module shows you how often content is viewed. This is useful in determining which pages of your site are most popular. For more information, see the <a href=\":statistics_do\">online documentation for the Statistics module</a>.','','none'),(6743,'The module includes a <em>Popular content</em> block that displays the most viewed pages today and for all time, and the last content viewed. To use the block, enable <em>Count content views</em> on the <a href=\":statistics-settings\">Statistics page</a>, and then you can enable and configure the block on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>.','','none'),(6744,'The Statistics module includes a counter for each page that increases whenever the page is viewed. To use the counter, enable <em>Count content views</em> on the <a href=\":statistics-settings\">Statistics page</a>, and set the necessary <a href=\":permissions\">permissions</a> (<em>View content hits</em>) so that the counter is visible to the users.','','none'),(6745,'How long any statistics may be cached, i.e. the refresh interval','','none'),(6746,'Version: @module-version','','10.4.5'),(6747,'Requires: @module-list','','10.4.5'),(6748,'Required by: @module-list','','10.4.5'),(6749,'This theme requires PHP version @php_required and is incompatible with PHP version @php_version.','','none'),(6750,'The System module is integral to the site: it provides user interfaces for many core systems and settings, as well as the basic administrative menu structure. For more information, see the <a href=\":system\">online documentation for the System module</a>.','','none'),(6751,'Users with appropriate permission can install and uninstall modules from the <a href=\":modules\">Extend page</a>. Depending on which distribution or installation profile you choose when you install your site, several modules are installed and others are provided but not installed. Each module provides a discrete set of features; modules may be installed or uninstalled depending on the needs of the site. Many additional modules contributed by members of the Drupal community are available for download from the <a href=\":drupal-modules\">Drupal.org module page</a>. Note that uninstalling a module is a destructive action: when you uninstall a module, you will permanently lose all data connected to the module.','','none'),(6752,'Users with appropriate permission can install and uninstall themes on the <a href=\":themes\">Appearance page</a>. Themes determine the design and presentation of your site. Depending on which distribution or installation profile you choose when you install your site, a default theme is installed, and possibly a different theme for administration pages. Other themes are provided but not installed, and additional contributed themes are available at the <a href=\":drupal-themes\">Drupal.org theme page</a>.','','none'),(6753,'When you are performing site maintenance, you can prevent non-administrative users (including anonymous visitors) from viewing your site by putting it in <a href=\":maintenance-mode\">Maintenance mode</a>. This will prevent unauthorized users from making changes to the site while you are performing maintenance, or from seeing a broken site while updates are in progress.','','none'),(6754,'On the <a href=\":performance-page\">Performance page</a>, the site can be configured to aggregate CSS and JavaScript files, making the total request size smaller. Note that, for small- to medium-sized websites, the <a href=\":page-cache\">Internal Page Cache module</a> should be installed so that pages are efficiently cached and reused for anonymous users. Finally, for websites of all sizes, the <a href=\":dynamic-page-cache\">Dynamic Page Cache module</a> should also be installed so that the non-personalized parts of pages are efficiently cached (for all users).','','none'),(6755,'Your site has several file directories, which are used to store and process uploaded and generated files. The <em>public</em> file directory, which is configured in your settings.php file, is the default place for storing uploaded files. Links to files in this directory contain the direct file URL, so when the files are requested, the web server will send them directly without invoking your site code. This means that the files can be downloaded by anyone with the file URL, so requests are not access-controlled but they are efficient. The <em>private</em> file directory, also configured in your settings.php file and ideally located outside the site web root, is access controlled. Links to files in this directory are not direct, so requests to these files are mediated by your site code. This means that your site can check file access permission for each file before deciding to fulfill the request, so the requests are more secure, but less efficient. You should only use the private storage for files that need access control, not for files like your site logo and background images used on every page. The <em>temporary</em> file directory is used internally by your site code for various operations, and is configured on the <a href=\":file-system\">File system settings</a> page. You can also see the configured public and private file directories on this page, and choose whether public or private should be the default for uploaded files.','','none'),(6756,'On the <a href=\":toolkit\">Image toolkit page</a>, you can select and configure the PHP toolkit used to manipulate images. Depending on which distribution or installation profile you choose when you install your site, the GD2 toolkit and possibly others are included; other toolkits may be provided by contributed modules.','','none'),(6757,'Set and configure the default theme for your website.  Alternative <a href=\":themes\">themes</a> are available.','','10.4.5'),(6758,'You can place blocks for each theme on the <a href=\":blocks\">block layout</a> page.','','10.4.5'),(6759,'Here you can find a short overview of your site\'s parameters as well as any problems detected with your installation. It may be useful to copy and paste this information into support requests filed on Drupal.org\'s support forums and project issue queues. Before filing a support request, ensure that your web server meets the <a href=\":system-requirements\">system requirements.</a>','','10.4.5'),(6760,'Configure your <a href=\":user-edit\">account time zone setting</a>.','','none'),(6761,'The minimum version of Apache needed to run Drupal without mod_rewrite enabled is 2.2.16. See the <a href=\":link\">enabling clean URLs</a> page for more information on mod_rewrite.','','none'),(6762,'Your server is capable of using clean URLs, but it is not enabled. Using clean URLs gives an improved user experience and is recommended. <a href=\":link\">Enable clean URLs</a>','','none'),(6763,'@phpversion (<a href=\":url\">more information</a>)','','10.4.5'),(6764,'Drupal requires you to enable the PHP extensions in the following list (see the <a href=\":system_requirements\">system requirements page</a> for more information):','','none'),(6765,'PHP OPcode caching','','10.4.5'),(6766,'Your web server does not appear to support PDO (PHP Data Objects). Ask your hosting provider if they support the native PDO extension. See the <a href=\":link\">system requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(6767,'Your web server does not appear to support any common PDO database extensions. Check with your hosting provider to see if they support PDO (PHP Data Objects) and offer any databases that <a href=\":drupal-databases\">Drupal supports</a>.','','none'),(6768,'Your web server seems to have the wrong version of PDO installed. Drupal requires the PDO extension from PHP core. This system has the older PECL version. See the <a href=\":link\">system requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(6769,'For more information, see the online handbook entry for <a href=\":memory-limit\">increasing the PHP memory limit</a>.','','none'),(6770,'See <a href=\":url\">@url</a> for information about the recommended .htaccess file which should be added to the %directory directory to help protect against arbitrary code execution.','','none'),(6771,'Last run @time ago','','10.4.5'),(6772,'For more information, see the online handbook entry for <a href=\":cron-handbook\">configuring cron jobs</a>.','','none'),(6773,'You may need to set the correct directory at the <a href=\":admin-file-system\">file system settings page</a> or change the current directory\'s permissions so that it is writable.','','none'),(6774,'An automated attempt to create this directory failed, possibly due to a permissions problem. To proceed with the installation, either create the directory and modify its permissions manually or ensure that the installer has the permissions to create it automatically. For more information, see INSTALL.txt or the <a href=\":handbook_url\">online handbook</a>.','','none'),(6775,'Some modules have database schema updates to install. You should run the <a href=\":update\">database update script</a> immediately.','','10.4.5'),(6776,'Update notifications are not enabled. It is <strong>highly recommended</strong> that you enable the Update Manager module from the <a href=\":module\">module administration page</a> in order to stay up-to-date on new releases. For more information, <a href=\":update\">Update status handbook page</a>.','','none'),(6777,'The trusted_host_patterns setting is not configured in settings.php. This can lead to security vulnerabilities. It is <strong>highly recommended</strong> that you configure this. See <a href=\":url\">Protecting against HTTP HOST Header attacks</a> for more information.','','10.4.5'),(6778,'Put your site into <a href=\":url\">maintenance mode</a>.','','none'),(6779,'All errors have been <a href=\":url\">logged</a>.','','none'),(6780,'Updates were attempted. If you see no failures below, you may proceed happily back to your <a href=\":url\">site</a>. Otherwise, you may need to update your database manually.','','none'),(6781,'One or more problems were detected with your Drupal installation. Check the <a href=\":status\">status report</a> for more information.','','10.4.5'),(6782,'Screenshot for @theme theme','','10.4.5'),(6783,'Settings for @theme theme','','10.4.5'),(6784,'Uninstall @theme theme','','10.4.5'),(6785,'Set @theme as default theme','','10.4.5'),(6786,'Install @theme theme','','10.4.5'),(6787,'Install @theme as default theme','','10.4.5'),(6788,'More information about setting up scheduled tasks can be found by <a href=\":url\">reading the cron tutorial on drupal.org</a>.','','none'),(6789,'This version is not compatible with Drupal @core_version and should be replaced.','','none'),(6790,'This module requires PHP version @php_required and is incompatible with PHP version @php_version.','','none'),(6791,'Defined on the <a href=\":information\">Site Information</a> page.','','none'),(6792,'Powered by <a href=\":poweredby\">Drupal</a>','','none'),(6793,'Installation tasks','','none'),(6794,'The Taxonomy module allows users who have permission to create and edit content to categorize (tag) content of that type. Users who have the <em>Administer vocabularies and terms</em> <a href=\":permissions\" title=\"Taxonomy module permissions\">permission</a> can add <em>vocabularies</em> that contain a set of related <em>terms</em>. The terms in a vocabulary can either be pre-set by an administrator or built gradually as content is added and edited. Terms may be organized hierarchically if desired.','','none'),(6795,'For more information, see the <a href=\":taxonomy\">online documentation for the Taxonomy module</a>.','','none'),(6796,'Users who have the <em>Administer vocabularies and terms</em> permission can add and edit vocabularies from the <a href=\":taxonomy_admin\">Taxonomy administration page</a>. Vocabularies can be deleted from their <em>Edit vocabulary</em> page. Users with the <em>Taxonomy term: Administer fields</em> permission may add additional fields for terms in that vocabulary using the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI module</a>.','','none'),(6797,'Users who have the <em>Administer vocabularies and terms</em> permission or the <em>Edit terms</em> permission for a particular vocabulary can add, edit, and organize the terms in a vocabulary from a vocabulary\'s term listing page, which can be accessed by going to the <a href=\":taxonomy_admin\">Taxonomy administration page</a> and clicking <em>List terms</em> in the <em>Operations</em> column. Users must have the <em>Administer vocabularies and terms</em> permission or the <em>Delete terms</em> permission for a particular vocabulary to delete terms.','','none'),(6798,'A user with the <em>Administer fields</em> permission for a certain entity type may add <em>Taxonomy term</em> reference fields to the entity type, which will allow entities to be classified using taxonomy terms. See the <a href=\":entity_reference\">Entity Reference help</a> for more information about reference fields. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them.','','none'),(6799,'See the <a href=\":entity_reference\">Entity Reference help</a> page for the field widgets and formatters that can be configured for any reference field on the <em>Manage display</em> and <em>Manage form display</em> pages. Taxonomy additionally provides an <em>RSS category</em> formatter that displays nothing when the entity item is displayed as HTML, but displays an RSS category instead of a list when the entity item is displayed in an RSS feed.','','none'),(6800,'No vocabularies available. <a href=\":link\">Add vocabulary</a>.','','none'),(6801,'Format of the term description.','','none'),(6802,'Module responsible for the vocabulary.','','none'),(6803,'The Telephone module allows you to create fields that contain telephone numbers. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":telephone_documentation\">online documentation for the Telephone module</a>.','','none'),(6804,'The <em>settings</em> and the <em>display</em> of the telephone field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6805,'The Text module allows you to create short and long text fields with optional summaries. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":text_documentation\">online documentation for the Text module</a>.','','none'),(6806,'The <em>settings</em> and <em>display</em> of the text field can be configured separately. See the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI help</a> for more information on how to manage fields and their display.','','none'),(6807,'If you choose <em>Text (plain)</em> or <em>Text (plain, long)</em> you restrict the input to <em>Plain text</em> only. If you choose <em>Text (formatted)</em>, <em>Text (formatted, long)</em>, or <em>Text (formatted, long with summary)</em> you allow users to write formatted text. Which options are available to individual users depends on the settings on the <a href=\":formats\">Text formats and editors page</a>.','','none'),(6808,'Number of summary rows: @rows','','10.4.4'),(6809,'The Toolbar module provides a toolbar for site administrators, which displays tabs and trays provided by the Toolbar module itself and other modules. For more information, see the <a href=\":toolbar_docs\">online documentation for the Toolbar module</a>.','','none'),(6810,'The Tour module provides users with guided tours of the site interface. Each tour consists of several tips that highlight elements of the user interface, guide the user through a workflow, or explain key concepts of the website. For more information, see the <a href=\':tour\'>online documentation for the Tour module</a>.','','none'),(6811,'Tours can be written as YAML-documents with a text editor, or using the contributed <a href=\':tour_ui\'>Tour UI</a> module. For more information, see <a href=\':doc_url\'>the online documentation for writing tours</a>.','','none'),(6812,'@tour_item of @total','','none'),(6813,'The Activity Tracker module displays the most recently added and updated content on your site, and allows you to follow new content created by each user. This module has no configuration options. For more information, see the <a href=\":tracker\">online documentation for the Activity Tracker module</a>.','','none'),(6814,'The <a href=\":recent\">Recent content</a> page shows new and updated content in reverse chronological order, listing the content type, title, author\'s name, number of comments, and time of last update. Content is considered updated when changes occur in the text, or when new comments are added. The <em>My recent content</em> tab limits the list to the currently logged-in user.','','none'),(6815,'The {node}.nid this record tracks.','','none'),(6816,'Boolean indicating whether the node is published.','','none'),(6817,'The Unix timestamp when the node was most recently saved or commented on.','','none'),(6818,'The {user}.nid this record tracks.','','none'),(6819,'The {users}.uid of the node author or commenter.','','none'),(6820,'The Unix timestamp when the user was most recently saved or commented on.','','none'),(6821,'Uninstalled modules','','none'),(6822,'Uninstalled themes','','none'),(6823,'The <a href=\":update-report\">Available updates report</a> displays core, contributed modules, and themes for which there are new releases available for download. On the report page, you can also check manually for updates. You can configure the frequency of update checks, which are performed during cron runs, and whether notifications are sent on the <a href=\":update-settings\">Update Manager settings page</a>.','','none'),(6824,'The Update Manager module allows administrators to perform updates directly from the <a href=\":update-page\">Update page</a>. It lists all available updates, and you can confirm whether you want to download them. If you don\'t have sufficient access rights to your web server, you could be prompted for your FTP/SSH password. Afterwards the files are transferred into your site installation, overwriting your old files. Direct links to the Update page are also displayed on the <a href=\":modules_page\">Extend page</a> and the <a href=\":themes_page\">Appearance page</a>.','','none'),(6825,'No update information available. <a href=\":run_cron\">Run cron</a> or <a href=\":check_manually\">check manually</a>.','','none'),(6826,'New release(s) available for @site_name','','none'),(6827,'Your site is currently configured to send these emails when any updates are available. To get notified only for security updates, @url.','','10.4.5'),(6828,'Your site is currently configured to send these emails only when security updates are available. To get notified for any available updates, @url.','','none'),(6829,'There was a problem checking <a href=\":update-report\">available updates</a> for Drupal.','','10.4.5'),(6830,'There was a problem checking <a href=\":update-report\">available updates</a> for your modules or themes.','','10.4.4'),(6831,'%archive_file contains a version of %names that is not compatible with Drupal @version.%archive_file contains versions of modules or themes that are not compatible with Drupal @version: %names','','none'),(6832,'See the <a href=\":available_updates\">available updates</a> page for more information.','','none'),(6833,'Update Manager settings','','none'),(6834,'Check for updates of uninstalled modules and themes','','none'),(6835,'You can find <a href=\":module_url\">modules</a> and <a href=\":theme_url\">themes</a> on <a href=\":drupal_org_url\">drupal.org</a>. The following file extensions are supported: %extensions.','','none'),(6836,'Back up your database and site before you continue. <a href=\":backup_url\">Learn how</a>.','','none'),(6837,'Deprecated: User Name','','10.4.5'),(6838,'Deprecated: Use account-name or display-name instead.','','none'),(6839,'The display name of the user account.','','none'),(6840,'The User module allows users to register, log in, and log out. It also allows users with proper permissions to manage user roles and permissions. For more information, see the <a href=\":user_docs\">online documentation for the User module</a>.','','none'),(6841,'Through the <a href=\":people\">People administration page</a> you can add and cancel user accounts and assign users to roles. By editing one particular user you can change their username, email address, password, and information in other fields.','','none'),(6842,'After creating roles, you can set permissions for each role on the <a href=\":permissions_user\">Permissions page</a>. Granting a permission allows users who have been assigned a particular role to perform an action on the site, such as viewing content, editing or creating  a particular type of content, administering settings for a particular module, or using a particular function of the site (such as search).','','none'),(6843,'Because User accounts are an entity type, you can extend them by adding fields through the Manage fields tab on the <a href=\":accounts\">Account settings page</a>. By adding fields for e.g., a picture, a biography, or address, you can a create a custom profile for the users of the website. For background information on entities and fields, see the <a href=\":field_help\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(6844,'A role defines a group of users that have certain privileges. These privileges are defined on the <a href=\":permissions\">Permissions page</a>. Here, you can define the names and the display sort order of the roles on your site. It is recommended to order roles from least permissive (for example, Anonymous user) to most permissive (for example, Administrator user). Users who are not logged in have the Anonymous user role. Users who are logged in have the Authenticated user role, plus any other roles granted to their user account.','','10.2.3'),(6845,'Make it at least 12 characters','','10.2.3'),(6846,'Configure site-wide settings and behavior for user accounts and registration. This includes account cancellation methods, the content of user emails and fields attached to users.','','10.2.3'),(6847,'Manage all user accounts. This includes editing all user information, changes of email addresses and passwords, issuing emails to users and blocking and deleting user accounts.','','10.2.3'),(6848,'Required if you want to change the %mail or %pass below. <a href=\":request_new_url\" title=\"Send password reset instructions via email.\">Reset your password</a>.','','10.2.3'),(6849,'Users with the %select-cancel-method or %administer-users <a href=\":permissions-url\">permissions</a> can override this default method.','','none'),(6850,'Available variables are: [site:name], [site:url], [user:display-name], [user:account-name], [user:mail], [site:login-url], [site:url-brief], [user:edit-url], [user:one-time-login-url], [user:cancel-url].','','none'),(6851,'Created a new user account for <a href=\":url\">%name</a>. No email has been sent.','','10.2.3'),(6852,'The new user <a href=\":url\">%name</a> was created without an email address, so no welcome message was sent.','','none'),(6853,'A welcome message with further instructions has been emailed to the new user <a href=\":url\">%name</a>.','','none'),(6854,'Password reset instructions will be sent to your registered email address.','','10.4.5'),(6855,'Send password reset instructions via email.','','none'),(6856,'Also known as:','','10.2.3'),(6857,'@label (@name:@column)','','10.4.5'),(6858,'@label:@column','','none'),(6859,'@label (@name:delta)','','10.2.3'),(6860,'For more information, see the <a href=\":views\">online documentation for the Views module</a>.','','none'),(6861,'Contributed projects that support the Views module can be found in the <a href=\":node\">online documentation for Views-related contributed modules</a>.','','none'),(6862,'Changing the title here means it cannot be dynamically altered anymore. (Try changing it directly in <a href=\":url\">@name</a>.)','','none'),(6863,'This link is provided by the Views module. The path can be changed by editing the view <a href=\":url\">@label</a>','','none'),(6864,'@type language selected for page','','10.4.5'),(6865,'Will not be accessible.','','none'),(6866,'@code (@title)','','none'),(6867,'The following tokens are available. You may use Twig syntax in this field.','','none'),(6868,'Override the view and other argument titles. You may use Twig syntax in this field as well as the \"arguments\" and \"raw_arguments\" arrays.','','none'),(6869,'Override the view and other argument titles. You may use Twig syntax in this field.','','none'),(6870,'The following replacement tokens are available for this argument.','','none'),(6871,'The category this block will appear under on the <a href=\":href\">blocks placement page</a>.','','none'),(6872,'Separate multiple classes by spaces.','','none'),(6873,'You may also adjust the @settings for the currently selected access restriction.','','none'),(6874,'You may also adjust the @settings for the currently selected cache mechanism.','','none'),(6875,'You may also adjust the @settings for the currently selected style.','','none'),(6876,'You may also adjust the @settings for the currently selected row style.','','none'),(6877,'The following tokens are available for this link. You may use Twig syntax in this field.','','none'),(6878,'You may also adjust the @settings for the currently selected pager.','','none'),(6879,'An offset from the current time such as \"@example1\" or \"@example2\"','','none'),(6880,'The Views UI module provides an interface for managing views for the <a href=\":views\">Views module</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":handbook\">online documentation for the Views UI module</a>.','','none'),(6881,'Views can be enabled or disabled from the <a href=\":list\">Views list page</a>. To enable a view, find the view within the \"Disabled\" list and select the \"Enable\" operation. To disable a view find the view within the \"Enabled\" list and select the \"Disable\" operation.','','none'),(6882,'Views can be exported and imported as configuration files by using the <a href=\":config\">Configuration Manager module</a>.','','none'),(6883,'Advanced Views settings','','none'),(6884,'View @display_title','','10.4.5'),(6885,'Duplicate as @type','','10.4.5'),(6886,'Add @display','','10.4.5'),(6887,'By breaking this lock, any unsaved changes made by @user will be lost.','','none'),(6888,'Account cancellation request for [user:display-name] at [site:name]','','10.2.3'),(6889,'Replacement login information for [user:display-name] at [site:name]','','10.2.3'),(6890,'Account details for [user:display-name] at [site:name]','','10.2.3'),(6891,'Account details for [user:display-name] at [site:name] (pending admin approval)','','10.2.3'),(6892,'[user:display-name] has applied for an account.\n\n[user:edit-url]','','10.2.3'),(6893,'[user:display-name],\n\nYour account at [site:name] has been activated.\n\nYou may now log in by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:one-time-login-url]\n\nThis link can only be used once to log in and will lead you to a page where you can set your password.\n\nAfter setting your password, you will be able to log in at [site:login-url] in the future using:\n\nusername: [user:account-name]\npassword: Your password\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(6894,'Account details for [user:display-name] at [site:name] (approved)','','10.2.3'),(6895,'Account details for [user:display-name] at [site:name] (blocked)','','10.2.3'),(6896,'[user:display-name],\n\nYour account on [site:name] has been canceled.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(6897,'Account details for [user:display-name] at [site:name] (canceled)','','10.2.3'),(6898,'@display \'@id\': Component \'@name\' was disabled because its settings depend on removed dependencies.','','none'),(6899,'No widget available for: %type.','','none'),(6900,'Several special characters are allowed, including space, period (.), hyphen (-), apostrophe (\'), underscore (_), and the @ sign.','','10.2.3'),(6901,'This value is not valid.','','none'),(6902,'Create tasks that the system can execute.','','none'),(6903,'The URL to which the user should be redirected. This can be an internal URL like /node/1234 or an external URL like @url.','','none'),(6904,'The Automated Cron module runs cron operations for your site using normal browser/page requests instead of having to set up a separate cron job. The Automated Cron module checks at the end of each server response when cron operation was last ran and, if it has been too long since last run, it executes the cron tasks after sending a server response. For more information, see the <a href=\":automated_cron-documentation\">online documentation for the Automated Cron module</a>.','','none'),(6905,'Configuring Automated Cron','','none'),(6906,'On the <a href=\":cron-settings\">Cron page</a>, you can set the frequency (time interval) for running cron jobs.','','none'),(6907,'Disabling Automated Cron','','none'),(6908,'To disable automated cron, the recommended method is to uninstall the module, to reduce site overhead. If you only want to disable it temporarily, you can set the frequency to Never on the Cron page, and then change the frequency back when you want to start it up again.','','none'),(6909,'Automated Cron','','none'),(6910,'Provides an automated way to run cron jobs, by executing them at the end of a server response.','','10.4.5'),(6911,'Automated cron settings','','none'),(6912,'Ban visits from specific IP addresses.','','none'),(6913,'You can place a new block in a region by selecting <em>Place block</em> on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>. Once a block is placed, it can be moved to a different region by drag-and-drop or by using the <em>Region</em> drop-down list, and then clicking <em>Save blocks</em>.','','none'),(6914,'Block placement is specific to each theme on your site. Changes will not be saved until you click <em>Save blocks</em> at the bottom of the page.','','10.4.5'),(6915,'Adding comment types','','none'),(6916,'Additional <em>comment types</em> can be created per entity sub-type and added on the <a href=\":field\">Comment types page</a>. If there are multiple comment types available you can select the appropriate one after adding a <em>Comments field</em>.','','none'),(6917,'Compare the configuration uploaded to your sync directory with the active configuration before completing the import.','','10.4.5'),(6918,'Upload a full site configuration archive to the sync directory. It can then be compared and imported on the Synchronize page.','','10.4.5'),(6919,'The Database Logging module logs system events in the Drupal database. Monitor your site or debug site problems on this page.','','none'),(6920,'The Internal Dynamic Page Cache module caches pages for all users in the database, handling dynamic content correctly. For more information, see the <a href=\":dynamic_page_cache-documentation\">online documentation for the Internal Dynamic Page Cache module</a>.','','none'),(6921,'The module requires no configuration. Every part of the page contains metadata that allows Internal Dynamic Page Cache to figure this out on its own.','','none'),(6922,'<strong>Entity Reference</strong> fields allow you to create fields that contain links to other entities (such as content items, taxonomy terms, etc.) within the site. This allows you, for example, to include a link to a user within a content item. For more information, see <a href=\":er_do\">the online documentation for the Entity Reference module</a>.','','none'),(6923,'Enable custom storage','','none'),(6924,'An instance-specific widget type','','none'),(6925,'Widget types @types are used in Drupal 6 field instances: widget type @selected_type applied to the Drupal 8 base field','','none'),(6926,'You can define which users will be able to use each text format by selecting roles. To ensure security, anonymous and untrusted users should only have access to text formats that restrict them to either plain text or a safe set of HTML tags. This is because HTML tags can allow embedding malicious links or scripts in text. More trusted registered users may be granted permission to use less restrictive text formats in order to create rich text. <strong>Improper text format configuration is a security risk.</strong>','','none'),(6927,'Each text format uses filters that add, remove, or transform elements within user-entered text. For example, one filter removes unapproved HTML tags, while another transforms URLs into clickable links. Filters are applied in a specific order. They do not change the <em>stored</em> content: they define how it is processed and displayed.','','none'),(6928,'Text formats define how text is filtered for output and how HTML tags and other text is displayed, replaced, or removed. <strong>Improper text format configuration is a security risk.</strong> Learn more on the <a href=\":filter_help\">Filter module help page</a>.','','10.4.4'),(6929,'A text format contains filters that change the display of user input; for example, stripping out malicious HTML or making URLs clickable. Filters are executed from top to bottom and the order is important, since one filter may prevent another filter from doing its job. For example, when URLs are converted into links before disallowed HTML tags are removed, all links may be removed. When this happens, the order of filters may need to be rearranged.','','10.4.4'),(6930,'Configure how content is filtered when displayed, including which HTML tags are rendered, and enable module-provided filters.','','none'),(6931,'A list of HTML tags that can be used. By default only the <em>lang</em> and <em>dir</em> attributes are allowed for all HTML tags. Each HTML tag may have attributes which are treated as allowed attribute names for that HTML tag. Each attribute may allow all values, or only allow specific values. Attribute names or values may be written as a prefix and wildcard like <em>jump-*</em>. JavaScript event attributes, JavaScript URLs, and CSS are always stripped.','','none'),(6932,'Configure languages for content, interface, and configuration.','','10.4.5'),(6933,'Overriding default English strings','','none'),(6934,'If translation is enabled for English, you can <em>override</em> the default English interface text strings in your site with other English text strings on the <a href=\":translate\">User interface translation</a> page. Translation is off by default for English, but you can turn it on by visiting the <em>Edit language</em> page for <em>English</em> from the <a href=\":languages\">Languages</a> page.','','none'),(6935,'Configure the import of translation files, and add or customize interface translations.','','10.4.5'),(6936,'Manage menus and menu links.','','10.4.5'),(6937,'<q>Log in</q> for anonymous users','','none'),(6938,'Revert to earlier revision of a translation','','none'),(6939,'Are you sure you want to revert @language translation to the revision from %revision-date?','','none'),(6940,'Revert content shared among translations','','none'),(6941,'Add custom URLs to existing paths.','','10.4.5'),(6942,'- None (original image) -','','10.4.5'),(6943,'Only items in the index will appear in search results. To build and maintain the index, a correctly configured <a href=\":cron\">cron maintenance task</a> is required.','','none'),(6944,'The minimum character length for a word to be added to the index. Searches must include a keyword of at least this length.','','none'),(6945,'Configure the logging of content statistics.','','none'),(6946,'Checking site status','','none'),(6947,'The <a href=\":status\">Status report</a> provides an overview of the configuration, status, and health of your site. Review this report to make sure there are not any problems to address, and to find information about the software your site and web server are using.','','none'),(6948,'In order for the site and its modules to continue to operate well, a set of routine administrative operations must run on a regular basis; these operations are known as <em>cron</em> tasks. On the <a href=\":cron\">Cron page</a>, you can configure cron to run periodically as part of server responses by installing the <em>Automated Cron</em> module, or you can turn this off and trigger cron from an outside process on your web server. You can verify the status of cron tasks by visiting the <a href=\":status\">Status report page</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":handbook\">online documentation for configuring cron jobs</a>.','','none'),(6949,'Enable the <em>Automated Cron</em> module to allow cron execution at the end of a server response.','','none'),(6950,'Public file base URL','','10.4.5'),(6951,'The base URL that will be used for public file URLs. This can be changed in settings.php','','10.4.5'),(6952,'Machine name: <span dir=\"ltr\" class=\"table-filter-text-source\">@machine-name</span>','','10.4.5'),(6953,'The following reason prevents @module.module_name from being uninstalled:The following reasons prevent @module.module_name from being uninstalled:','','none'),(6954,'Configure default user account settings, including fields, registration requirements, and email messages.','','10.4.5'),(6955,'Too many failed login attempts from your IP address. This IP address is temporarily blocked. Try again later or <a href=\":url\">request a new password</a>.','','none'),(6956,'There has been more than one failed login attempt for this account. It is temporarily blocked. Try again later or <a href=\":url\">request a new password</a>.There have been more than @count failed login attempts for this account. It is temporarily blocked. Try again later or <a href=\":url\">request a new password</a>.','','none'),(6957,'Cache maximum age','','none'),(6958,'Creating and managing views','','none'),(6959,'Enabling and disabling views','','none'),(6960,'Exporting and importing views','','none'),(6961,'Links related to the active user account','','10.2.3'),(6962,'Administrative task links','','10.2.3'),(6963,'Site information links','','10.2.3'),(6964,'Site section links','','10.2.3'),(6965,'User tool links, often added by modules','','10.2.3'),(6966,'[user:display-name],\n\nA request to reset the password for your account has been made at [site:name].\n\nYou may now log in by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:one-time-login-url]\n\nThis link can only be used once to log in and will lead you to a page where you can set your password. It expires after one day and nothing will happen if it\'s not used.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(6967,'[user:display-name],\n\nA site administrator at [site:name] has created an account for you. You may now log in by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:one-time-login-url]\n\nThis link can only be used once to log in and will lead you to a page where you can set your password.\n\nAfter setting your password, you will be able to log in at [site:login-url] in the future using:\n\nusername: [user:name]\npassword: Your password\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(6968,'[user:display-name],\n\nThank you for registering at [site:name]. You may now log in by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:one-time-login-url]\n\nThis link can only be used once to log in and will lead you to a page where you can set your password.\n\nAfter setting your password, you will be able to log in at [site:login-url] in the future using:\n\nusername: [user:name]\npassword: Your password\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(6969,'Twig debug mode','','10.4.5'),(6970,'The language code.','','none'),(6971,'Delete %label','','none'),(6972,'Allow user to display all items','','none'),(6973,'Select and configure text editors, and how content is filtered when displayed.','','10.4.5'),(6974,'Recent comments.','','10.2.3'),(6975,'Find and manage files.','','10.2.3'),(6976,'Editing languages','','none'),(6977,'All content, by month.','','10.2.3'),(6978,'Recent content.','','10.2.3'),(6979,'All content promoted to the front page.','','10.2.3'),(6980,'All content, by letter.','','10.2.3'),(6981,'Content belonging to a certain taxonomy term.','','10.2.3'),(6982,'Shows a list of the newest user accounts on the site.','','10.2.3'),(6983,'Who\'s online block','','10.2.3'),(6984,'Shows the user names of the most recently active users, and the total number of active users.','','10.2.3'),(6985,'View edit page','','none'),(6986,'Max 1300x1300','','10.2.3'),(6987,'Max 2600x2600','','10.2.3'),(6988,'Max 325x325','','10.2.3'),(6989,'Max 650x650','','10.2.3'),(6990,'Narrow','','10.2.3'),(6991,'Files overview','','10.2.3'),(6992,'File usage information for {{ arguments.fid }}','','10.2.3'),(6993,'<p>This page provides the ability to add common languages to your site.</p><p>If the desired language is not available, you can add a custom language.</p>','','none'),(6994,'<p>Choose a language from the list, or choose \"Custom language...\" at the end of the list.</p><p>Click the \"Add language\" button when you are done choosing your language.</p><p>When adding a custom language, you will get an additional form where you can provide the name, code, and direction of the language.</p>','','none'),(6995,'Continuing on','','none'),(6996,'<p>This page provides the ability to edit a language on your site, including custom languages.</p>','','none'),(6997,'<p>You cannot change the code of a language on the site, since it is used by the system to keep track of the language.</p>','','none'),(6998,'<p>The language name is used throughout the site for all users and is written in English. Names of built-in languages can be translated using the Interface Translation module, and names of both built-in and custom languages can be translated using the Configuration Translation module.</p>','','none'),(6999,'<p>Choose if the language is a \"Left to right\" or \"Right to left\" language.</p><p>Note that not all themes support \"Right to left\" layouts, so test your theme if you are using \"Right to left\".</p>','','none'),(7000,'<p>The \"Languages\" page allows you to add, edit, delete, and reorder languages for the site.</p>','','none'),(7001,'Reordering languages','','none'),(7002,'<p>To reorder the languages on your site, use the drag icons next to each language.</p><p>The order shown here is the display order for language lists on the site such as in the language switcher blocks provided by the Interface Translation and Content Translation modules.</p><p>When you are done with reordering the languages, click the \"Save configuration\" button for the changes to take effect.</p>','','none'),(7003,'Set a language as default','','none'),(7004,'<p>You can change the default language of the site by choosing one of your configured languages as default. The site will use the default language in situations where no choice is made but a language should be set, for example as the language of the displayed interface.</p>','','none'),(7005,'Modifying languages','','none'),(7006,'<p>Operations are provided for editing and deleting your languages.</p><p>You can edit the name and the direction of the language.</p><p>Deleted languages can be added back at a later time. Deleting a language will remove all interface translations associated with it, and content in this language will be set to be language neutral. Note that you cannot delete the default language of the site.</p>','','none'),(7007,'Choose the language you want to translate.','','none'),(7008,'Enter the specific word or sentence you want to translate, you can also write just a part of a word.','','none'),(7009,'Filter the search','','none'),(7010,'You can search for untranslated strings if you want to translate something that isn\'t translated yet. If you want to modify an existing translation, you might want to search only for translated strings.','','none'),(7011,'Apply your search criteria','','none'),(7012,'To apply your search criteria, click on the <em>Filter</em> button.','','none'),(7013,'You can write your own translation in the text fields of the right column. Try to figure out in which context the text will be used in order to translate it in the appropriate way.','','none'),(7014,'Validate the translation','','none'),(7015,'When you have finished your translations, click on the <em>Save translations</em> button. You must save your translations, each time before changing the page or making a new search.','','none'),(7016,'{{ arguments.created_year_month }}','','10.2.3'),(7017,'Find and manage content','','10.2.3'),(7018,'Welcome to [site:name]','','none'),(7019,'{{ arguments.tid }}','','10.2.3'),(7020,'Name or email contains','','10.2.3'),(7021,'A list of new users','','10.2.3'),(7022,'There are currently @total users online.','','10.2.3'),(7023,'There are currently 0 users online.','','10.2.3'),(7024,'A list of users that are currently logged in.','','10.2.3'),(7025,'Manage view settings','','none'),(7026,'View or edit the configuration.','','none'),(7027,'Displays in this view','','none'),(7028,'A display is a way of outputting the results, e.g., as a page or a block. A view can contain multiple displays, which are listed here. The active display is highlighted.','','none'),(7029,'View administration','','none'),(7030,'Perform administrative tasks, including adding a description and creating a clone. Click the drop-down button to view the available options.','','none'),(7031,'Choose how to output results. E.g., choose <em>Content</em> to output each item completely, using your configured display settings. Or choose <em>Fields</em>, which allows you to output only specific fields for each result. Additional formats can be added by installing modules to <em>extend</em> Drupal\'s base functionality.','','none'),(7032,'If this view uses fields, they are listed here. You can click on a field to configure it.','','none'),(7033,'Filter your view','','none'),(7034,'Add filters to limit the results in the output. E.g., to only show content that is <em>published</em>, you would add a filter for <em>Published</em> and select <em>Yes</em>.','','none'),(7035,'Filter actions','','none'),(7036,'Add, rearrange or remove filters.','','none'),(7037,'Control the order in which the results are output. Click on an active sort rule to configure it.','','none'),(7038,'Sort actions','','none'),(7039,'Add, rearrange or remove sorting rules.','','none'),(7040,'Show a preview of the view output.','','none'),(7041,'The English name of the language.','','none'),(7042,'The native name of the language.','','none'),(7043,'The language direction. (0 = LTR, 1 = RTL)','','none'),(7044,'Whether the language is enabled.','','none'),(7045,'PHP formula to get plural indexes.','','none'),(7046,'Path prefix used for this language.','','none'),(7047,'The language weight when listed.','','none'),(7048,'Location of the JavaScript translation file.','','none'),(7049,'Mismatched entity and/or field definitions','','10.4.5'),(7050,'Fallback sort expose settings','','none'),(7051,'Leave blank for all. Otherwise, the first selected term will be the default instead of \"Any\".','','none'),(7052,'width @data.width','','10.4.5'),(7053,'height @data.height','','none'),(7054,'Administer workflows','','none'),(7055,'This entity (%type: %label) cannot be referenced.','','none'),(7056,'This entity (%type: %id) cannot be referenced.','','none'),(7057,'Content type where this field is in use.','','none'),(7058,'File Validation','Validation','none'),(7059,'The alias %alias could not be added because it is already in use in this language with different capitalization: %stored_alias.','','none'),(7060,'There are no changes to import.','','none'),(7061,'Another request may be importing configuration already.','','none'),(7062,'Importing configuration','','10.4.5'),(7063,'Starting configuration import.','','10.4.5'),(7064,'Configuration import has encountered an error.','','10.4.5'),(7065,'The configuration import failed for the following reasons:','','none'),(7066,'BigPipe','','none'),(7067,'Current workspace','','none'),(7068,'Workspace switcher','','none'),(7069,'HEAD method settings','','none'),(7070,'PUT method settings','','none'),(7071,'Delete transition','','none'),(7072,'Language key','','none'),(7073,'Update any media','','10.4.5'),(7074,'Delete media','','10.2.3'),(7075,'Delete any media','','10.4.5'),(7076,'Media name','','10.2.3'),(7077,'Media revisions','','none'),(7078,'Field with source information','','none'),(7079,'Install configuration','','none'),(7080,'The following changes were detected in the entity type and field definitions. @updates','','10.4.5'),(7081,'BigPipe no-JS check','','none'),(7082,'Session exists','','none'),(7083,'Add workspace','','none'),(7084,'Workspaces','','none'),(7085,'Create and manage workspaces.','','none'),(7086,'Administer workspaces','','none'),(7087,'Edit workspace %label','','none'),(7088,'Workspace ID','','none'),(7089,'Workspace %info has been created.','','none'),(7090,'Workspace %info has been updated.','','none'),(7091,'The workspace could not be saved.','','none'),(7092,'The workspace ID.','','none'),(7093,'@bundle_type is @bundles or @last','','none'),(7094,'@bundle_type is @bundle','','none'),(7095,'text format','','none'),(7096,'Default configuration hash','','none'),(7097,'Label of the action','','none'),(7098,'The first mlid in the materialized path. If N = depth, then pN must equal the mlid. If depth > 1 then p(N-1) must equal the parent link mlid. All pX where X > depth must equal zero. The columns p1 .. p9 are also called the parents.','','none'),(7099,'Authored on @date','','10.4.5'),(7100,'Enter the value for the sizes attribute, for example: %example_sizes.','','10.4.5'),(7101,'Unique machine name of the vocabulary.','','none'),(7102,'Field %field set in %filter is not usable for this filter type. Combined field filter only works for simple fields.','','none'),(7103,'Account %name has been deleted.','','none'),(7104,'Renders an entity in a view mode.','','10.2.3'),(7105,'Add @entity-type','','none'),(7106,'Revision create time','','10.4.5'),(7107,'Is default revision','','none'),(7108,'The moderation state of this piece of content.','','none'),(7109,'Moderation control','','none'),(7110,'Revisions must be required when moderation is enabled.','','none'),(7111,'Revisions are required.','','none'),(7112,'The moderation state has been updated.','','none'),(7113,'When content reaches this state it should be published.','','none'),(7114,'Default revision','','10.4.5'),(7115,'When content reaches this state it should be made the default revision; this is implied for published states.','','none'),(7116,'Valid moderation state','Validation','none'),(7117,'Field identifier','','none'),(7118,'Scale','decimal places','none'),(7119,'If this style is in use on the site, you may select another style to replace it. All images that have been generated for this style will be permanently deleted. If no replacement style is selected, the dependent configurations might need manual reconfiguration.','','none'),(7120,'All images that have been generated for this style will be permanently deleted. The dependent configurations might need manual reconfiguration.','','none'),(7121,'- No replacement -','','none'),(7122,'Antigua & Barbuda','','10.4.4'),(7123,'Divider','','10.4.4'),(7124,'The BigPipe module sends pages with dynamic content in a way that allows browsers to show them much faster. For more information, see the <a href=\":big_pipe-documentation\">online documentation for the BigPipe module</a>.','','none'),(7125,'The module requires no configuration. Every part of the page contains metadata that allows BigPipe to figure this out on its own.','','none'),(7126,'Size of email field','','none'),(7127,'Did not save to map table due to NULL value for key field @field','','none'),(7128,'A boolean indicating whether the node is visible on the front page.','','10.2.3'),(7129,'A boolean indicating whether the node should sort to the top of content lists.','','10.2.3'),(7130,'Default argument validator','','none'),(7131,'Operations on Unicode strings are emulated on a best-effort basis. Install the <a href=\"http://php.net/mbstring\">PHP mbstring extension</a> for improved Unicode support.','','none'),(7132,'The %entity_type entity type needs to be installed.','','none'),(7133,'The %entity_type entity type needs to be updated.','','none'),(7134,'The %field_name field needs to be installed.','','none'),(7135,'The %field_name field needs to be updated.','','10.4.5'),(7136,'The %field_name field needs to be uninstalled.','','none'),(7137,'Custom text: @true_label / @false_label','','none'),(7138,'Display: @true_label / @false_label','','none'),(7139,'See <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/function.date.php\" target=\"_blank\">the documentation for PHP date formats</a>.','','none'),(7140,'Language list ID','','none'),(7141,'Completed step @current of @total.','','none'),(7142,'This site has only a single language enabled. <a href=\":language_url\">Add at least one more language</a> in order to translate content.','','none'),(7143,'Describe a time by reference to the current day, like \'+90 days\' (90 days from the day the field is created) or \'+1 Saturday\' (the next Saturday). See <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/function.strtotime.php\">strtotime</a> for more details.','','10.4.4'),(7144,'The type of the log entry, for example \"user\" or \"page not found\".','','none'),(7145,'The %field_type_label field type is used in the following field: @fieldsThe %field_type_label field type is used in the following fields: @fields','','none'),(7146,'File MIME Type','','none'),(7147,'This module is experimental. <a href=\":url\">Experimental modules</a> are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(7148,'The maximum allowed image size expressed as WIDTH×HEIGHT (e.g. 640×480). Leave blank for no restriction. If a larger image is uploaded, it will be resized to reflect the given width and height. Resizing images on upload will cause the loss of <a href=\"http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Exchangeable_image_file_format\">EXIF data</a> in the image.','','none'),(7149,'The domain names to use for these languages. <strong>Modifying this value may break existing URLs. Use with caution in a production environment.</strong> Example: Specifying \"de.example.com\" as language domain for German will result in a URL like \"http://de.example.com/contact\".','','10.4.5'),(7150,'URL query key value pairs','','none'),(7151,'URL fragment','','none'),(7152,'Operation stopped by request','','none'),(7153,'Operation on @migration failed','','none'),(7154,'Operation on @migration skipped due to unfulfilled dependencies','','none'),(7155,'Currently upgrading @migration (@current of @max total tasks)','','none'),(7156,'Upgrade process not completed','','none'),(7157,'Congratulations, you upgraded Drupal!','','none'),(7158,'Review the detailed upgrade log','','none'),(7159,'Completed 1 upgrade task successfullyCompleted @count upgrade tasks successfully','','none'),(7160,'1 upgrade failed@count upgrades failed','','none'),(7161,'Put this site into <a href=\":url\">maintenance mode</a>.','','none'),(7162,'Source database','','none'),(7163,'Provide credentials for the database of the Drupal site you want to upgrade.','','none'),(7164,'Source files','','none'),(7165,'Review upgrade','','none'),(7166,'Perform upgrade','','none'),(7167,'Running upgrade','','none'),(7168,'Control which roles can \"View the administration theme\" on the <a href=\":permissions\">Permissions page</a>.','','10.4.5'),(7169,'Create and manage fields, forms, and display settings for your content.','','10.4.5'),(7170,'The language code of the URL alias.','','none'),(7171,'The Syslog module logs events by sending messages to the logging facility of your web server\'s operating system. Syslog is an operating system administrative logging tool that provides valuable information for use in system management and security auditing. Most suited to medium and large sites, Syslog provides filtering tools that allow messages to be routed by type and severity. For more information, see the <a href=\":syslog\">online documentation for the Syslog module</a>, as well as PHP\'s documentation pages for the <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/function.openlog.php\">openlog</a> and <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/function.syslog.php\">syslog</a> functions.','','none'),(7172,'Experimental modules found: %module_list. <a href=\":url\">Experimental modules</a> are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk.','','10.2.3'),(7173,'PHP OPcode caching can improve your site\'s performance considerably. It is <strong>highly recommended</strong> to have <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/opcache.installation.php\" target=\"_blank\">OPcache</a> installed on your server.','','none'),(7174,'Protection disabled','','10.4.5'),(7175,'<a href=\":url\">Experimental modules</a> are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(7176,'The vocabulary name.','','none'),(7177,'Name (autocomplete)','','10.4.5'),(7178,'The user or author name. Uses an autocomplete widget to find a user name, the actual filter uses the resulting user ID.','','none'),(7179,'When printing URL paths, how to transform the case of the filter value. Do not use this unless with Postgres as it uses case sensitive comparisons.','','none'),(7180,'Specify which display or custom URL this display will link to.','','none'),(7181,'This will add a more link to the bottom of this view, which will link to the page view. If you have more than one page view, the link will point to the display specified in \'Link display\' section under pager. You can override the URL at the link display setting.','','none'),(7182,'When printing URL paths, how to transform the case of the filter value.','','none'),(7183,'This identifier has illegal characters.','','none'),(7184,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML URL attribute for each row.','','none'),(7185,'[user:display-name],\n\nYour account on [site:name] has been blocked.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(7186,'Module Permissions','','none'),(7187,'workspace','','none'),(7188,'Activate Workspace','','none'),(7189,'Would you like to activate the %workspace workspace?','','none'),(7190,'The workspace name.','','none'),(7191,'The workspace owner.','','none'),(7192,'The time that the workspace was last edited.','','none'),(7193,'The user ID of the user on which the log entry was written.','','none'),(7194,'Bundle assigned to the auto-created entities.','','none'),(7195,'Add a new @entity_type.','','none'),(7196,'There is no @entity_type yet. @add_link','','none'),(7197,'Store new items in','','none'),(7198,'For more information, refer to the help listed on this page or to the <a href=\":docs\">online documentation</a> and <a href=\":support\">support</a> pages at <a href=\":drupal\">drupal.org</a>.','','none'),(7199,'There is currently nothing in this section.','','none'),(7200,'Module overviews','','none'),(7201,'A serialized array of options to set on the URL, such as a query string or HTML attributes.','','none'),(7202,'Source database does not contain a recognizable Drupal version.','','none'),(7203,'The System module provides pages for managing basic site configuration, including <a href=\":date-time-settings\">Date and time formats</a> and <a href=\":site-info\">Basic site settings</a> (site name, email address to send mail from, home page, and error pages). Additional configuration pages are listed on the main <a href=\":config\">Configuration page</a>.','','none'),(7204,'Basic site settings','','10.4.5'),(7205,'Select and configure themes.','','10.4.5'),(7206,'Configure the location of uploaded files and how they are accessed.','','10.4.5'),(7207,'Configure the site description, the number of items per feed, and whether feeds should be titles/teasers/full-text.','','10.4.5'),(7208,'Configure and use development tools.','','10.4.5'),(7209,'Take the site offline for updates and other maintenance tasks.','','10.4.5'),(7210,'Configure caching and bandwidth optimization.','','10.4.5'),(7211,'Configure the display of error messages and database logging.','','10.4.5'),(7212,'Configure regional settings, localization, and translation.','','10.4.5'),(7213,'Configure the locale and timezone settings.','','10.4.5'),(7214,'Configure how dates and times are displayed.','','10.4.5'),(7215,'Configure site search, metadata, and search engine optimization.','','10.4.5'),(7216,'Configure basic site settings, actions, and cron.','','10.4.5'),(7217,'Configure the administrative user interface.','','10.4.5'),(7218,'Manage the content workflow.','','10.4.5'),(7219,'Configure content formatting and authoring.','','10.4.5'),(7220,'Get a status report about your site\'s operation.','','10.4.5'),(7221,'Tours','','none'),(7222,'Tours guide you through workflows or explain concepts on various user interface pages. The tours with links in this list are on user interface landing pages; the tours without links will show on individual pages (such as when editing a View using the Views UI module). Available tours:','','none'),(7223,'Delete @entity_type','','none'),(7224,'View the latest version','','none'),(7225,'Allowed Tags','','none'),(7226,'@count @label@count @label entities','Entity type label','none'),(7227,'Changed year + month','','none'),(7228,'Changed year','','none'),(7229,'Changed month','','none'),(7230,'Changed day','','none'),(7231,'Changed week','','none'),(7232,'content item','','10.4.5'),(7233,'content items','','10.2.3'),(7234,'Create a new workspace','','none'),(7235,'View own workspace','','none'),(7236,'View any workspace','','none'),(7237,'Edit own workspace','','none'),(7238,'Edit any workspace','','none'),(7239,'Delete own workspace','','none'),(7240,'Delete any workspace','','none'),(7241,'Bypass content entity access in own workspace','','none'),(7242,'Allow all Edit/Update/Delete permissions for all content entities in a workspace owned by the user.','','none'),(7243,'Is Latest Revision','','none'),(7244,'Restrict the view to only revisions that are the latest revision of their entity.','','none'),(7245,'Sends pages using the BigPipe technique that allows browsers to show them much faster.','','10.4.5'),(7246,'The Migrate Drupal UI module has been enabled. Proceed to the <a href=\":url\">upgrade form</a>.','','none'),(7247,'Migrate Drupal UI','','none'),(7248,'Provides a user interface for migrating from older Drupal versions.','','10.4.5'),(7249,'Queue thumbnail downloads','','none'),(7250,'Save media','','10.2.3'),(7251,'Thumbnail downloader','','none'),(7252,'Parent path','','none'),(7253,'Selected combination of day and month is not valid.','','none'),(7254,'The import failed with the following message: %message','','none'),(7255,'Use multiple @tag tags, each with a single source.','','none'),(7256,'Use multiple sources within a single @tag tag.','','none'),(7257,'Size: %width x %height pixels','','none'),(7258,'Numeric values from the statistics module','','none'),(7259,'The most recent time the node has been viewed','','none'),(7260,'Media Embed','','none'),(7261,'Expand all menu links','','none'),(7262,'Parent menu link','','10.4.5'),(7263,'Configuration entities','','10.4.5'),(7264,'@label revision','','none'),(7265,'Publish media','','10.2.3'),(7266,'Unpublish media','','10.2.3'),(7267,'Determines if a password needs hashing','','none'),(7268,'The upload directory %directory for the file field %name could not be created or is not accessible. A newly uploaded file could not be saved in this directory as a consequence, and the upload was canceled.','','none'),(7269,'Multilingual support.','','none'),(7270,'Lock language.','','none'),(7271,'%type: @message in %function (line %line of %file) @backtrace_string.','','none'),(7272,'Starting execution of @module_cron().','','none'),(7273,'Starting execution of @module_cron(), execution of @module_previous_cron() took @time.','','none'),(7274,'Execution of @module_previous_cron() took @time.','','none'),(7275,'There is content for the entity type: @entity_type. <a href=\":url\">Remove @entity_type_plural</a>.','','none'),(7276,'Place Blocks','','none'),(7277,'The book page node.','','none'),(7278,'Book Parent','','none'),(7279,'Page has Children','','none'),(7280,'Flag indicating whether this book page has children','','none'),(7281,'Has Children','','none'),(7282,'1st parent','','none'),(7283,'2nd parent','','none'),(7284,'3rd parent','','none'),(7285,'4th parent','','none'),(7286,'5th parent','','none'),(7287,'6th parent','','none'),(7288,'7th parent','','none'),(7289,'8th parent','','none'),(7290,'9th parent','','none'),(7291,'The @parent of book node.','','none'),(7292,'Book @parent','','none'),(7293,'Add content and child pages to books and manage their hierarchies.','','none'),(7294,'Top Level Book from current node','','none'),(7295,'View display \'@id\': Comment field formatter \'@name\' was disabled because it is using the comment view display \'@display\' (@mode) that was just disabled.','','none'),(7296,'The comment entity view mode to be used in this formatter','','none'),(7297,'Comments view mode','','none'),(7298,'Select the view mode used to show the list of comments.','','none'),(7299,'Comment view mode: @mode','','none'),(7300,'@name: @langcode','','none'),(7301,'The configuration objects have different language codes so they cannot be translated:','','none'),(7302,'Message displayed to user on submission','','none'),(7303,'Redirect path on submission','','none'),(7304,'The message to display to the user after submission of this form. Leave blank for no message.','','none'),(7305,'Path to redirect the user to after submission of this form. For example, type \"/about\" to redirect to that page. Use a relative path with a slash in front.','','none'),(7306,'The path should start with /.','','none'),(7307,'Use custom display settings for the following @display_context modes','','10.4.4'),(7308,'Manage form modes','','none'),(7309,'Storing files','','none'),(7310,'Let scale make images larger than their original size.','','none'),(7311,'To import files from your current Drupal site, enter a local file directory containing your site (e.g. /var/www/docroot), or your site address (for example http://example.com).','','none'),(7312,'Use administration theme when editing or creating content','','none'),(7313,'Set as current revision','','none'),(7314,'Specify an alternative path by which this data can be accessed. For example, type \"/about\" when writing an about page.','','10.4.5'),(7315,'Administer REST resource configuration','','none'),(7316,'Supported methods','','none'),(7317,'Supported authentication providers','','none'),(7318,'REST resource config','','none'),(7319,'REST resource config ID','','none'),(7320,'REST resource plugin id','','none'),(7321,'REST resource configuration granularity','','none'),(7322,'REST resource configuration','','none'),(7323,'Authentication Provider','','none'),(7324,'No authentication is set','','none'),(7325,'The supported authentication methods for this view','','none'),(7326,'Control default display settings for your site, across all themes. Use theme-specific settings to override these defaults.','','10.2.3'),(7327,'administration theme','','10.4.5'),(7328,'Are you sure you want to delete all @entity_type_plural?','','none'),(7329,'This action cannot be undone.<br />Make a backup of your database if you want to be able to restore these items.','','none'),(7330,'Delete all @entity_type_plural','','none'),(7331,'There are 0 @entity_type_plural to delete.','','none'),(7332,'Deleting @entity_type_plural','','none'),(7333,'Deleting items... Completed @percentage% (@current of @total).','','none'),(7334,'All @entity_type_plural have been deleted.','','none'),(7335,'And <strong>@count</strong> more @entity_type_singular.And <strong>@count</strong> more @entity_type_plural.','','none'),(7336,'This will delete <strong>@count</strong> @entity_type_singular.This will delete <strong>@count</strong> @entity_type_plural.','','none'),(7337,'Page element display','','10.4.5'),(7338,'Use the logo supplied by the theme','','10.4.5'),(7339,'Your shortcut icon, or favicon, is displayed in the address bar and bookmarks of most browsers.','','10.4.5'),(7340,'Use the favicon supplied by the theme','','10.4.5'),(7341,'Upload favicon image','','10.4.5'),(7342,'Apply to selected items','','10.4.5'),(7343,'Access tours','','none'),(7344,'Recommendations to make your password stronger:','','10.2.3'),(7345,'Unrecognized username or password. <a href=\":password\">Forgot your password?</a>','','10.2.3'),(7346,'Combine multiple fields together and search by them.','','none'),(7347,'Field %field set in %filter is not set in display %display.','','none'),(7348,'%display: %filter can only be used on displays that use fields. Set the style or row format for that display to one using fields to use the combine field filter.','','none'),(7349,'A label is required for the specified operator.','','none'),(7350,'A label is required if the value for this item is defined.','','none'),(7351,'A value is required if the label for this item is defined.','','none'),(7352,'Leave empty to show all pages.','','none'),(7353,'Add the default row classes like @classes to the output. You can use this to quickly reduce the amount of markup the view provides by default, at the cost of making it more difficult to apply CSS.','','10.4.5'),(7354,'Views can be created from the <a href=\":list\">Views list page</a> by using the \"Add view\" action. Existing views can be managed from the <a href=\":list\">Views list page</a> by locating the view in the \"Enabled\" or \"Disabled\" list and selecting the desired operation action, for example \"Edit\".','','none'),(7355,'responsive image styles','','none'),(7356,'Status listing and form for the entity\'s moderation state.','','none'),(7357,'The username of the entity creator.','','none'),(7358,'The moderation state of the referenced content.','','none'),(7359,'Content entity type ID','','none'),(7360,'The ID of the content entity type this moderation state is for.','','none'),(7361,'Content entity ID','','none'),(7362,'The ID of the content entity this moderation state is for.','','none'),(7363,'Content entity revision ID','','none'),(7364,'The revision ID of the content entity this moderation state is for.','','none'),(7365,'Content moderation state','','none'),(7366,'content moderation state','','none'),(7367,'content moderation states','','none'),(7368,'Invalid state transition from %from to %to','','none'),(7369,'An automated attempt to create the directory %directory failed, possibly due to a permissions problem. To proceed with the installation, either create the directory and modify its permissions manually or ensure that the installer has the permissions to create it automatically. For more information, see INSTALL.txt or the <a href=\":handbook_url\">online handbook</a>.','','none'),(7370,'The Datetime Range module provides a Date field that stores start dates and times, as well as end dates and times. See the <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a> and the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI module help</a> pages for general information on fields and how to create and manage them. For more information, see the <a href=\":datetime_do\">online documentation for the Datetime Range module</a>.','','none'),(7371,'Datetime Range','','none'),(7372,'Provides the ability to store end dates.','','10.4.5'),(7373,'Date range settings','','none'),(7374,'Default start date type','','none'),(7375,'Default start date value','','none'),(7376,'Default end date type','','none'),(7377,'Default end date value','','none'),(7378,'Date range default display format settings','','none'),(7379,'Date range plain display format settings','','none'),(7380,'Date range custom display format settings','','none'),(7381,'Date range select list display format settings','','none'),(7382,'Date separator','','none'),(7383,'The string to separate the start and end dates','','none'),(7384,'Separator: %separator','','none'),(7385,'Default start date','','none'),(7386,'Set a default value for the start date.','','none'),(7387,'Set a default value for the end date.','','none'),(7388,'The relative start date value entered is invalid.','','none'),(7389,'The relative end date value entered is invalid.','','none'),(7390,'Start date value','','none'),(7391,'Computed start date','','none'),(7392,'The computed start DateTime object.','','none'),(7393,'End date value','','none'),(7394,'Computed end date','','none'),(7395,'The computed end DateTime object.','','none'),(7396,'Date and time range','','none'),(7397,'The @title end date cannot be before the start date','','none'),(7398,'Log data is corrupted and cannot be unserialized: @message','','none'),(7399,'- Skip field -','','none'),(7400,'Block Layout','','none'),(7401,'Save @block','','none'),(7402,'Specify pages by using their paths. Enter one path per line. The \'*\' character is a wildcard. An example path is %user-wildcard for every user page. %front is the front page.','','10.4.5'),(7403,'Configure Content Moderation permissions','','none'),(7404,'Upgraded @migration (processed 1 item total)Upgraded @migration (processed @count items total)','','none'),(7405,'Continuing with @migration (processed 1 item)Continuing with @migration (processed @count items)','','none'),(7406,'Provides a way for modules or themes to register layouts.','','10.4.5'),(7407,'@count year@count years','','10.4.5'),(7408,'random between -@degrees° and @degrees°','','none'),(7409,'The config object collection.','','none'),(7410,'The config object name.','','none'),(7411,'Serialized configuration object data.','','none'),(7412,'Testing missing dependencies','','none'),(7413,'Minimal profile for running a test when dependencies are listed but missing.','','none'),(7414,'<p>Now that you have an overview of the \"Add languages\" feature, you can continue by:<ul><li>Adding a language</li><li>Adding a custom language</li><li><a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/language\">Viewing configured languages</a></li></ul></p>','','none'),(7415,'<p>Now that you have an overview of the \"Edit language\" feature, you can continue by:<ul><li>Editing a language</li><li><a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/language\">Viewing configured languages</a></li></ul></p>','','none'),(7416,'<p>Now that you have an overview of the \"Languages\" page, you can continue by:<ul><li><a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/language/add\">Adding a language</a></li><li>Reordering languages</li><li>Editing a language</li><li>Deleting a language</li></ul></p>','','none'),(7417,'This page allows you to translate the user interface or modify existing translations. If you have installed your site initially in English, you must first add another language on the <a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/language\">Languages page</a>, in order to use this page.','','none'),(7418,'The translations you have made here will be used on your site\'s user interface. If you want to use them on another site or modify them on an external translation editor, you can <a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/translate/export\">export them</a> to a .po file and <a href=\"[site:url]admin/config/regional/translate/import\">import them</a> later.','','none'),(7419,'Find and manage media.','','10.2.3'),(7420,'Media thumbnail field display format settings','','none'),(7421,'Media source','','none'),(7422,'Region: @region','','none'),(7423,'The field ID.','','none'),(7424,'Last upgrade: @date','','none'),(7425,'Your server is capable of displaying file upload progress, but does not have the required libraries. It is recommended to install the <a href=\"http://pecl.php.net/package/uploadprogress\">PECL uploadprogress library</a>.','','10.4.5'),(7426,'Is front page','','none'),(7427,'Recipient email address','','none'),(7428,'You may also use tokens: [node:author:mail], [comment:author:mail], etc. Separate recipients with a comma.','','none'),(7429,'@label (disabled)','','10.4.5'),(7430,'comment type','','none'),(7431,'comment types','','none'),(7432,'Preview sender message','','none'),(7433,'Configuring workflows','','none'),(7434,'The workflow the moderation state is in.','','none'),(7435,'@bundle @label were skipped as they are under moderation and may not be directly published.','','none'),(7436,'@bundle @label were skipped as they are under moderation and may not be directly unpublished.','','none'),(7437,'The Field Layout module allows you to arrange fields into regions on forms and displays of entities such as nodes and users.','','none'),(7438,'For more information, see the <a href=\":field-layout-documentation\">online documentation for the Field Layout module</a>.','','none'),(7439,'Field Layout','','none'),(7440,'Per-view-mode field layout settings','','none'),(7441,'Image URL formatter settings','','none'),(7442,'Layout Discovery allows modules or themes to register layouts, and for other modules to list the available layouts and render them.','','none'),(7443,'For more information, see the <a href=\":layout-discovery-documentation\">online documentation for the Layout Discovery module</a>.','','none'),(7444,'Layout Discovery cannot be installed because the Layout Plugin module is installed and incompatible.','','none'),(7445,'Layout Discovery','','none'),(7446,'Exited edit mode.','','none'),(7447,'These are the supported authentication providers for this view. When this view is requested, the client will be forced to authenticate with one of the selected providers. Make sure you set the appropriate requirements at the <em>Access</em> section since the Authentication System will fallback to the anonymous user if it fails to authenticate. For example: require Access: Role | Authenticated User.','','none'),(7448,'Random number generation','','10.4.5'),(7449,'Drupal is unable to generate highly randomized numbers, which means certain security features like password reset URLs are not as secure as they should be. Instead, only a slow, less-secure fallback generator is available. The most likely cause is that open_basedir restrictions are in effect and /dev/urandom is not on the whitelist. See the <a href=\":drupal-php\">system requirements</a> page for more information. %exception_message','','none'),(7450,'Drupal is unable to generate highly randomized numbers, which means certain security features like password reset URLs are not as secure as they should be. Instead, only a slow, less-secure fallback generator is available. See the <a href=\":drupal-php\">system requirements</a> page for more information. %exception_message','','none'),(7451,'Less secure','','none'),(7452,'Detailed cron logging','','none'),(7453,'Visitors will only see the maintenance mode message. Only users with the \"@permission-label\" <a href=\":permissions-url\">permission</a> will be able to access the site. Authorized users can log in directly via the <a href=\":user-login\">user login</a> page.','','none'),(7454,'Initial visibility level','','none'),(7455,'Number of levels to display','','none'),(7456,'This maximum number includes the initial level.','','none'),(7457,'Base default argument','','none'),(7458,'Filter by view name, machine name, description, or display path','','none'),(7459,'Enter a part of the view name, machine name, description, or display path to filter by.','','none'),(7460,'The Workflows module provides a UI and an API for creating workflows content. This lets site admins define workflows and their states, and then define transitions between those states. For more information, see the <a href=\":workflow\">online documentation for the Workflows module</a>.','','none'),(7461,'Configure workflows.','','none'),(7462,'Create and edit workflows.','','none'),(7463,'Edit state','','none'),(7464,'Edit transition','','none'),(7465,'From state IDs','','none'),(7466,'From state ID','','none'),(7467,'To state ID','','none'),(7468,'Created the %label Workflow. In order for the workflow to be enabled there needs to be at least one state.','','none'),(7469,'Workflow %label deleted.','','none'),(7470,'There are no states yet.','','none'),(7471,'This workflow has no states and will be disabled until there is at least one, <a href=\":add-state\">add a new state.</a>','','none'),(7472,'Add a new state','','none'),(7473,'There are no transitions yet.','','none'),(7474,'Add a new transition','','none'),(7475,'Saved the %label Workflow.','','none'),(7476,'Created %label state.','','none'),(7477,'Are you sure you want to delete %state from %workflow?','','none'),(7478,'State %label deleted.','','none'),(7479,'Saved %label state.','','none'),(7480,'The transition from %from to %to already exists.','','none'),(7481,'Created %label transition.','','none'),(7482,'Are you sure you want to delete %transition from %workflow?','','none'),(7483,'%transition transition deleted.','','none'),(7484,'Saved %label transition.','','none'),(7485,'Embed media','','10.4.4'),(7486,'Warnings found','','10.4.5'),(7487,'Errors found','','10.4.5'),(7488,'Profile field ID.','','none'),(7489,'Locales target language ID.','','none'),(7490,'Language for this field.','','none'),(7491,'Translation of either the title or explanation.','','none'),(7492,'Windows installation depth','','none'),(7493,'The public files directory path is %depth characters. Paths longer than 120 characters will cause problems on Windows.','','none'),(7494,'General System Information','','10.4.5'),(7495,'Created the %label Workflow.','','none'),(7496,'There are no transitions to or from this state yet.','','none'),(7497,'The Migrate Drupal UI module provides a simple user interface to perform an upgrade from an earlier version of Drupal. For more information, see the <a href=\":migrate\">online documentation for the Migrate Drupal UI module</a>.','','none'),(7498,'Preparing the site','','none'),(7499,'Performing the upgrade','','none'),(7500,'On the <a href=\":upgrade\">Upgrade</a> page, you are guided through performing the upgrade in several steps.','','none'),(7501,'Reviewing the upgrade log','','none'),(7502,'You can review a <a href=\":log\">log of upgrade messages</a> by clicking the link in the message provided after the upgrade or by filtering the messages for the type <em>migrate_drupal_ui</em> on the <a href=\":messages\">Recent log messages</a> page.','','none'),(7503,'Rolling back an upgrade','','none'),(7504,'Rolling back an upgrade is not yet supported through the user interface.','','none'),(7505,'An intentionally plain theme with no styling to demonstrate default Drupal’s HTML and CSS. Learn how to build a custom theme from Stark in the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/8/theming\">Theming Guide</a>.','','10.4.5'),(7506,'Sticky header','','none'),(7507,'Content editor','','10.2.3'),(7508,'There are no @label yet.','','10.4.5'),(7509,'Merge content','','none'),(7510,'Administer block content','','10.4.5'),(7511,'Upgrade log','','none'),(7512,'Upgrade content and configuration from either a Drupal 6 or a Drupal 7 site.','','none'),(7513,'View the upgrade log.','','none'),(7514,'Quick edit settings','','none'),(7515,'TRACE method settings','','none'),(7516,'OPTIONS method settings','','none'),(7517,'CONNECT method settings','','none'),(7518,'Theme settings variable for a theme.','','none'),(7519,'The theme settings variable value.','','none'),(7520,'The user ID of the author.','','none'),(7521,'Object type for this string','','none'),(7522,'Grid gutter','','none'),(7523,'Drupal version of the source site','','none'),(7524,'To import public files from your current Drupal site, enter a local file directory containing your site (e.g. /var/www/docroot), or your site address (for example http://example.com).','','none'),(7525,'Source database is Drupal version @version but version @selected was selected.','','none'),(7526,'The term language.','','none'),(7527,'Translation ID.','','none'),(7528,'Name of property being translated.','','none'),(7529,'Featured Articles','','none'),(7530,'Advanced block options','','none'),(7531,'The %field date is incomplete.','','none'),(7532,'Include locked languages such as <em>Not specified</em> and <em>Not applicable</em>','','none'),(7533,'Universally Unique Identifier','Validation','none'),(7534,'Book outline.','Validation','none'),(7535,'You can only change the book outline for the <em>published</em> version of this content.','','none'),(7536,'Comment bulk form','','none'),(7537,'Commented entity','','none'),(7538,'Comment operations bulk form','','none'),(7539,'Add a form element that lets you run operations on multiple comments.','','none'),(7540,'Are you sure you want to delete this comment and all its children?Are you sure you want to delete these comments and all their children?','','none'),(7541,'Comment Permalink','','none'),(7542,'The moderation state @state_label is being used, but is not in the source storage.','','none'),(7543,'The workflow @workflow_label is being used, and cannot be deleted.','','none'),(7544,'All @entity_type types','','none'),(7545,'All @entity_type_plural_label','','none'),(7546,'This workflow applies to:','','none'),(7547,'There are no entity types.','','none'),(7548,'@bundle types','','none'),(7549,'State %state does not exist on %workflow workflow','','none'),(7550,'Datetime format valid for datetime type.','Validation','none'),(7551,'The field type.','','none'),(7552,'The field status.','','none'),(7553,'The field storage type.','','none'),(7554,'The module that implements the field storage type.','','none'),(7555,'The field storage status.','','none'),(7556,'The field data.','','none'),(7557,'The field instances.','','none'),(7558,'This field cardinality is set to unlimited and cannot be configured.','','none'),(7559,'This field cardinality is set to @cardinality and cannot be configured.','','none'),(7560,'Controls if unused files should be marked temporary','','none'),(7561,'Could not apply @style image style to @uri because the style does not support it.','','none'),(7562,'The Inline Form Errors module makes it easier for users to identify which errors need to be resolved by providing a summary of all errors and by placing the individual error messages next to the form elements themselves. For more information, see the <a href=\":inline_form_error\">online documentation for the Inline Form Errors module</a>.','','none'),(7563,'Displaying error messages','','none'),(7564,'When a form is not filled in correctly (for example, if a required field is left blank), a warning message is displayed at the top of the form. This message links to the affected form elements, and individual error messages are displayed next to each form element.','','none'),(7565,'Displaying error messages in browsers with HTML5 form validation','','none'),(7566,'In browsers that support HTML5 form validation, users will first see the error messages generated by their browser. In this case, the inline form error messages are only displayed after the HTML5 validation errors have been resolved.','','none'),(7567,'Places error messages adjacent to form inputs, for improved usability and accessibility.','','10.4.5'),(7568,'Language format settings','','none'),(7569,'Include locked languages','','none'),(7570,'Creating media items','','none'),(7571,'When a new media item is created, the Media module records basic information about it, including the author, date of creation, and the <a href=\":media-type\">media type</a>. It also manages the <em>publishing options</em>, which define whether or not the item is published. Default settings can be configured for each type of media on your site.','','none'),(7572,'Creating custom media types','','none'),(7573,'The Media module gives users with the <em>Administer media types</em> permission the ability to <a href=\":media-new\">create new media types</a> in addition to the default ones already configured. Each media type has an associated media source (such as the image source) which support thumbnail generation and metadata extraction. Fields managed by the <a href=\":field\">Field module</a> may be added for storing that metadata, such as width and height, as well as any other associated values.','','none'),(7574,'The Media module also enables you to create multiple versions of any media item, and revert to older versions using the <em>Revision information</em> settings.','','none'),(7575,'The Media module makes a number of permissions available, which can be set by role on the <a href=\":permissions\">permissions page</a>.','','none'),(7576,'Add media type','','10.4.5'),(7577,'Manage media types.','','10.4.5'),(7578,'Administer media types','','10.4.5'),(7579,'Update own media','','10.4.5'),(7580,'Delete own media','','10.4.5'),(7581,'View all media revisions','','10.4.5'),(7582,'To view a revision, you also need permission to view the media item.','','10.2.3'),(7583,'Full URI to a folder where the media icons will be installed','','none'),(7584,'Whether the thumbnail downloads should be queued','','none'),(7585,'Media source settings','','none'),(7586,'\"File\" media source configuration','','none'),(7587,'\"Image\" media source configuration','','none'),(7588,'Edit %type_label @label','','10.4.5'),(7589,'@type %label has been created.','','none'),(7590,'@type %label has been updated.','','none'),(7591,'@type: added %label.','','none'),(7592,'@type: updated %label.','','none'),(7593,'- Create -','','none'),(7594,'Select the field that will store essential information about the media item. If \"Create\" is selected a new field will be automatically created.','','none'),(7595,'%field_type field will be automatically created on this type to store the essential information about the media item.','','none'),(7596,'%field_name field is used to store the essential information about the media item.','','none'),(7597,'Media source that is responsible for additional logic related to this media type.','','none'),(7598,'Media source configuration','','none'),(7599,'Media sources can provide metadata fields such as title, caption, size information, credits, etc. Media can automatically save this metadata information to entity fields, which can be configured below. Information will only be mapped if the entity field is empty.','','none'),(7600,'Media will be automatically published when created.','','none'),(7601,'Download thumbnails via a queue. When using remote media sources, the thumbnail generation could be a slow process. Using a queue allows for this process to be handled in the background.','','none'),(7602,'The media type %name has been updated.','','none'),(7603,'The media type %name has been added.','','none'),(7604,'Added media type %name.','','none'),(7605,'No media types available. <a href=\":url\">Add media type</a>.','','none'),(7606,'The thumbnail of the media item.','','none'),(7607,'The time the media item was created.','','none'),(7608,'The time the media item was last edited.','','none'),(7609,'media type','','none'),(7610,'media types','','none'),(7611,'%type is used by @count media item on your site. You can not remove this media type until you have removed all of the %type media items.%type is used by @count media items on your site. You can not remove this media type until you have removed all of the %type media items.','','none'),(7612,'Linked to media item','','none'),(7613,'Use local files for reusable media.','','none'),(7614,'Use local images for reusable media.','','10.2.3'),(7615,'Menu settings.','Validation','none'),(7616,'You can only change the menu settings for the <em>published</em> version of this content.','','none'),(7617,'To view a revision, you also need permission to view the content item.','','10.2.3'),(7618,'To revert a revision, you also need permission to edit the content item.','','10.2.3'),(7619,'To delete a revision, you also need permission to delete the content item.','','10.2.3'),(7620,'Path alias.','Validation','none'),(7621,'You can only change the URL alias for the <em>published</em> version of this content.','','none'),(7622,'REST support for content types (provided by the <a href=\":node\">Node</a> module) is enabled by default. To enable support for other content entity types, you can use a <a href=\":config\" target=\"blank\">process based on configuration editing</a> or the contributed <a href=\":restui\">REST UI module</a>.','','none'),(7623,'Limited date range','','none'),(7624,'Your PHP installation has a limited date range.','','none'),(7625,'You are running on a system where PHP is compiled or limited to using 32-bit integers. This will limit the range of dates and timestamps to the years 1901-2038. Read about the <a href=\":url\">limitations of 32-bit PHP</a>.','','none'),(7626,'A client error happened','','none'),(7627,'To run cron from outside the site, go to <a href=\":cron\" class=\"system-cron-settings__link\">@cron</a>','','none'),(7628,'Run times of individual cron jobs will be written to watchdog','','none'),(7629,'Delete temporary files after','','10.4.5'),(7630,'Temporary files are not referenced, but are in the file system and therefore may show up in administrative lists. <strong>Warning:</strong> If enabled, temporary files will be permanently deleted and may not be recoverable.','','10.4.5'),(7631,'Automatic updates of Drupal core are not supported at this time.','','10.4.4'),(7632,'Add the @label role to the selected user(s)','','none'),(7633,'Remove the @label role from the selected user(s)','','none'),(7634,'Enabling the appropriate module may solve this issue. Otherwise, check to see if there is a module update available.','','none'),(7635,'This workflow is in use. You cannot remove this workflow until you have removed all content using it.','','none'),(7636,'Edit %label workflow','','none'),(7637,'This workflow state is in use. You cannot remove this workflow state until you have removed all content using it.','','none'),(7638,'Find and manage comments.','','10.2.3'),(7639,'The approved comments listing.','','10.2.3'),(7640,'Comments published','','10.2.3'),(7641,'The unapproved comments listing.','','10.2.3'),(7642,'Comments unapproved','','10.2.3'),(7643,'{{ message }}','','10.2.3'),(7644,'Entity reference selection handler settings','','none'),(7645,'Default selection handler settings','','none'),(7646,'The field instance ID.','','none'),(7647,'The field instance data.','','none'),(7648,'The field type','','none'),(7649,'The field definition.','','none'),(7650,'The formatter settings.','','none'),(7651,'File selection handler settings','','none'),(7652,'Source module not found for @migration_id.','','none'),(7653,'Destination module not found for @migration_id.','','none'),(7654,'User selection handler settings','','none'),(7655,'Views selection handler settings','','none'),(7656,'Czechia','','10.4.4'),(7657,'Go to page @key','','10.4.5'),(7658,'%workflow workflow: Use %transition transition.','','none'),(7659,'Offset must be a number greater than or equal to 0.','','none'),(7660,'A collection of states and transitions between those states.','','none'),(7661,'A particular condition that something is in at a specific time. The usage of the state is determined by a module that harnesses the Workflows module. For example, Content Moderation allows a state to be used for moderation of content by assigning a given state to a content item.','','none'),(7662,'The process of changing from one state to another. A transition can occur from multiple states, but only to one state.','','none'),(7663,'Are you sure you want to remove the %label block?','','none'),(7664,'Select the @entity_type types for the @workflow workflow','','none'),(7665,'Select the @entity_type_plural_label for the @workflow workflow','','none'),(7666,'Make sure that <strong>access to the database</strong> for the old site is available from this new site.','','none'),(7667,'<strong>If the old site has private files</strong>, a copy of its files directory must also be accessible on the host of this new site.','','none'),(7668,'<strong>Do not add any content to the new site</strong> before upgrading. Any existing content is likely to be overwritten by the upgrade process. See <a href=\":url\">the upgrade preparation guide</a>.','','none'),(7669,'The upgrade can take a long time. It is better to upgrade from a local copy of your site instead of directly from your live site.','','none'),(7670,'\"Audio\" media source configuration','','none'),(7671,'Access media overview','','10.4.5'),(7672,'Users with this permission can access the media overview page.','','10.2.3'),(7673,'\"Video\" media source configuration','','none'),(7674,'Set default value','','10.4.5'),(7675,'Upgrade analysis report','','none'),(7676,'Requires the \"View any unpublished content\" or \"View own unpublished content\" permission','','none'),(7677,'The %field_name entity reference field (entity_type: %entity_type, bundle: %bundle) no longer has any valid bundle it can reference. The field is not working correctly anymore and has to be adjusted.','','none'),(7678,'Compatible','','10.4.4'),(7679,'Moderation state filter','','none'),(7680,'Response failed validation.\nResponse:\n@data\n\nErrors:\n@errors','','none'),(7681,'Cannot change the install profile from %profile to %new_profile once Drupal is installed.','','none'),(7682,'Disclaimer block','','none'),(7683,'Entity action','','none'),(7684,'@type_label bundle','','10.4.5'),(7685,'Use field label instead of the \"On\" label as the label.','','none'),(7686,'There is no moderated @label yet. Only pending versions of @label, such as drafts, are listed here.','','none'),(7687,'The image file is invalid or the image type is not allowed. Allowed types: %types','','none'),(7688,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed dimensions of %dimensions pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7689,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed height of %height pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7690,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed width of %width pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7691,'The resized image is too small. The minimum dimensions are %dimensions pixels and after resizing, the image size will be %widthx%height pixels.','','none'),(7692,'The image is too small. The minimum dimensions are %dimensions pixels and the image size is %widthx%height pixels.','','none'),(7693,'One or more files could not be uploaded.','','none'),(7694,'Media display format settings','','none'),(7695,'Show playback controls','','none'),(7696,'Audio file display format settings','','none'),(7697,'Video file display format settings','','none'),(7698,'Replace the file name by its description when available','','none'),(7699,'Use description as link text','','none'),(7700,'Display the file using an HTML5 audio tag.','','none'),(7701,'Playback controls: %controls','','none'),(7702,'Multiple file display: Multiple HTML tags','','none'),(7703,'Multiple file display: One HTML tag with multiple sources','','none'),(7704,'Display the file using an HTML5 video tag.','','none'),(7705,'Root-relative file URL','','none'),(7706,'An entity field containing a file URI, and a computed root-relative file URL.','','none'),(7707,'@title field is required if there is @uri input.','','none'),(7708,'The Media module manages the creation, editing, deletion, settings, and display of media. Items are typically images, documents, slideshows, YouTube videos, tweets, Instagram photos, etc. You can reference media items from any other content on your site. For more information, see the <a href=\":media\">online documentation for the Media module</a>.','','none'),(7709,'Listing media items','','none'),(7710,'Media items are listed at the <a href=\":media-collection\">media administration page</a>.','','none'),(7711,'Adding media to other content','','none'),(7712,'Users with permission to administer content types can add media support by adding a media reference field to the content type on the content type administration page. (The same is true of block types, taxonomy terms, user profiles, and other content that supports fields.) A media reference field can refer to any configured media type. It is possible to allow multiple media types in the same field.','','none'),(7713,'Differences between Media, File, and Image reference fields','','none'),(7714,'<em>Media</em> reference fields offer several advantages over basic <em>File</em> and <em>Image</em> references:','','none'),(7715,'Media reference fields can reference multiple media types in the same field.','','none'),(7716,'Fields can also be added to media types themselves, which means that custom metadata like descriptions and taxonomy tags can be added for the referenced media. (Basic file and image fields do not support this.)','','none'),(7717,'Media types for audio and video files are provided by default, so there is no need for additional configuration to upload these media.','','none'),(7718,'Contributed or custom projects can provide additional media sources (such as third-party websites, Twitter, etc.).','','none'),(7719,'Existing media items can be reused on any other content items with a media reference field.','','none'),(7720,'For more information, see the <a href=\"@help_url\">Media help page</a>.','','10.4.4'),(7721,'Media Name','','none'),(7722,'%type_name: Create new media','','10.4.5'),(7723,'%type_name: Edit own media','','10.4.5'),(7724,'%type_name: Edit any media','','10.4.5'),(7725,'%type_name: Delete own media','','10.4.5'),(7726,'%type_name: Delete any media','','10.4.5'),(7727,'<em>The media source cannot be changed after the media type is created.</em>','','none'),(7728,'Use audio files for reusable media.','','none'),(7729,'Use video files for reusable media.','','none'),(7730,'The destination system contains data which was not created by a migration.','','none'),(7731,'Migrate Drupal settings','','none'),(7732,'source_module enforcement tags','','none'),(7733,'Old site','','none'),(7734,'The site you want to upgrade.','','none'),(7735,'New site','','none'),(7736,'Preparation steps','','none'),(7737,'WARNING: Content may be overwritten on your new site.','','none'),(7738,'I acknowledge I may lose data. Continue anyway.','','none'),(7739,'There is conflicting content of these types:','','none'),(7740,'There is translated content of these types:','','none'),(7741,'It looks like you are migrating translated content from your old site. Possible ID conflicts for translations are not automatically detected in the current version of Drupal. Refer to the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":id-conflicts-handbook\">upgrade handbook</a> for instructions on how to avoid ID conflicts with translated content.','','none'),(7742,'On the <a href=\":cache-settings\">Performance page</a>, you can configure how long browsers and proxies may cache pages based on the Cache-Control header; this setting is ignored by the Internal Page Cache module, which caches pages permanently until invalidation, unless they carry an Expires header. There is no other configuration.','','none'),(7743,'The Settings Tray module allows users with the <a href=\":administer_block_permission\">Administer blocks</a> and <a href=\":contextual_permission\">Use contextual links</a> permissions to edit blocks without visiting a separate page. For more information, see the <a href=\":handbook_url\">online documentation for the Settings Tray module</a>.','','none'),(7744,'Editing blocks in place','','none'),(7745,'To edit blocks in place, either click the <strong>Edit</strong> button in the toolbar and then click on the block, or choose \"Quick edit\" from the block\'s contextual link. (See the <a href=\":contextual\">Contextual Links module help</a> for more information about how to use contextual links.)','','none'),(7746,'The Settings Tray for the block will open in a sidebar, with a compact form for configuring what the block shows.','','none'),(7747,'Save the form and the changes will be immediately visible on the page.','','none'),(7748,'The ID of the node to which these statistics apply.','','none'),(7749,'Specify the format of the syslog entry. Available variables are: <dl><dt><code>!base_url</code></dt><dd>Base URL of the site.</dd><dt><code>!timestamp</code></dt><dd>Unix timestamp of the log entry.</dd><dt><code>!type</code></dt><dd>The category to which this message belongs.</dd><dt><code>!ip</code></dt><dd>IP address of the user triggering the message.</dd><dt><code>!request_uri</code></dt><dd>The requested URI.</dd><dt><code>!referer</code></dt><dd>HTTP Referer if available.</dd><dt><code>!severity</code></dt><dd>The severity level of the event; ranges from 0 (Emergency) to 7 (Debug).</dd><dt><code>!uid</code></dt><dd>User ID.</dd><dt><code>!link</code></dt><dd>A link to associate with the message.</dd><dt><code>!message</code></dt><dd>The message to store in the log.</dd></dl>','','none'),(7750,'Either the path \'%path\' is invalid or you do not have access to it.','','none'),(7751,'%capital_name contains the following terms.','','none'),(7752,'%capital_name contains terms grouped under parent terms','','none'),(7753,'%capital_name contains terms with multiple parents.','','none'),(7754,'Access the taxonomy vocabulary overview page','','10.4.5'),(7755,'Get an overview of all taxonomy vocabularies.','','10.2.3'),(7756,'%vocabulary: Create terms','','10.4.5'),(7757,'%vocabulary: Delete terms','','10.4.5'),(7758,'%vocabulary: Edit terms','','10.4.5'),(7759,'Output the URL as text','','none'),(7760,'Output an absolute link','','none'),(7761,'Min placeholder','','none'),(7762,'Max placeholder','','none'),(7763,'Enable this option to output an absolute link. Required if you want to use the path as a link destination.','','none'),(7764,'Enforce a <code>destination</code> parameter in the link to return the user to the original view upon completing the link action. Most operations include a destination by default and this setting is no longer needed.','','none'),(7765,'Hint text that appears inside the Min field when empty.','','none'),(7766,'Hint text that appears inside the Max field when empty.','','none'),(7767,'Hint text that appears inside the field when empty.','','10.4.5'),(7768,'There are no workflow types available. In order to create workflows you need to install a module that provides a workflow type. For example, the <a href=\":content-moderation\">Content Moderation</a> module provides a workflow type that enables workflows for content entities.','','none'),(7769,'Transition label','','none'),(7770,'Find and moderate content.','','none'),(7771,'No moderated content available. Only pending versions of content, such as drafts, are listed here.','','none'),(7772,'No front page content has been created yet.<br/>Follow the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/index.html\">User Guide</a> to start building your site.','','10.2.3'),(7773,'A locally hosted audio file.','','10.2.3'),(7774,'A locally hosted video file.','','10.2.3'),(7775,'Workspace name','','none'),(7776,'Name (A-Z)','','10.2.3'),(7777,'Name (Z-A)','','10.2.3'),(7778,'A flag indicating whether this was a default revision when it was saved.','','10.2.3'),(7779,'Entity untranslatable fields','Validation','none'),(7780,'The Content Moderation module allows you to expand on Drupal\'s \"unpublished\" and \"published\" states for content. It allows you to have a published version that is live, but have a separate working copy that is undergoing review before it is published. This is achieved by using <a href=\":workflows\">Workflows</a> to apply different states and transitions to entities as needed. For more information, see the <a href=\":content_moderation\">online documentation for the Content Moderation module</a>.','','none'),(7781,'Applying workflows','','none'),(7782,'Moderating content','','none'),(7783,'You can view a list of content awaiting moderation on the <a href=\":moderated\">moderated content page</a>. This will show any content in an unpublished state, such as Draft or Archived, to help surface content that requires more work from content editors.','','none'),(7784,'Each transition is exposed as a permission. If a user has the permission for a transition, they can use the transition to change the state of the content item, from Draft to Published.','','none'),(7785,'Hide non translatable fields on translation forms','','10.2.3'),(7786,'Content translation bundle settings','','none'),(7787,'Bundle settings values','','none'),(7788,'Fields that apply to all languages are hidden to avoid conflicting changes. <a href=\":url\">Edit them on the original language form</a>.','','none'),(7789,'Content translation synchronized fields','Validation','none'),(7790,'Non-translatable field elements can only be changed when updating the current revision.','','none'),(7791,'Non-translatable field elements can only be changed when updating the original language.','','none'),(7792,'The node language.','','none'),(7793,'This layout builder tool allows you to configure the layout of the main content area.','','none'),(7794,'To manage other areas of the page, use the <a href=\"@block-ui\">block administration page</a>.','','none'),(7795,'To manage other areas of the page, use the block administration page.','','none'),(7796,'For more information, see the <a href=\":layout-builder-documentation\">online documentation for the Layout Builder module</a>.','','none'),(7797,'Configure any layout','','none'),(7798,'Configure section','','none'),(7799,'Per-view-mode Layout Builder settings','','none'),(7800,'Allow a customized layout','','none'),(7801,'Edit layout for %label','','none'),(7802,'The layout override has been saved.','','none'),(7803,'The changes to the layout have been discarded.','','none'),(7804,'@entity being viewed','','none'),(7805,'@bundle @label','','none'),(7806,'Allow each @entity to have its layout customized.','','none'),(7807,'You must revert all customized layouts of this display before you can disable this option.','','none'),(7808,'Are you sure you want to revert this to defaults?','','none'),(7809,'The layout has been reverted back to defaults.','','none'),(7810,'Layout Section','','none'),(7811,'A layout section','','none'),(7812,'Create your media on the <a href=\":add_page\" target=\"_blank\">media add page</a> (opens a new window), then add it by name to the field below.','','none'),(7813,'Use existing media','','none'),(7814,'Type part of the media name.','','none'),(7815,'See the <a href=\":list_url\" target=\"_blank\">media list</a> (opens a new window) to help locate media.','','none'),(7816,'Allowed media types: %types','','none'),(7817,'Media item','','none'),(7818,'Create new media','','none'),(7819,'The next page provides an overview of the modules that will be upgraded and those that will not be upgraded, before you proceed to perform the upgrade.','','none'),(7820,'Import new configuration and content from old site','','none'),(7821,'Modules that will not be upgraded','','none'),(7822,'Modules that will be upgraded','','none'),(7823,'What will be upgraded?','','none'),(7824,'Module will not be upgradedModules will not be upgraded','','none'),(7825,'Module will be upgradedModules will be upgraded','','none'),(7826,'Provide text to display if this field contains an empty result. You may include HTML. You may enter data from this view as per the \"Replacement patterns\" in the \"Rewrite Results\" section above.','','none'),(7827,'Experimental installation profile used','','none'),(7828,'Experimental profiles are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk. To start building a new site, reinstall Drupal and choose a non-experimental profile.','','none'),(7829,'Demo: Umami Food Magazine (Experimental)','','none'),(7830,'Install an example site that shows off some of Drupal’s capabilities.','','none'),(7831,'Umami demo: Content','','none'),(7832,'Imports the content for the Umami demo.','','none'),(7833,'Search by keyword, ingredient, dish','','none'),(7834,'Umami','','none'),(7835,'The theme used for the Umami food magazine demonstration site.','','none'),(7836,'Go to the search page','','none'),(7837,'<span class=\"by-author\">by @author_name</span> @created_date','','none'),(7838,'Tell us what you think','','none'),(7839,'Banner block','','none'),(7840,'A banner block contains a title, summary, link to content and a background image. The background image is scaled to fill the browser\'s width.','','none'),(7841,'A disclaimer block contains disclaimer and copyright text.','','none'),(7842,'Footer promo block','','none'),(7843,'A footer promo block contains a title, promo text, and a \"find out more\" link.','','none'),(7844,'Recipe Name','','none'),(7845,'Umami dates','','none'),(7846,'jS F Y','PHP date format','none'),(7847,'Content Link','','none'),(7848,'Find out more link','','none'),(7849,'Promo text','','none'),(7850,'Promo title','','none'),(7851,'List the ingredients required for this recipe, one per item.','','none'),(7852,'Recipe category','','none'),(7853,'Provide a short overview of this recipe.','','none'),(7854,'Large 21:9 (1440x620)','','none'),(7855,'Large 21:9 2x (2880x1240)','','none'),(7856,'Large 3:2 2x (1536x1024)','','none'),(7857,'Large 3:2 (768x512)','','none'),(7858,'Medium 21:9 (1024x440)','','none'),(7859,'Medium 3:2 2x (1200x800)','','none'),(7860,'Medium 3:2 (600x400)','','none'),(7861,'Medium 8:7 (266x236)','','none'),(7862,'Scale crop 7:3 large','','none'),(7863,'Small 21:9 (768x330)','','none'),(7864,'Square Large','','none'),(7865,'Square Medium','','none'),(7866,'Square Small','','none'),(7867,'3:2 Image','','none'),(7868,'Hero or Banner','','none'),(7869,'Articles aside','','none'),(7870,'More featured articles','','none'),(7871,'A view to create a list of featured articles from the Umami website.','','none'),(7872,'Promoted Items','','none'),(7873,'A view to list the items promoted to the top of the homepage.','','none'),(7874,'Promoted Items Double','','none'),(7875,'Attachment: Promoted Items Double','','none'),(7876,'Block: Promoted Items - Single','','none'),(7877,'Recipes listing','','none'),(7878,'Umami Recipes Banner','','none'),(7879,'Umami disclaimer','','none'),(7880,'Umami footer promo','','none'),(7881,'Non-translatable fields can only be changed when updating the current revision.','','none'),(7882,'Non-translatable fields can only be changed when updating the original language.','','none'),(7883,'Moderated content requires non-translatable fields to be edited in the original language form.','','none'),(7884,'Translations cannot be flagged as outdated when content is moderated.','','none'),(7885,'The \"Delete translation\" action is only available for published translations.','','none'),(7886,'@label (Original translation) - <em>The following @entity_type translations will be deleted:</em>','','10.2.3'),(7887,'Are you sure you want to delete this @item?Are you sure you want to delete these @items?','','10.2.3'),(7888,'Deleted @count item.Deleted @count items.','','none'),(7889,'@count item has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count items have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7890,'Insert selected','','10.4.5'),(7891,'Content block','','10.4.5'),(7892,'The field \"%field\" failed to render with the error of \"%error\".','','none'),(7893,'The @uri field is required when the @title field is specified.','','none'),(7894,'Language for this menu.','','none'),(7895,'Menu link title translation.','','none'),(7896,'Menu link description translation.','','none'),(7897,'Follow-up migration tags','','none'),(7898,'@label (@derivative)','','none'),(7899,'Provide the information to access the Drupal site you want to upgrade. Files can be imported into the upgraded site as well.  See the <a href=\":url\">Upgrade documentation for more detailed instructions</a>.','','none'),(7900,'<h3>Resolve all issues below to continue the upgrade.</h3>','','none'),(7901,'Information array','','none'),(7902,'The configuration ID','','none'),(7903,'The target entity type ID','','none'),(7904,'The target bundle','','none'),(7905,'The default language','','none'),(7906,'Whether to show language selector on create and edit pages','','none'),(7907,'Whether to hide non translatable fields on translation forms','','none'),(7908,'Configuration validation','','none'),(7909,'The \"%plugin_id\" was not found','','none'),(7910,'You must have the pdo_sqlite PHP extension installed. See core/INSTALL.sqlite.txt for instructions.','','none'),(7911,'Unable to automatically determine a port. Use the --port to hardcode an available port.','','none'),(7912,'No installation found. Use the \'install\' command.','','none'),(7913,'Error while opening up a one time login URL','','none'),(7914,'Entity has field','Validation','none'),(7915,'The entity must have the %field_name field.','','none'),(7916,'The entity does not support fields.','','none'),(7917,'The selected installation profile %install_profile does not match the profile stored in configuration %config_profile.','','none'),(7918,'Use existing configuration','','none'),(7919,'Install %name using existing configuration.','','none'),(7920,'The configuration from the directory %sync_directory will be used.','','none'),(7921,'An advanced action offers additional configuration options which may be filled out below. Changing the <em>Label</em> field is recommended in order to better identify the precise action taking place.','','none'),(7922,'The i18n_blocks block numeric identifier.','','none'),(7923,'The default theme.','','none'),(7924,'i18n_string table id','','none'),(7925,'Block property','','none'),(7926,'The translation of the value of \"property\".','','none'),(7927,'Block title translation.','','none'),(7928,'Block body.','','none'),(7929,'Block body translation.','','none'),(7930,'Deleted @count comment.Deleted @count comments.','','none'),(7931,'@count comment has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count comments have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7932,'contact forms','','none'),(7933,'contact message','','none'),(7934,'contact messages','','none'),(7935,'@entity_type_plural_label do not support publishing statuses. For example, even after transitioning from a published workflow state to an unpublished workflow state they will still be visible to site visitors.','','none'),(7936,'@label@column (@argument)','','none'),(7937,'text editor','','none'),(7938,'text editors','','none'),(7939,'Field storages','','none'),(7940,'field storage','','none'),(7941,'field storages','','none'),(7942,'Input data could not be read','','none'),(7943,'Temporary file data for \"%path\" could not be written','','none'),(7944,'Temporary file \"%path\" could not be opened for file upload','','none'),(7945,'image style','','none'),(7946,'image styles','','none'),(7947,'content language setting','','none'),(7948,'content languages settings','','none'),(7949,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. <a href=\":url\">You can specify a different domain for serving oEmbed content here</a>.','','10.2.3'),(7950,'Manage media settings.','','10.4.5'),(7951,'Domain from which to serve oEmbed content in an iframe','','none'),(7952,'The URL of the oEmbed providers database in JSON format','','none'),(7953,'oEmbed display format settings','','none'),(7954,'oEmbed widget format settings','','none'),(7955,'oEmbed media source configuration','','none'),(7956,'URI of thumbnail storage directory','','none'),(7957,'Allowed oEmbed providers','','none'),(7958,'Displaying media assets from third-party services, such as YouTube or Twitter, can be risky. This is because many of these services return arbitrary HTML to represent those assets, and that HTML may contain executable JavaScript code. If handled improperly, this can increase the risk of your site being compromised.','','none'),(7959,'In order to mitigate the risks, third-party assets are displayed in an iFrame, which effectively sandboxes any executable code running inside it. For even more security, the iFrame can be served from an alternate domain (that also points to your Drupal site), which you can configure on this page. This helps safeguard cookies and other sensitive information.','','none'),(7960,'iFrame domain','','none'),(7961,'Enter a different domain from which to serve oEmbed content, including the <em>http://</em> or <em>https://</em> prefix. This domain needs to point back to this site, or existing oEmbed content may not display correctly, or at all.','','none'),(7962,'Maximum size: %max_width x %max_height pixels','','none'),(7963,'Maximum width: %max_width pixels','','none'),(7964,'Maximum height: %max_height pixels','','none'),(7965,'Could not retrieve the remote URL (@url).','','none'),(7966,'oEmbed content','','none'),(7967,'You can link to media from the following services: @providers','','none'),(7968,'oEmbed URL','','none'),(7969,'oEmbed resource','Validation','none'),(7970,'The given URL does not match any known oEmbed providers.','','none'),(7971,'Sorry, the @name provider is not allowed.','','none'),(7972,'The provided URL does not represent a valid oEmbed resource.','','none'),(7973,'An error occurred while trying to retrieve the oEmbed provider database.','','none'),(7974,'Suggested cache lifetime','','none'),(7975,'Thumbnails location','','none'),(7976,'Thumbnails will be fetched from the provider for local usage. This is the URI of the directory where they will be placed.','','none'),(7977,'Allowed providers','','none'),(7978,'Optionally select the allowed oEmbed providers for this media type. If left blank, all providers will be allowed.','','none'),(7979,'@type URL','','none'),(7980,'Could not prepare thumbnail destination directory @dir for oEmbed media.','','none'),(7981,'oEmbed source','','none'),(7982,'Use oEmbed URL for reusable media.','','none'),(7983,'Remote video','','10.2.3'),(7984,'Use remote video URL for reusable media.','','none'),(7985,'Custom menu links','','none'),(7986,'custom menu link','','10.4.5'),(7987,'custom menu links','','none'),(7988,'Deleted @count content item.Deleted @count content items.','','10.2.3'),(7989,'@count content item has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count content items have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7990,'responsive image style','','none'),(7991,'REST resource configurations','','none'),(7992,'search pages','','none'),(7993,'Shortcut links','','none'),(7994,'shortcut link','','none'),(7995,'shortcut links','','none'),(7996,'Shortcut sets','','none'),(7997,'shortcut set','','none'),(7998,'shortcut sets','','none'),(7999,'Configuration install','','none'),(8000,'The selected profile has a hook_install() implementation and therefore can not be installed from configuration.','','none'),(8001,'This import does not contain system.site configuration, so has been rejected.','','none'),(8002,'Browser and proxy cache maximum age','','10.4.5'),(8003,'This is used as the value for max-age in Cache-Control headers.','','10.4.5'),(8004,'Drupal provides an <a href=\":module_enable\">Internal Page Cache module</a> that is recommended for small to medium-sized websites.','','none'),(8005,'Term language','','none'),(8006,'Views','View entity type','none'),(8007,'view','View entity type','none'),(8008,'views','View entity type','none'),(8009,'workflows','','none'),(8010,'Testing install profile all dependencies','','none'),(8011,'Profile for testing that install profiles can require a module.','','none'),(8012,'Testing install profile dependencies','','none'),(8013,'[user:display-name],\n\nThank you for registering at [site:name]. Your application for an account is currently pending approval. Once it has been approved, you will receive another email containing information about how to log in, set your password, and other details.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(8014,'A remotely hosted video from YouTube or Vimeo.','','10.2.3'),(8015,'A boolean indicating whether this block is reusable.','','none'),(8016,'Whether the Layout Builder is enabled for this display','','none'),(8017,'Are you sure you want to disable Layout Builder?','','none'),(8018,'All customizations will be removed. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(8019,'Layout Builder has been disabled.','','none'),(8020,'Use Layout Builder','','none'),(8021,'Provides a field for selecting media entities in our media library view','','none'),(8022,'Select @label','','10.4.5'),(8023,'Zero items selected','','10.2.3'),(8024,'All @count items selected','','10.2.3'),(8025,'Select all media','','10.2.3'),(8026,'Show media item weights','','10.4.5'),(8027,'Hide media item weights','','10.4.5'),(8028,'A maximum of @count files can be uploaded.','','none'),(8029,'The maximum number of media items have been selected.','','10.4.5'),(8030,'Update widget','','10.4.5'),(8031,'The media item \"@label\" is not of an accepted type. Allowed types: @types','','none'),(8032,'One media item remaining.@count media items remaining.','','10.4.5'),(8033,'Only one item can be selected.Only @count items can be selected.','','none'),(8034,'Allows you to select items from the media library.','','none'),(8035,'The Workspaces module allows workspaces to be defined and switched between. Content is then assigned to the active workspace when created. For more information, see the <a href=\":workspaces\">online documentation for the Workspaces module</a>.','','none'),(8036,'Switch workspace','','none'),(8037,'Workspaces can not be installed when the contributed Workspace module is also installed. See the <a href=\":link\">upgrade path</a> page for more information on how to upgrade.','','none'),(8038,'This form can only be submitted in the default workspace.','','none'),(8039,'Switch to @workspace','','none'),(8040,'Current workspace:','','none'),(8041,'Denied access to view workspace %workspace_label for user %uid','','none'),(8042,'workspaces','','none'),(8043,'Activate the %workspace workspace.','','none'),(8044,'%workspace_label is now the active workspace.','','none'),(8045,'You do not have access to activate the %workspace_label workspace.','','none'),(8046,'The following will also be deleted:','','none'),(8047,'This action cannot be undone, and will also delete all content created in this workspace.','','none'),(8048,'1 @label revision.@count @label revisions.','','none'),(8049,'Select workspace','','none'),(8050,'Deleted workspace','Validation','none'),(8051,'A workspace with this ID has been deleted but data still exists for it.','','none'),(8052,'Entity workspace conflict','Validation','none'),(8053,'The content is being edited in the %label workspace. As a result, your changes cannot be saved.','','none'),(8054,'Drupal system cross profile test','','none'),(8055,'Support module for testing that a module in one profile can be reused in another profile.','','none'),(8056,'Card common','','none'),(8057,'Card common alt','','none'),(8058,'Inline block','','none'),(8059,'Block revision ID','','none'),(8060,'Serialized block','','none'),(8061,'The view mode in which to render the block.','','none'),(8062,'Inline blocks','','none'),(8063,'The entity type this translation relates to','','none'),(8064,'The entity id this translation relates to','','none'),(8065,'The entity revision id this translation relates to','','none'),(8066,'The target language for this translation.','','none'),(8067,'Boolean indicating whether the translation is published (visible to non-administrators).','','none'),(8068,'Image Resize','','none'),(8069,'Short description of the image used by screen readers and displayed when the image is not loaded. This is important for accessibility.','','10.4.5'),(8070,'Short description of the image used by screen readers and displayed when the image is not loaded. Enabling this field is recommended.','','none'),(8071,'Responsive Grid','','none'),(8072,'Displays rows in a responsive grid.','','none'),(8073,'Insert Media','','10.4.5'),(8074,'Edit {{ name }}','','10.2.3'),(8075,'The {node}.language to which this comment is a reply. Site default language is used as a fallback if node does not have a language.','','none'),(8076,'The comment language.','','none'),(8077,'The entity ID this translation relates to','','none'),(8078,'The entity revision ID this translation relates to','','none'),(8079,'Type (article, page, ....)','','none'),(8080,'Option ID.','','none'),(8081,'Integer value of Object ID','','none'),(8082,'The input format used by this string','','none'),(8083,'Translation of the option','','none'),(8084,'Parent lid','','none'),(8085,'Plural index number in case of plural strings','','none'),(8086,'The default language for new terms.','','none'),(8087,'The i18n taxonomy translation setting.','','none'),(8088,'Media selection','','none'),(8089,'Modules could not be listed due to an error: %error','','none'),(8090,'A non-existent config entity name returned by FieldStorageConfigInterface::getBundles(): entity type: %entity_type, bundle: %bundle, field name: %field','','none'),(8091,'Allows users to stage content or preview a full site by using multiple workspaces on a single site.','','10.4.5'),(8092,'Testing requirements','','none'),(8093,'Testing requirements failed requirements.','','none'),(8094,'Profile for testing hook_requirements().','','none'),(8095,'Create @entity_type','','none'),(8096,'Optional label','','none'),(8097,'JSON:API','','none'),(8098,'Block enabled status','','none'),(8099,'Block weight within region','','none'),(8100,'Theme region within which the block is set','','none'),(8101,'Multilingual mode','','none'),(8102,'Language string ID','','none'),(8103,'A module defined group of translations','','none'),(8104,'Full string ID for quick search: type:objectid:property.','','none'),(8105,'Object property for this string','','none'),(8106,'The {filter_format}.format of the string','','none'),(8107,'Plural index number','','none'),(8108,'@entity fields','','none'),(8109,'Language for this term.','','none'),(8110,'Term name translation.','','none'),(8111,'Term description translation.','','none'),(8112,'Entity Reference Supported New Entities','Validation','none'),(8113,'%collection_label can only be created in the default workspace.','','none'),(8114,'Media type ID','','none'),(8115,'Temporary file \"%path\" could not be opened for file upload.','','none'),(8116,'Remove @label','','10.4.5'),(8117,'The time that the workspace was created.','','none'),(8118,'View @node.type.entity.label','','none'),(8119,'Testing site config','','none'),(8120,'Minimal profile for testing with default site config.','','none'),(8121,'The JSON:API module is a fully compliant implementation of the <a href=\":spec\">JSON:API Specification</a>. By following shared conventions, you can increase productivity, take advantage of generalized tooling, and focus on what matters: your application. Clients built around JSON:API are able to take advantage of features like efficient response caching, which can sometimes eliminate network requests entirely. For more information, see the <a href=\":docs\">online documentation for the JSON:API module</a>.','','none'),(8122,'JSON:API is a particular implementation of REST that provides conventions for resource relationships, collections, filters, pagination, and sorting. These conventions help developers build clients faster and encourages reuse of code.','','none'),(8123,'Exposes entities as a JSON:API-specification-compliant web API.','','10.4.5'),(8124,'Umami Home Banner','','none'),(8125,'The specified file \'%source\' could not be copied to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8126,'Failed to unlink file \'%path\'.','','none'),(8127,'Cannot delete \'%path\' because it is a directory. Use deleteRecursive() instead.','','none'),(8128,'The file \'%path\' is not of a recognized type so it was not deleted.','','none'),(8129,'The specified file \'%source\' could not be moved to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8130,'The source file \'%source\' could not be unlinked after copying to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8131,'File \'%original_source\' (\'%realpath\') could not be copied because it does not exist.','','none'),(8132,'File \'%original_source\' could not be copied because it does not exist.','','none'),(8133,'File \'%original_source\' could not be copied because a file by that name already exists in the destination directory (\'%destination\').','','none'),(8134,'File \'%source\' could not be copied because it would overwrite itself.','','none'),(8135,'Temporary file \'%temp_name\' could not be created.','','none'),(8136,'When checking for updates, anonymous information about your site is sent to <a href=\"@drupal\">Drupal.org</a>.','','none'),(8137,'If selected and this menu link has children, the menu will always appear expanded. This option may be overridden for the entire menu tree when placing a menu block.','','10.2.3'),(8138,'Checked','Examined','10.4.5'),(8139,'This @label is being edited by user @user, and is therefore locked from editing by others. This lock is @age old. Click here to <a href=\":url\">break this lock</a>.','','none'),(8140,'This will also remove 1 placed block instance. This action cannot be undone.This will also remove @count placed block instances. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(8141,'Whether to log IP addresses with comments or not.','','none'),(8142,'Select the state that new content will be assigned. This state will appear as the default in content forms and the available target states will be based on the transitions available from this state.','','none'),(8143,'Allows users to configure the display and form display by arranging fields in several columns.','','10.4.5'),(8144,'Forms and links inside the content of the layout builder tool have been disabled.','','none'),(8145,'Default layouts','','none'),(8146,'Layout Builder can be selectively enabled on the \"Manage Display\" page in the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI</a>. This allows you to control the output of each type of display individually. For example, a \"Basic page\" might have view modes such as Full and Teaser, with each view mode having different layouts selected.','','none'),(8147,'Overridden layouts','','none'),(8148,'If enabled, each individual content item can have a custom layout. Once the layout for an individual content item is overridden, changes to the Default layout will no longer affect it. Overridden layouts may be reverted to return to matching and being synchronized to their Default layout.','','none'),(8149,'Allows users to add and arrange blocks and content fields directly on the content.','','10.4.5'),(8150,'Choose a layout for this section','','none'),(8151,'Column widths','','none'),(8152,'All available blocks are listed.','','none'),(8153,'Are you sure you want to discard your layout changes?','','none'),(8154,'Are you sure you want to remove section @section?','','none'),(8155,'Layout Builder Widget','','none'),(8156,'A field widget for Layout Builder.','','none'),(8157,'Choose the column widths for this layout.','','none'),(8158,'Manually entered paths should start with one of the following characters: / ? #','','none'),(8159,'Manages the creation, configuration, and display of media items.','','10.4.5'),(8160,'Allow media items to be viewed standalone at /media/{id}','','none'),(8161,'Standalone media URL','','none'),(8162,'Allow users to access @media-entities at /media/{id}.','','none'),(8163,'Could not download remote thumbnail from {url}.','','none'),(8164,'Media Library form and view displays have been created for the %type media type.','','none'),(8165,'Enhances the media list with additional features to more easily find and use existing media items.','','10.4.5'),(8166,'Media library widget settings','','none'),(8167,'Allowed media types, in display order','','none'),(8168,'Loading grid view.','','none'),(8169,'Changed to grid view.','','none'),(8170,'Loading table view.','','none'),(8171,'Changed to table view.','','none'),(8172,'@selected of @count item selected@selected of @count items selected','','none'),(8173,'Add or select media','','10.4.5'),(8174,'Add fileAdd files','','10.4.5'),(8175,'Add @type via URL','','none'),(8176,'Allowed providers: @providers.','','none'),(8177,'Tab order','','none'),(8178,'Tab order: @order','','none'),(8179,'No media items are selected.','','10.4.5'),(8180,'Opening media library.','','10.4.5'),(8181,'Menu tree hierarchy.','Validation','none'),(8182,'You can only change the hierarchy for the <em>published</em> version of this menu link.','','none'),(8183,'%capital_name contains 1 menu link with pending revisions. Manipulation of a menu tree having links with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable manipulation by getting each menu link to a published state.%capital_name contains @count menu links with pending revisions. Manipulation of a menu tree having links with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable manipulation by getting each menu link to a published state.','','none'),(8184,'Failed to read from @title.','','none'),(8185,'The server reports the following message: %error.','','none'),(8186,'The module providing a search page.','','none'),(8187,'Whether or not this module is enabled for search.','','none'),(8188,'Allows users to directly edit the configuration of blocks on the current page.','','10.4.5'),(8189,'Failed to save file due to error \"%error\"','','none'),(8190,'Expand all items','','none'),(8191,'Override the option found on each menu link used for expanding children and instead display the whole menu tree as expanded.','','none'),(8192,'The terms with updated parents have been modified by another user, the changes could not be saved.','','none'),(8193,'%capital_name contains 1 term with pending revisions. Drag and drop of terms with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable drag-and-drop support by getting each term to a published state.%capital_name contains @count terms with pending revisions. Drag and drop of terms with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable drag-and-drop support by getting each term to a published state.','','none'),(8194,'Taxonomy term hierarchy.','Validation','none'),(8195,'You can only change the hierarchy for the <em>published</em> version of this term.','','none'),(8196,'Use the toolbar','','10.4.5'),(8197,'Link to display','','none'),(8198,'Displays a link to a path-based display of this view while keeping the filter criteria, sort criteria, pager settings and contextual filters.','','none'),(8199,'The display ID of the view display to link to.','','none'),(8200,'Is Latest Translation Affected Revision','','none'),(8201,'To make sure the results are the same when switching to the other display, it is recommended to make sure the display:','','none'),(8202,'Has a path.','','none'),(8203,'Has the same filter criteria.','','none'),(8204,'Has the same sort criteria.','','none'),(8205,'Has the same pager settings.','','none'),(8206,'Has the same contextual filters.','','none'),(8207,'There are no path-based displays available.','','none'),(8208,'%current_display: The link in the %area area has no configured display.','','none'),(8209,'%current_display: The link in the %area area points to the %linked_display display which no longer exists.','','none'),(8210,'%current_display: The link in the %area area points to the %linked_display display which does not have a path.','','none'),(8211,'The text to display for this field. You may enter data from this view as per the \"Replacement patterns\" below. You may include <a href=\"@twig_docs\">Twig</a> or the following allowed HTML tags: <code>@tags</code>','','none'),(8212,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML XML URL attribute for each row.','','none'),(8213,'Managing content','','none'),(8214,'The file %filename could not be uploaded because the name is invalid.','','none'),(8215,'Added media items','','10.4.5'),(8216,'Removing @label.','','10.4.5'),(8217,'Additional selected media','','none'),(8218,'Select @name','','none'),(8219,'Save and insert','','none'),(8220,'The media item %label has been removed.','','10.2.3'),(8221,'The media item has been created but has not yet been saved. Fill in any required fields and save to add it to the media library.The media items have been created but have not yet been saved. Fill in any required fields and save to add them to the media library.','','10.4.5'),(8222,'The <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API</a> and <a href=\":rest-docs\">RESTful Web Services</a> modules serve similar purposes. <a href=\":comparison\">Read the comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules</a> to determine the best choice for your site.','','none'),(8223,'Some multilingual features currently do not work well with JSON:API. See the <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API multilingual support documentation</a> for more information on the current status of multilingual support.','','none'),(8224,'Revision support is currently read-only and only for the \"Content\" and \"Media\" entity types in JSON:API. See the <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API revision support documentation</a> for more information on the current status of revision support.','','none'),(8225,'JSON:API multilingual support','','none'),(8226,'JSON:API revision support','','none'),(8227,'Configure whether to allow only read operations or all operations.','','none'),(8228,'JSON:API settings','','none'),(8229,'Restrict JSON:API to only read operations','','none'),(8230,'Allowed operations','','none'),(8231,'Accept only JSON:API read operations.','','none'),(8232,'Accept all JSON:API create, read, update, and delete operations.','','none'),(8233,'Warning: Only enable all operations if the site requires it. <a href=\":docs\">Learn more about securing your site with JSON:API.</a>','','none'),(8234,'Widget (table)','','10.2.3'),(8235,'Enter a comma-separated list. For example: Vegetarian, Chocolate brownies, Appetizers','','none'),(8236,'Use this taxonomy to group recipes of the same type together.','','none'),(8237,'Recipe Collections','','none'),(8238,'Recipe collections','','none'),(8239,'\"@block\" block','','none'),(8240,'The Layout Builder module makes a number of permissions available, which can be set by role on the <a href=\":permissions\">permissions page</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":layout-builder-permissions\">Configuring Layout Builder permissions</a> online documentation.','','none'),(8241,'<strong>Warning</strong>: Layout Builder does not support translating layouts. (<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/8/core/modules/layout-builder/layout-builder-and-content-translation\">online documentation</a>)','','none'),(8242,'Manage the single-use blocks within the Layout Builder','','none'),(8243,'Block previews are visible. Block labels are hidden.','','none'),(8244,'Block previews are hidden. Block labels are visible.','','none'),(8245,'%entity_type - %bundle: Configure all layout overrides','','none'),(8246,'Warning: Allows configuring the layout even if the user cannot edit the @entity_type_singular itself.','','none'),(8247,'%entity_type - %bundle: Configure layout overrides for @entity_type_plural that the user can edit','','none'),(8248,'%entity_type: Configure all layout overrides','','none'),(8249,'%entity_type: Configure layout overrides for @entity_type_plural that the user can edit','','none'),(8250,'Layout Builder user interface','','none'),(8251,'Placeholder for the @preview_fallback','','none'),(8252,'You are editing the layout template for all @bundle @plural_label.','','none'),(8253,'You are editing the layout template for all @plural_label.','','none'),(8254,'Section: @delta','','none'),(8255,'Blocks in Section: @section, Region: @region','','none'),(8256,'@label (current)','','none'),(8257,'Move the @block_label block','','none'),(8258,'You are editing the layout for this @bundle @singular_label. <a href=\":link\">Edit the template for all @bundle @plural_label instead.</a>','','none'),(8259,'You are editing the layout for this @singular_label. <a href=\":link\">Edit the template for all @plural_label instead.</a>','','none'),(8260,'You are editing the layout for this @bundle @singular_label.','','none'),(8261,'You are editing the layout for this @singular_label.','','none'),(8262,'Show content preview','','none'),(8263,'\"@field\" field','','none'),(8264,'The <a href=\":rest-docs\">RESTful Web Services</a> and <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API</a> modules serve similar purposes. <a href=\":comparison\">Read the comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules</a> to determine the best choice for your site.','','none'),(8265,'\"@view\" views block','','none'),(8266,'Delete any file','','10.4.5'),(8267,'Refresh interval in seconds','','none'),(8268,'Add new @entity-type %label','','none'),(8269,'There are no allowed media types configured for this field. Edit the field settings to select the allowed media types.','','none'),(8270,'There are no allowed media types configured for this field. <a href=\":url\">Edit the field settings</a> to select the allowed media types.','','none'),(8271,'Archived','Workflow state label','none'),(8272,'Draft','Workflow state label','none'),(8273,'Published','Workflow state label','none'),(8274,'Archive','Workflow transition label','none'),(8275,'Restore to Draft','Workflow transition label','none'),(8276,'Restore','Workflow transition label','none'),(8277,'Create New Draft','Workflow transition label','none'),(8278,'Publish','Workflow transition label','none'),(8279,'Temporary file \"%path\" that was deleted during garbage collection did not exist on the filesystem. This could be caused by a missing stream wrapper.','','none'),(8280,'Temporary file \"%path\" that was deleted during garbage collection did not exist on the filesystem.','','none'),(8281,'Layout Builder tools','','none'),(8282,'not regex','','none'),(8283,'Enable Drupal style \"sticky\" table headers (JavaScript)','','none'),(8284,'Claro','','none'),(8285,'Claro settings','','none'),(8286,'Tabs display toggle','','10.4.5'),(8287,'The %view_id view could not be updated automatically while processing an entity schema update for the %entity_type_id entity type.','','none'),(8288,'<span class=\"visually-hidden\">Show </span>@title<span class=\"visually-hidden\"> media</span><span class=\"active-tab visually-hidden\"> (selected)</span>','','10.2.3'),(8289,'<span class=\"visually-hidden\">Show </span>@title<span class=\"visually-hidden\"> media</span>','','10.2.3'),(8290,'Adding selection.','','10.4.5'),(8291,'Added one media item.Added @count media items.','','10.4.5'),(8292,'Term from URL','','none'),(8293,'Filter the contents of the %view_title view','','10.4.5'),(8294,'Content Block','','none'),(8295,'This theme is not compatible with Drupal @core_version. Check that the .info.yml file contains a compatible \'core\' or \'core_version_requirement\' value.','','none'),(8296,'Drupal Core (@core_requirement) (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> version @core_version)','','none'),(8297,'Additional Resources','','10.4.5'),(8298,'A clean, accessible, and powerful Drupal administration theme.','','10.4.5'),(8299,'Status Details','','10.4.5'),(8300,'Maximum number of autocomplete suggestions.','','none'),(8301,'Failed to connect to your database server. The server reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Is the database server running?</li><li>Does the database exist or does the database user have sufficient privileges to create the database?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database name?</li><li>Have you entered the correct username and password?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database hostname and port number?</li></ul>','','none'),(8302,'Failed to connect to your database server. The server reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Is the database server running?</li><li>Does the database exist, and have you entered the correct database name?</li><li>Have you entered the correct username and password?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database hostname and port number?</li></ul>','','none'),(8303,'Failed to open or create database file %database. The database engine reports the following message when attempting to create the database: %error.','','none'),(8304,'Failed to connect to database. The database engine reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Does the database file exist?</li><li>Does web server have permission to write to the database file?</li>Does the web server have permission to write to the directory the database file should be created in?</li></ul>','','none'),(8305,'The number of suggestions that will be listed. Use <em>0</em> to remove the limit.','','none'),(8306,'Autocomplete suggestion list size: @size','','10.4.4'),(8307,'Bosnia & Herzegovina','','10.4.4'),(8308,'St. Barthélemy','','10.4.4'),(8309,'Ceuta & Melilla','','10.4.4'),(8310,'South Georgia & South Sandwich Islands','','10.4.4'),(8311,'Heard & McDonald Islands','','10.4.4'),(8312,'St. Kitts & Nevis','','10.4.4'),(8313,'St. Martin','','10.4.4'),(8314,'North Macedonia','','10.4.4'),(8315,'Macao SAR China','','10.4.4'),(8316,'St. Pierre & Miquelon','','10.4.4'),(8317,'Svalbard & Jan Mayen','','10.4.4'),(8318,'São Tomé & Príncipe','','10.4.4'),(8319,'Eswatini','','10.4.4'),(8320,'Turks & Caicos Islands','','10.4.4'),(8321,'Trinidad & Tobago','','10.4.4'),(8322,'St. Vincent & Grenadines','','10.4.4'),(8323,'Wallis & Futuna','','10.4.4'),(8324,'The path that this alias belongs to.','','none'),(8325,'The source path has to start with a slash.','','none'),(8326,'An alias used with this path.','','none'),(8327,'The alias path has to start with a slash.','','none'),(8328,'Unique path alias.','Validation','none'),(8329,'Valid path.','Validation','none'),(8330,'Either the path \'%link_path\' is invalid or you do not have access to it.','','none'),(8331,'The @label workspace can not be published because it contains 1 item in an unpublished moderation state.The @label workspace can not be published because it contains @count items in an unpublished moderation state.','','none'),(8332,'Moderation state sort','','none'),(8333,'Moderation state field','','none'),(8334,'Full string ID','','none'),(8335,'A boolean indicating whether this translation needs to be updated','','none'),(8336,'JSON:API allowed operations','','none'),(8337,'All (create, read, update, delete)','','none'),(8338,'It is recommended to <a href=\":configure-url\">configure</a> JSON:API to only accept all operations if the site requires it. <a href=\":docs\">Learn more about securing your site with JSON:API.</a>','','none'),(8339,'i18n language','','none'),(8340,'i18n mode','','none'),(8341,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">at end of layout</span>','','none'),(8342,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">at start of layout</span>','','none'),(8343,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">between @first and @second</span>','','none'),(8344,'Add block <span class=\"visually-hidden\">in @section, @region region</span>','','none'),(8345,'@region region in @section','','none'),(8346,'Remove @section','','none'),(8347,'<span class=\"layout-builder__section-label\" aria-hidden=\"true\">@section</span>','','none'),(8348,'Configure @section','','none'),(8349,'@section, Region: @region','','none'),(8350,'Block label','','none'),(8351,'Are you sure you want to remove @section?','','none'),(8352,'The %media-embed-filter-label filter requires <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> among the allowed HTML tags.','','none'),(8353,'The <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> tag in the allowed HTML tags is missing the following attributes: <code>%list</code>.','','none'),(8354,'The %media-embed-filter-label filter needs to be placed after the %filter filter.The %media-embed-filter-label filter needs to be placed after the following filters: %filters.','','none'),(8355,'If you would like to change this, <a href=\":display\">add an image style to the %field_name field</a>.','','10.4.5'),(8356,'The default display for the %type media type is not currently using an image style on the %field_name field. Not using an image style can lead to much larger file downloads. @action_item','','10.4.5'),(8357,'The view mode that is used by default','','none'),(8358,'Media types selectable in the Media Library','','10.4.4'),(8359,'View modes selectable in the \"Edit media\" dialog','','none'),(8360,'Filters out unpublished media if the current user cannot view it.','','none'),(8361,'There is nothing to configure for this media.','','none'),(8362,'@warning <a href=\"@edit_url\">Edit the text format %format</a> to modify the attributes that can be overridden.','','none'),(8363,'The view mode that an embedded media item should be displayed in by default. This can be overridden using the <code>data-view-mode</code> attribute.','','10.4.4'),(8364,'If none are selected, all will be allowed.','','10.4.4'),(8365,'View modes selectable in the \'Edit media\' dialog','','10.4.4'),(8366,'If two or more view modes are selected, users will be able to update the view mode that an embedded media item should be displayed in after it has been embedded.  If less than two view modes are selected, media will be embedded using the default view mode and no view mode options will appear after a media item has been embedded.','','10.4.4'),(8367,'The referenced media source is missing and needs to be re-embedded.','','none'),(8368,'\n      <p>You can embed media items:</p>\n      <ul>\n        <li>Choose which media item to embed: <code>&lt;drupal-media data-entity-uuid=\"07bf3a2e-1941-4a44-9b02-2d1d7a41ec0e\" /&gt;</code></li>\n        <li>Optionally also choose a view mode: <code>data-view-mode=\"tiny_embed\"</code>, otherwise the default view mode is used.</li>\n        <li>The <code>data-entity-type=\"media\"</code> attribute is required for consistency.</li>\n      </ul>','','none'),(8369,'You can embed media items (using the <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> tag).','','none'),(8370,'During rendering of embedded media: recursive rendering detected for %entity_id. Aborting rendering.','','none'),(8371,'During rendering of embedded media: the media item with UUID \"@uuid\" does not exist.','','none'),(8372,'During rendering of embedded media: the view mode \"@view-mode-id\" does not exist.','','none'),(8373,'Embeds media items using a custom tag, <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code>. If used in conjunction with the \'Align/Caption\' filters, make sure this filter is configured to run after them.','','10.4.4'),(8374,'The Media Library module provides a rich, visual interface for managing media, and allows media to be reused in entity reference fields or embedded into text content. It overrides the <a href=\":media-collection\">media administration page</a>, allowing users to toggle between the existing table-style interface and a new grid-style interface for browsing and performing administrative operations on media.','','none'),(8375,'To learn more about media management, begin by reviewing the <a href=\":media-help\">documentation for the Media module</a>. For more information about the media library and related functionality, see the <a href=\":media-library-handbook\">online documentation for the Media Library module</a>.','','none'),(8376,'Selection dialog','','none'),(8377,'When selecting media for an entity reference field or a text editor, Media Library opens a modal dialog to help users easily find and select media. The modal dialog can toggle between a grid-style and table-style interface, and new media items can be uploaded directly into it.','','none'),(8378,'Within the dialog, media items are divided up by type. If more than one media type can be selected by the user, the available types will be displayed as a set of vertical tabs. To users who have appropriate permissions, each media type may also present a short form allowing you to upload or create new media items of that type.','','none'),(8379,'Grid-style vs. table-style interface','','none'),(8380,'The Media Library module provides a new grid-style interface for the media administration page that displays media as thumbnails, with minimal textual information, allowing users to visually browse media in their site. The existing table-style interface is better suited to displaying additional information about media items, in addition to being more accessible to users with assistive technology.','','none'),(8381,'Reusing media in entity reference fields','','none'),(8382,'Any entity reference field that references media can use the media library. To enable, configure the form display for the field to use the \"Media library\" widget.','','none'),(8383,'Embedding media in text content','','none'),(8384,'To use the media library within CKEditor, you must add the \"Insert from Media Library\" button to the CKEditor toolbar, and enable the \"Embed media\" filter in the text format associated with the text editor.','','none'),(8385,'Both the table-style and grid-style interfaces are regular views and can be customized via the Views UI, including sorting and filtering. This is the case for both the administration page and the modal dialog.','','none'),(8386,'Media Library settings','','10.4.5'),(8387,'Manage Media Library settings.','','10.4.5'),(8388,'Media library settings','','none'),(8389,'Enable advanced UI','','none'),(8390,'The new site is missing modules corresponding to the old site\'s modules. Unless they are installed prior to the upgrade, configuration and/or content needed by them will not be available on your new site. <a href=\':review\'>Read the checklist</a> to help decide what to do.','','none'),(8391,'A path alias set for a specific language will always be used when displaying this page in that language, and takes precedence over path aliases set as <em>- Not specified -</em>.','','none'),(8392,'No path aliases available. <a href=\":link\">Add URL alias</a>.','','none'),(8393,'The search page that the form submits to, or Default for the default search page.','','none'),(8394,'Experimental themes enabled','','none'),(8395,'Experimental themes found: %theme_list. Experimental themes are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(8396,'Configuration sync directory','','10.4.5'),(8397,'Your %file file must define the %setting setting as a string containing the directory in which configuration files can be found.','','none'),(8398,'experimental theme','','none'),(8399,'A local file system path where temporary files will be stored. This directory should not be accessible over the web. This must be changed in settings.php.','','10.4.5'),(8400,'Are you sure you wish to install an experimental theme?','','none'),(8401,'The following themes are experimental: @themes','','none'),(8402,'You must enable the @required theme to install @theme.You must enable the @required themes to install @theme.','','none'),(8403,'Internationalization mode.','','none'),(8404,'Language from the taxonomy_vocabulary table.','','none'),(8405,'Translation of either the name or the description.','','none'),(8406,'Language code from locales_target table','','none'),(8407,'Require summary','','none'),(8408,'Always show summary','','none'),(8409,'The summary will also be visible when marked as required.','','none'),(8410,'The summary field is required for @name','','none'),(8411,'Always show the summary field','','none'),(8412,'Summary field will always be visible','','none'),(8413,'Too many password recovery requests from your IP address. It is temporarily blocked. Try again later or contact the site administrator.','','none'),(8414,'Limit the available operators','','10.4.5'),(8415,'List of available operators','','none'),(8416,'Limit the available operators to be shown on the exposed filter.','','10.4.5'),(8417,'Restrict operators to','','10.4.5'),(8418,'Selecting none will make all of them available.','','10.4.5'),(8419,'You selected the \"@operator\" operator as the default value but is not included in the list of limited operators.','','none'),(8420,'Provides an interface to create workflows with transitions between different states (for example publication or user status) provided by other modules.','','10.4.5'),(8421,'Indicates the workspace that this revision belongs to.','','none'),(8422,'Switch to Live','','none'),(8423,'Would you like to switch to the live version of the site?','','none'),(8424,'Switch to the live version of the site.','','none'),(8425,'You are now viewing the live version of the site.','','none'),(8426,'Nightwatch Testing','','none'),(8427,'Minimal profile for running Nightwatch tests. Includes absolutely required modules only.','','none'),(8428,'Media Library thumbnail (220×220)','','10.2.3'),(8429,'Delete {{ name }}','','10.2.3'),(8430,'An uploaded file or document, such as a PDF.','','10.2.3'),(8431,'Viewing help topics','','none'),(8432,'The top-level help topics are listed on the main <a href=\":help_page\">Help page</a>. Links to other topics, including non-top-level help topics, can be found under the \"Related\" heading when viewing a topic page.','','none'),(8433,'Providing help topics','','none'),(8434,'Translating help topics','','none'),(8435,'The title and body text of help topics provided by contributed modules and themes are translatable using the <a href=\":locale_help\">Interface Translation module</a>. Topics provided by custom modules and themes are also translatable if they have been viewed at least once in a non-English language, which triggers putting their translatable text into the translation database.','','none'),(8436,'Configuring help search','','none'),(8437,'See the <a href=\":help_page\">Help page</a> for more topics.','','none'),(8438,'Help Topics','','none'),(8439,'Displays help topics provided by themes and modules.','','10.4.5'),(8440,'Help search','','none'),(8441,'Configure the settings of a block that was previously placed in a region of a theme.','','10.4.5'),(8442,'Click the name of the theme that contains the block.','','10.4.5'),(8443,'Optionally, click <em>Demonstrate block regions</em> to see the regions of the theme.','','10.4.5'),(8444,'If you only want to change the region where a block is located, or the ordering of blocks within a region, drag blocks to their desired positions and click <em>Save blocks</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8445,'If you want to change additional settings, find the region where the block you want to update is currently located, and click <em>Configure</em> in the line of the block description.','','10.4.5'),(8446,'Edit the block\'s settings. The available settings vary depending on the module that provides the block, but for all blocks you can change:','','10.4.5'),(8447,'<em>Block title</em>: The heading for the block on your site -- for some blocks, you will need to check the <em>Override title</em> checkbox in order to enter a title','','10.4.5'),(8448,'<em>Display title</em>: Check the box if you want the title displayed','','10.4.5'),(8449,'<em>Visibility</em>: Add conditions for when the block should be displayed','','10.4.5'),(8450,'<em>Region</em>: Change the theme region the block is displayed in','','10.4.5'),(8451,'Click <em>Save block</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8452,'What are blocks?','','10.4.5'),(8453,'Blocks are boxes of content rendered into an area, or region, of a web page of your site. Blocks are placed and configured specifically for each theme.','','10.4.5'),(8454,'What is the block description?','','10.4.5'),(8455,'The block description is an identification name for a block, which is shown in the administrative interface. It is not displayed on the site.','','10.4.5'),(8456,'What is the block title?','','10.4.5'),(8457,'The block title is the heading that is optionally shown to site visitors when the block is placed in a region.','','10.4.5'),(8458,'Place a block into a theme\'s region.','','10.4.5'),(8459,'Click the name of the theme that you want to place the block in.','','10.4.5'),(8460,'Find the region where you want the block, and click <em>Place block</em> in that region. A modal dialog will pop up.','','10.4.5'),(8461,'Find the block you want to place and click <em>Place block</em>. A <em>Configure block</em> modal dialog will pop up.','','10.4.5'),(8462,'Enter a description of your block (to be shown to administrators) and the body text for your block.','','10.4.5'),(8463,'Enter a label for this block type (shown in the administrative interface). Optionally, edit the automatically-generated machine name or the description.','','10.4.5'),(8464,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Block types</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(8465,'Click <em>Manage fields</em> in the row of your new block type, and add the desired fields to your block type.','','10.4.5'),(8466,'Optionally, click <em>Manage form display</em> or <em>Manage display</em> to change the editing form or field display for your block type.','','10.4.5'),(8467,'Use contextual links to access administrative tasks without navigating the administrative menu.','','10.4.5'),(8468,'What are contextual links?','','10.4.5'),(8469,'<em>Contextual links</em> give users with the <em>Use contextual links</em> permission quick access to administrative tasks related to areas of non-administrative pages. For example, if a page on your site displays a block, the block would have a contextual link that would allow users with permission to configure the block. If the block contains a menu or a view, it would also have a contextual link for editing the menu links or the view. Clicking a contextual link takes you to the related administrative page directly, without needing to navigate through the administrative menu system.','','10.4.5'),(8470,'Make sure that the core Contextual Links module is installed, and that you have a role with the <em>Use contextual links</em> permission. Optionally, make sure that a toolbar module is installed (either the core Toolbar module or a contributed module replacement).','','10.4.5'),(8471,'Visit a non-administrative page on your site, such as the home page.','','10.4.5'),(8472,'Locate a block or another area on the page that you want to edit or configure.','','10.4.5'),(8473,'Make the contextual links button visible by hovering your mouse over that area in the page. In most themes, this button looks like a pencil and is placed in the upper right corner of the page area (upper left for right-to-left languages), and hovering will also temporarily outline the affected area. Alternatively, click the contextual links toggle button on the right end of the toolbar (left end for right-to-left languages), which will make all contextual link buttons on the page visible until it is clicked again.','','10.4.5'),(8474,'While the contextual links button for the area of interest is visible, click the button to display the list of links for that area. Click a link in the list to visit the corresponding administrative page.','','10.4.5'),(8475,'Complete your administrative task and save your settings, or cancel the action. You should be returned to the page you started from.','','10.4.5'),(8476,'What are security updates?','','10.4.5'),(8477,'Any software occasionally has bugs, and sometimes these bugs have security implications. When security bugs are fixed in the core software, modules, or themes that your site uses, they are released in a <em>security update</em>. You will need to apply security updates in order to keep your site secure.','','10.4.5'),(8478,'Security tasks','','10.4.5'),(8479,'Keeping track of updates, updating the core software, and updating contributed modules and/or themes are all part of keeping your site secure. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8480,'Overview of accessibility','','10.4.5'),(8481,'The default drag-and-drop user interface for ordering tables in the administrative interface presents a challenge for some users, including keyboard-only users and users of screen readers and other assistive technology. The drag-and-drop interface can be disabled in a table by clicking a link labeled <em>Show row weights</em> above the table. The replacement interface allows users to order the table by choosing numerical weights (with increasing numbers) instead of dragging table rows.','','10.4.5'),(8482,'Administrative interface overview','','10.4.5'),(8483,'A menu system, which you can navigate to find pages for administrative tasks. The core Toolbar module displays this menu on the top or left side of the page (right side in right-to-left languages). There are also contributed module replacements for the core Toolbar module, with additional features, such as the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/admin_toolbar\">Admin Toolbar module</a>.','','10.4.5'),(8484,'The core Shortcuts module enhances the toolbar with a configurable list of links to commonly-used tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8485,'If you install the core Contextual Links module, non-administrative pages will contain links leading to related administrative tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8486,'The core Help module displays help topics, and provides a Help block that can be placed on administrative pages to provide an overview of their functionality.','','10.4.5'),(8487,'See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8488,'Set up your site so that users can search for help.','','10.4.5'),(8489,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Search and metadata</em> &gt; <em>Search pages</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8490,'Verify that a Help search page is listed in the <em>Search pages</em> section. If not, add a new page of type <em>Help</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8491,'Create, view, and use a set of shortcuts to access administrative pages.','','10.4.5'),(8492,'What are shortcuts?','','10.4.5'),(8493,'<em>Shortcuts</em> are quick links to administrative pages; they are managed by the core Shortcut module. A site can have one or more <em>shortcut sets</em>, which can be shared by one or more users (by default, there is only one set shared by all users); each set contains a limited number of shortcuts. Users need <em>Use shortcuts</em> permission to view shortcuts; <em>Edit current shortcut set</em> permission to add, delete, or edit the shortcuts in the set assigned to them; and <em>Select any shortcut set</em> permission to select a different shortcut set when editing their user profile. There is also an <em>Administer shortcuts</em> permission, which allows an administrator to do any of these actions, as well as select shortcut sets for other users.','','10.4.5'),(8494,'Navigate to an administrative page that you want in your shortcut list.','','10.4.5'),(8495,'Repeat until all the desired links have been added to your shortcut set.','','10.4.5'),(8496,'Click <em>Shortcuts</em> in the toolbar to display your shortcuts, and verify that the list is complete.','','10.4.5'),(8497,'Optionally, click <em>Edit shortcuts</em> at the right end of the shortcut list (left end in right-to-left languages), to remove links or change their order.','','10.4.5'),(8498,'Click any link in the shortcut bar to go directly to the administrative page.','','10.4.5'),(8499,'Configure the basic settings of your site, including the site name, slogan, main email address, default time zone, default country, and the date formats to use.','','10.4.5'),(8500,'Enter the site name, slogan, and main email address for your site.','','10.4.5'),(8501,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>. You should see a message indicating that the settings were saved.','','10.4.5'),(8502,'Select the default country and default time zone for your site.','','10.4.5'),(8503,'Look at the <em>Patterns</em> for the Default long, medium, and short date formats. If any of them does not match the date format you want to use on your site, click <em>Edit</em> in that row to edit the format.','','10.4.5'),(8504,'Adjust the <em>Format string</em> until the <em>Displayed</em> format matches what you want. (Date format strings are composed of PHP date format codes.)','','10.4.5'),(8505,'Click <em>Save format</em>. You should see a message indicating that the format was saved.','','10.4.5'),(8506,'Repeat the previous three steps for any other date formats that need to be changed.','','10.4.5'),(8507,'Set up your site to respond appropriately to site errors, including 403 and 404 page responses.','','10.4.5'),(8508,'What are 403 and 404 responses?','','10.4.5'),(8509,'When a user visits a web page, the web server sends a response code in addition to the page content. A normal, non-error response has code 200. If the page does not exist on the site, the response code is 404. If the page exists, but the user is not authorized to visit the page, the response code is 403. The core software provides default responses for both 403 and 404 codes, but if you prefer, you can create your own pages for each.','','10.4.5'),(8510,'What other errors can occur?','','10.4.5'),(8511,'Under some situations, your site can generate error messages. These can be due to user errors (such as entering invalid values in a form, or incorrect configuration), PHP runtime errors, or software bugs. Some errors may result in a <em>white screen of death</em> (a totally blank web page response); less drastic errors will generate error messages. You can configure what happens when an error message is generated.','','10.4.5'),(8512,'If desired, create pages to use for 403 and 404 responses. Note the URLs for these pages.','','10.4.5'),(8513,'For a production site, select <em>None</em> under <em>Error messages to display</em>. For a site that is in development, select one of the other options, so that you are more aware of the errors the site is generating.','','10.4.5'),(8514,'Take a tour of an administrative page.','','none'),(8515,'What are tours?','','none'),(8516,'The core Tour module provides users with <em>tours</em>, which are guided tours of the administrative interface. Each tour starts on a particular administrative page, and consists of one or more <em>tips</em> that highlight elements of the page, guide you through a workflow, or explain key concepts. Users need <em>Access tour</em> permission to view tours, and JavaScript must be enabled in their browsers.','','none'),(8517,'Make sure that the core Tour module is installed, and that you have a role with the <em>Access tour</em> permission. Also, make sure that a toolbar module is installed (either the core Toolbar module or a contributed module replacement).','','none'),(8518,'Visit an administrative page that has a tour, such as the edit view page provided by the core Views UI module.','','none'),(8519,'Click the <em>Tour</em> button at the right end of the toolbar (left end for right-to-left languages). The first tip of the tour should appear.','','none'),(8520,'Click the <em>Next</em> button to advance to the next tip, and <em>End tour</em> at the end to close the tour.','','none'),(8521,'Configure settings related to how user accounts are created and deleted.','','10.4.5'),(8522,'What are the settings related to user account creation and deletion?','','10.4.5'),(8523,'You can make it possible for new users to register themselves for accounts, with or without email verification or administrative approval. Or, you can make it so only administrators with <em>Administer users</em> permission can register new users.','','10.4.5'),(8524,'You can configure what happens to content that a user created, if their account is <em>canceled</em> (deleted).','','10.4.5'),(8525,'You can edit the email messages that are sent to users when their accounts are pending, approved, created, blocked, or canceled, or when they request a password reset.','','10.4.5'),(8526,'What are variables in email message text?','','10.4.5'),(8527,'<em>Variables</em> are short text strings, enclosed in square brackets [], that you can insert into configured email message text. When an individual message is generated, data from your site is substituted for the variables. Some commonly-used variables are:','','10.4.5'),(8528,'[site:login-url]: The URL where users can log in to your site.','','10.4.5'),(8529,'[user:display-name]: The user\'s displayed name.','','10.4.5'),(8530,'[user:mail]: The user\'s email alias.','','10.4.5'),(8531,'[user:one-time-login-url]: An expiring URL that a user can use to log in once, if they need to reset their password.','','10.4.5'),(8532,'Select the method you want to use for creating user accounts, and check or uncheck the box that requires email verification, to match the settings you want for your site.','','10.4.5'),(8533,'Select the desired option for what happens to content that a user created if their account is canceled.','','10.4.5'),(8534,'Optionally, edit the text of email messages related to user accounts.','','10.4.5'),(8535,'Verify that the other settings are correct.','','10.4.5'),(8536,'Topics can be provided by modules or themes. Top-level help topics on your site:','','none'),(8537,'Both the table-style and grid-style interfaces are regular views and can be customized via the <a href=\":views-ui\">Views UI</a>, including sorting and filtering. This is the case for both the administration page and the modal dialog.','','none'),(8538,'In the grid-style interface, the fields that are displayed (including which image style is used for images) can be customized by configuring the \"Media library\" view mode for each of your <a href=\":media-types\">media types</a>. The thumbnail images in the grid-style interface can be customized by configuring the \"Media Library thumbnail (220×220)\" image style.','','none'),(8539,'When adding new media items within the modal dialog, the fields that are displayed can be customized by configuring the \"Media library\" form mode for each of your <a href=\":media-types\">media types</a>.','','none'),(8540,'Provides the API allowing to rename URLs.','','none'),(8541,'The parent workspace.','','none'),(8542,'Merge workspace','','none'),(8543,'Only top-level workspaces can be published.','','none'),(8544,'Merge into @target_label','','none'),(8545,'The %label workspace can not be deleted because it has child workspaces.','','none'),(8546,'There are no changes that can be merged from %source_label to %target_label.','','none'),(8547,'Would you like to merge the contents of the %source_label workspace into %target_label?','','none'),(8548,'Merge workspace contents.','','none'),(8549,'The contents of the %source_label workspace have been merged into %target_label.','','none'),(8550,'There is @count item that can be merged from %source_label to %target_labelThere are @count items that can be merged from %source_label to %target_label','','none'),(8551,'Workspace selection','','none'),(8552,'Medium 8:7','','none'),(8553,'Responsive 3x2','','none'),(8554,'The field that is going to be used as the RSS item link for each row. This must either be an internal unprocessed path like \"node/123\" or a processed, root-relative URL as produced by fields like \"Link to content\".','','none'),(8555,'Recursive rendering detected when rendering entity %entity_type: %entity_id, using the %field_name field on the %parent_entity_type:%parent_bundle %parent_entity_id entity. Aborting rendering.','','none'),(8556,'Response status','','10.4.5'),(8557,'Heading type','','none'),(8558,'@interval hence','','10.2.3'),(8559,'The @drupal installer requires that the %default-file file must not be deleted or modified from the original download.','','none'),(8560,'Enter the date using the format @placeholder_date (e.g., @date_format).','','10.2.3'),(8561,'Enter the time using the format @placeholder_time (e.g., @time_format).','','10.2.3'),(8562,'Temporary file could not be created for file upload.','','none'),(8563,'Field discovery failed for Drupal core version @core. Did this site have the Field module installed? Error: @message','','none'),(8564,'Drupal 9 no longer uses the $settings[\'install_profile\'] value in settings.php and it should be removed.','','none'),(8565,'@low_version_number to @high_version_number','','10.4.5'),(8566,'Drupal core security coverage','','10.4.5'),(8567,'Update to a supported minor version soon to continue receiving security updates.','','none'),(8568,'Visit the <a href=\":url\">release cycle overview</a> for more information on supported releases.','','10.4.5'),(8569,'Manage workspace','','none'),(8570,'Other workspaces:','','none'),(8571,'View all workspaces','','none'),(8572,'Not compatible','','none'),(8573,'Requires Drupal core:','','10.4.5'),(8574,'Covered until @end_version','','10.4.5'),(8575,'Coverage has ended','','10.2.3'),(8576,'<a href=\":update_status_report\">Update to @next_minor or higher</a> soon to continue receiving security updates.','','none'),(8577,'Covered until @date','','none'),(8578,'<a href=\":update_status_report\">Update to a supported minor</a> as soon as possible to continue receiving security updates.','','10.2.3'),(8579,'Allows configuration of tasks to be executed in response to events.','','10.4.5'),(8580,'Manages breakpoints and breakpoint groups for responsive designs.','','10.4.5'),(8581,'Allows users to comment on content.','','10.4.5'),(8582,'Allows users to translate configuration text.','','10.4.5'),(8583,'Provides site-wide contact forms and forms to contact individual users.','','10.4.5'),(8584,'Allows users to translate content.','','10.4.5'),(8585,'Provides contextual links to directly access tasks related to page elements.','','10.4.5'),(8586,'Logs system events in the database.','','10.4.5'),(8587,'Caches pages, including those with dynamic content, for all users.','','10.4.5'),(8588,'Provides a user interface for the Field module.','','10.4.5'),(8589,'Defines a field type for image media and provides display configuration tools.','','10.4.5'),(8590,'Allows users to configure available languages.','','10.4.5'),(8591,'Allows users to create menu links.','','10.4.5'),(8592,'Users with sufficient access rights will be able to override these options.','','10.4.5'),(8593,'Caches pages for anonymous users and can be used when external page cache is not available.','','10.4.5'),(8594,'Allows users to create search pages based on plugins provided by other modules.','','10.4.5'),(8595,'PHP APCu caching','','10.4.5'),(8596,'Enabled (@size)','','none'),(8597,'Depending on your configuration, Drupal can run with a @apcu_size APCu limit. However, a @apcu_default_size APCu limit (the default) or above is recommended, especially if your site uses additional custom or contributed modules.','','none'),(8598,'Memory available: @available.','','none'),(8599,'PHP APCu caching can improve your site\'s performance considerably. It is <strong>highly recommended</strong> to have <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/apcu.installation.php\" target=\"_blank\">APCu</a> installed on your server.','','10.4.5'),(8600,'The version of Drupal you are trying to update from is too old','','none'),(8601,'The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update to an intermediate version first (last removed version: @last_removed_version, installed version: @installed_version).','','none'),(8602,'Displays guided tours of the site interface.','','10.4.5'),(8603,'Provides a user interface for creating and managing views.','','10.4.5'),(8604,'<p class=\"text-align-center\">Explore recipes across every type of occasion, ingredient, and skill level.</p>','','none'),(8605,'<p class=\"text-align-center\">Explore recipes across every type of occasion, ingredient, and skill level</p>','','none'),(8606,'MariaDB','','none'),(8607,'MySQL, Percona Server, or equivalent','','10.4.5'),(8608,'Required by the theme: @theme_namesRequired by the themes: @theme_names','','none'),(8609,'@theme','','none'),(8610,'@theme (theme) (<span class=\"admin-disabled\">disabled</span>)','','none'),(8611,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly.','','none'),(8612,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly. They must first be enabled by a user with permissions to do so.','','none'),(8613,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly. They must first be enabled via the <a href=\":modules_url\">Extend page</a>.','','none'),(8614,'Review the <a href=\":url\"> suggestions for resolving this incompatibility</a> to repair your installation, and then re-run update.php.','','none'),(8615,'Missing updates for: @module','','none'),(8616,'The following module is installed, but it is incompatible with Drupal @version:The following modules are installed, but they are incompatible with Drupal @version:','','none'),(8617,'Incompatible moduleIncompatible modules','','none'),(8618,'The following theme is installed, but it is incompatible with Drupal @version:The following themes are installed, but they are incompatible with Drupal @version:','','none'),(8619,'Incompatible themeIncompatible themes','','none'),(8620,'The following module is installed, but it is incompatible with PHP @version:The following modules are installed, but they are incompatible with PHP @version:','','none'),(8621,'The following theme is installed, but it is incompatible with PHP @version:The following themes are installed, but they are incompatible with PHP @version:','','none'),(8622,'The following module is marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but it is missing:The following modules are marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but they are missing:','','none'),(8623,'Missing or invalid moduleMissing or invalid modules','','none'),(8624,'The following theme is marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but it is missing:The following themes are marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but they are missing:','','none'),(8625,'Missing or invalid themeMissing or invalid themes','','none'),(8626,'The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update to a version prior to @versions first (missing updates: @missing_updates).The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update first to a version prior to all of the following: @versions (missing updates: @missing_updates).','','none'),(8627,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">missing</span>)','','10.4.5'),(8628,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> this version of Drupal core)','','none'),(8629,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> version @version)','','none'),(8630,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-disabled\">disabled</span>)','','none'),(8631,'Unable to install @theme due to missing module dependencies.','','none'),(8632,'Empty version','','none'),(8633,'Invalid version: @existing_version','','none'),(8634,'Testing config dependencies and optional configuration','','none'),(8635,'Stable 9','','none'),(8636,'A base theme using Drupal 9.0.0\'s core markup and CSS.','','none'),(8637,'Ban visitors from one or more IP addresses from accessing and viewing your site.','','none'),(8638,'Enter an <em>IP address</em> and click <em>Add</em>.','','none'),(8639,'You should see the IP address you entered listed under <em>Banned IP addresses</em>. Repeat the above steps to ban additional IP addresses.','','none'),(8640,'What types of data does a site have?','','10.4.5'),(8641,'What is a content entity?','','10.4.5'),(8642,'What is a field?','','10.4.5'),(8643,'Within entity items, the data is stored in individual <em>fields</em>, each of which holds one type of data, such as formatted or plain text, images or other files, or dates. Fields can be added by an administrator on entity sub-types, so that all entity items of a given entity sub-type have the same collection of fields available, and they can be single-valued or multiple-valued. When you create or edit entity items, you are specifying the values for the fields on the entity item.','','10.4.5'),(8644,'What is a reference field?','','10.4.5'),(8645,'A <em>reference field</em> is a field that stores a relationship between an entity and one or more other entities, which may belong to the same or different entity type. For example, a <em>Content reference</em> field on a content type stores a relationship between one content item and one or more other content items.','','10.4.5'),(8646,'What field types are available?','','10.4.5'),(8647,'The following field types are provided by the core system and core modules (many more are provided by contributed modules):','','10.4.5'),(8648,'Boolean, Number (provided by the core system): Stores true/false values and numbers','','10.4.5'),(8649,'Comment (provided by the core Comment module): Allows users to add comments to an entity','','10.4.5'),(8650,'Date, Timestamp (Datetime module): Stores dates and times','','10.4.5'),(8651,'Email (core system): Stores email addresses','','10.4.5'),(8652,'Link (Link module): Stores URLs and link text','','10.4.5'),(8653,'Telephone (Telephone module): Stores telephone numbers','','10.4.5'),(8654,'What is a formatter?','','10.4.5'),(8655,'A <em>formatter</em> is a way to display a field; most field types offer several types of formatters, and most formatters have settings that further define how the field is displayed. It is also possible to completely hide a field from display, and you have the option of showing or hiding the field\'s label when it is displayed.','','10.4.5'),(8656,'What is a widget?','','10.4.5'),(8657,'A <em>widget</em> is a way to edit a field. Some field types, such as plain text single-line fields, have only one widget available (in this case, a single-line text input field). Other field types offer choices for the widget; for example, single-valued <em>List</em> fields can use a <em>Select</em> or <em>Radio button</em> widget for editing. Many widget types have settings that further define how the field can be edited.','','10.4.5'),(8658,'Managing content structure overview','','10.4.5'),(8659,'Besides the field modules listed in the previous section, there are additional core modules that you can use to manage your content structure:','','10.4.5'),(8660,'Configure your system so that cron will run automatically.','','10.4.5'),(8661,'What are cron tasks?','','10.4.5'),(8662,'To ensure that your site and its modules continue to function well, a group of administrative operations should be run periodically. These operations are called <em>cron</em> tasks, and running the tasks is known as <em>running cron</em>. Depending on how often content is updated on your site, you might need to run cron on a schedule ranging from hourly to weekly to keep your site running well.','','10.4.5'),(8663,'What options are available for running cron?','','10.4.5'),(8664,'If the core Automated Cron module is installed, your site will run cron periodically, on a schedule you can configure.','','10.4.5'),(8665,'You can set up a task on your web server to visit the <em> cron URL</em>, which is unique to your site, on a schedule.','','10.4.5'),(8666,'You can also run cron manually, but this is not the recommended way to make sure it is run periodically.','','10.4.5'),(8667,'If you want to run cron right now, click <em>Run cron</em> and wait for cron to finish.','','10.4.5'),(8668,'If you have a way to configure tasks on your web server, copy the link where it says <em>To run cron from outside the site, go to</em>. Set up a task to visit that URL on your desired cron schedule, such as once an hour or once a week. (On Linux-like servers, you can use the <em>wget</em> command to visit a URL.) If you configure an outside task, you should uninstall the Automated Cron module.','','10.4.5'),(8669,'If you are not configuring an outside task, and you have the core Automated Cron module installed, select a schedule for automated cron runs in <em>Cron settings</em> &gt; <em>Run cron every</em>. Click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8670,'What is a module?','','10.4.5'),(8671,'A <em>module</em> is a set of PHP, JavaScript, and/or CSS files that extends site features and adds functionality. A set of <em>Core modules</em> is distributed as part of the core software download. Additional <em>Contributed modules</em> can be downloaded separately from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_module\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>.','','10.4.5'),(8672,'What is an Experimental module?','','10.4.5'),(8673,'An <em>Experimental</em> module is a module that is still in development and is not yet stable. Using Experimental modules on production sites is not recommended.','','10.4.5'),(8674,'What are installing and uninstalling?','','10.4.5'),(8675,'Installing a core or downloaded contributed module means turning it on, so that you can use its features and functionality. Uninstalling means turning it off and removing all of its configuration. A module cannot be uninstalled if another installed module depends on it, or if you have created content on your site using the module -- you would need to delete the content and uninstall dependent modules first.','','10.4.5'),(8676,'Extending overview','','10.4.5'),(8677,'See the related topics listed below for help performing tasks related to extending the functionality of your site.','','10.4.5'),(8678,'Maintaining and troubleshooting overview','','10.4.5'),(8679,'Here are some tasks and hints related to maintaining your site, and troubleshooting problems that may come up on your site. See the related topics below for more information.','','10.4.5'),(8680,'Configure your site so that cron runs periodically.','','10.4.5'),(8681,'If your site is not behaving as expected, clear the cache before trying to diagnose the problem.','','10.4.5'),(8682,'There are several site reports that can help you diagnose problems with your site. There are also two core modules that can be used for error logging: Database Logging and Syslog.','','10.4.5'),(8683,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to add the field to, and click <em>Manage fields</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8684,'Click <em>Add field</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8685,'The <em>Label</em> field should now be visible; enter a label for the field, which is used as the field label for both content editing and content display.','','10.4.5'),(8686,'Click <em>Save and continue</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8687,'On the next screen, enter a value for <em>Allowed number of values</em>. You can limit the field to one value per entity item, a set number of values, or set it to have unlimited values. Click <em>Save field settings</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8688,'On the next screen, optionally edit the settings for the field, which vary depending on what field type you are creating. For all fields, you can edit the <em>Label</em>, <em>Help text</em> (text to be displayed below the field on the content editing page), and <em>Required field</em> (to make it so a value must be entered in order to save the content when editing). You can also configure a default value for the field.','','10.4.5'),(8689,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to configure the display of, and click <em>Manage display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.4.5'),(8690,'Use the drag arrows to order the fields in your preferred order.','','10.4.5'),(8691,'Drag any fields that you do not wish to see in the display to the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','10.4.5'),(8692,'In the <em>Label</em> column, select the position for each field label in the display, or <em>- Hidden -</em> to hide a label. You can also choose <em>- Visually Hidden-</em> if you want the label\'s text to appear in the HTML page, so that screen readers and search engines can read it, but it will not be visible.','','10.4.5'),(8693,'In the <em>Format</em> column, select the formatter for displaying each field.','','10.4.5'),(8694,'After selecting the desired formatters, click the settings gear in each row to change the settings for the formatter.','','10.4.5'),(8695,'When you are done making changes, click <em>Save</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8696,'Test the display for your entity sub-type by viewing an entity. If needed, return to these steps to further refine the display.','','10.4.5'),(8697,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to configure the editing form for, and click <em>Manage form display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.4.5'),(8698,'Drag any fields that you do not wish to see on the editing form to the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','10.4.5'),(8699,'In the <em>Widget</em> column, select the widget for editing each field.','','10.4.5'),(8700,'After selecting the desired widgets, click the settings gear in each row to change the settings for the widget.','','10.4.5'),(8701,'Test the editing form for your entity sub-type by editing or creating an entity. If needed, return to these steps to further refine the form.','','10.4.5'),(8702,'In <em>Add a new field</em>, select the type of reference field you want to add. The <em>Reference</em> section of the select list shows the most common types of reference field; choose <em>Other...</em> if the entity type you want to reference is not listed.','','10.4.5'),(8703,'On the next screen, verify that the type of entity you want to reference is shown in <em>Type of item to reference</em>, or select it if not. Enter a value for <em>Allowed number of values</em>. You can limit the field to one value per entity item, a set number of values, or set it to have unlimited values. Click <em>Save field settings</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8704,'On the next screen, optionally edit the settings for <em>Label</em>, <em>Help text</em> (text to be displayed below the field on the content editing page), and <em>Required field</em> (to make it so a value must be entered in order to save the content when editing).','','10.4.5'),(8705,'In the <em>Reference type</em> section, you will usually want to limit the entity sub-types that can be referenced; for example, if you are creating a <em>Content</em> reference, you can check one or two <em>Content type</em> choices. The choices will be easier for content editors to scan if you also choose a sort value (normally the entity title or label field).','','10.4.5'),(8706,'Clear the data in the site cache.','','10.4.5'),(8707,'What is the cache?','','10.4.5'),(8708,'Some of the calculations that are done when your site loads a page take a long time to run. To save time when these calculations would need to be done again, their results can be <em>cached</em> in your site\'s database. There are internal mechanisms to <em>clear</em> cached data when the conditions or assumptions that went into the calculation have changed, but you can also clear cached data manually. When your site is misbehaving, a good first step is to clear the cache and see if the problem goes away.','','10.4.5'),(8709,'Click <em>Clear all caches</em>. Your site\'s cached data will be cleared.','','10.4.5'),(8710,'Put your site in maintenance mode to perform maintenance operations, and then return to normal mode when finished.','','10.4.5'),(8711,'What is maintenance mode?','','10.4.5'),(8712,'When your site is in maintenance mode, most site visitors will see a simple maintenance mode message page, rather than being able to use the full functionality of the site. Users with <em>Use the site in maintenance mode</em> permission who are already logged in will be able to use the full site, and the log in page at <em>/user</em> will also be accessible to anyone.','','10.4.5'),(8713,'Check <em>Put site into maintenance mode</em>, optionally change the <em>Message to display when in maintenance mode</em>, and click <em>Save configuration</em>. Your site will be in maintenance mode.','','10.4.5'),(8714,'Perform your maintenance operations.','','10.4.5'),(8715,'Uncheck <em>Put site into maintenance mode</em> and click <em>Save configuration</em>. Your site will be back in normal operation mode.','','10.4.5'),(8716,'Install a core module, or a contributed module that has already been downloaded.','','10.4.5'),(8717,'Enter a word from the module name or description into the filter box, to make the list of modules smaller. Locate the module you want to install.','','10.4.5'),(8718,'Check the box next to the name of the module you want to install; you can also check more than one box to install multiple modules at the same time. If the checkbox is disabled for the module you are trying to install, expand the information to see why -- you may need to download an additional module that your module requires.','','10.4.5'),(8719,'Click <em>Install</em> at the bottom of the page. If you chose to install a module with dependencies that were not already installed, or if you chose an Experimental module, confirm your choice on the next page.','','10.4.5'),(8720,'Wait for the module (or modules) to be installed. You should be returned to the <em>Extend</em> page with a message saying the module or modules were installed.','','10.4.5'),(8721,'Enter a word from the module name or description into the filter box, to make the list of modules smaller. Locate the module you want to uninstall.','','10.4.5'),(8722,'In the <em>Description</em> column, see if there are reasons that this module cannot be uninstalled. For example, you may have created content using this module (which you would need to delete first), or there may be another module installed that requires this module to be installed (you would need to uninstall the other module first).','','10.4.5'),(8723,'If there are no reasons listed, the module can be uninstalled. Check the box in the <em>Uninstall</em> column, next to the module\'s name.','','10.4.5'),(8724,'Click <em>Uninstall</em> at the bottom of the page. Verify the list of modules to be uninstalled and configuration to be deleted on the confirmation page, and click <em>Uninstall</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8725,'Wait for the module to be uninstalled. You should be returned to the <em>Uninstall</em> page with a message saying the module was uninstalled.','','10.4.5'),(8726,'Run reports to learn about the status and health of your site.','','10.4.5'),(8727,'If you have the core Database Logging module installed, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Reports</em> &gt; <em>Recent log messages</em> to see a report of the error and informational messages your site has generated. You can filter the report by <em>Severity</em> to see only the most critical messages, if desired.','','10.4.5'),(8728,'Click <em>Add user</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8729,'Enter the <em>Email address</em>, <em>Username</em>, and <em>Password</em> (twice) for the new user.','','10.4.5'),(8730,'Verify that the <em>Roles</em> checked for the new user are correct.','','10.4.5'),(8731,'If you want the new user to receive an email message notifying them of the new account, check <em>Notify user of new account</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8732,'Optionally, change other settings on the form.','','10.4.5'),(8733,'Click <em>Create new account</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8734,'You will be left on the <em>Add user</em> page; repeat these steps if you have more user accounts to create.','','10.4.5'),(8735,'Create a new role.','','10.4.5'),(8736,'Click <em>Add role</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8737,'Enter the desired <em>Role name</em>. If desired, click <em>Edit</em> to change the <em>Machine name</em> for the role.','','10.4.5'),(8738,'Click <em>Save</em>. You should be returned to the <em>Roles</em> page and your new role should be in the role list.','','10.4.5'),(8739,'What is a user?','','10.4.5'),(8740,'A user is anyone accessing or viewing your site. <em>Anonymous</em> users are users who are not logged in, and <em>Authenticated</em> users are users who are logged in.','','10.4.5'),(8741,'What is a role?','','10.4.5'),(8742,'<em>Roles</em> are used to group and classify users; each user can be assigned one or more roles. There are also special roles for all anonymous and all authenticated users.','','10.4.5'),(8743,'What is a permission?','','10.4.5'),(8744,'Granting a <em>permission</em> to a role allows users who have been assigned that role to perform an action on the site, such as viewing content, editing or creating  a particular type of content, administering settings for a particular module, or using a particular function of the site (such as search).','','10.4.5'),(8745,'Overview of managing user accounts and visitors','','10.4.5'),(8746,'The core User module allows users to register, log in, and log out, and administrators to manage user roles and permissions. The core Ban module allows administrators to ban certain IP addresses from accessing the site. Depending on which modules you have installed on your site, the related topics below will help you with tasks related to managing user accounts and visitors.','','10.4.5'),(8747,'Modify the permissions for an existing role.','','10.4.5'),(8748,'Review the permissions for the role, paying particular attention to the permissions marked with <em>Warning: Give to trusted roles only; this permission has security implications.</em> Uncheck permissions that this role should not have, in the row of the permission and the column of the role; check permissions that this role should have.','','10.4.5'),(8749,'Click <em>Save permissions</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8750,'Update or delete an existing user account.','','10.4.5'),(8751,'Enter all or part of the user name or email address of the user account you want to update or delete, and click <em>Filter</em>. A short list of user accounts, including the account of interest, should be shown in the table; if not, modify the filter text until you can find the account of interest.','','10.4.5'),(8752,'Click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> area of the account of interest.','','10.4.5'),(8753,'To delete the user account, scroll to the bottom and click <em>Cancel account</em>. Select what you want to happen to the user\'s content on the next screen, and click <em>Cancel account</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8754,'To update the user account, enter new values in the form and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8755,'Text alternative','','10.2.3'),(8756,'Programming languages','','10.4.4'),(8757,'Media has been removed.','','none'),(8758,'Olivero Utilities','','none'),(8759,'Enable mobile menu at all widths','','none'),(8760,'Header site branding background color','','none'),(8761,'Search by keyword or phrase.','','none'),(8762,'Nav Medium','','none'),(8763,'Grid Medium','','none'),(8764,'Grid Max','','none'),(8765,'Olivero','','none'),(8766,'olivero settings','','none'),(8767,'Schema information for module %module was missing from the database. You should manually review the module updates and your database to check if any updates have been skipped up to, and including, %last_update_hook.','','none'),(8768,'Add, remove, or rearrange the fields on personal and site-wide contact forms.','','10.4.5'),(8769,'What are the fields on contact forms?','','10.4.5'),(8770,'Click <em>Manage fields</em> for the form you want to change the fields of, and add or remove one or more fields on the form.','','10.4.5'),(8771,'Click <em>Manage form display</em> to change the order or configuration of the fields on the form.','','10.4.5'),(8772,'Configure personal contact forms for registered users on the website.','','10.4.5'),(8773,'In the <em>Contact settings</em> section, check/uncheck the box to enable/disable the contact form for new user accounts.','','10.4.5'),(8774,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8775,'Verify that permissions are correct for your site\'s roles, including the generic <em>Anonymous user</em> and <em>Authenticated user</em>. In order to use personal contact forms, users need both <em>View user information</em> (in the <em>User</em> section, which enables them to view user profiles) and <em>Use users\' personal contact forms</em> (in the <em>Contact</em> section, which enables them to use contact forms if they can view user profiles).','','10.4.5'),(8776,'Create a new site-wide contact form.','','10.4.5'),(8777,'Click <em>Add contact form</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8778,'Fill in the <em>Label</em> (title) for the form, <em>Recipients</em>, and optionally the other settings.','','10.4.5'),(8779,'Click <em>Save</em>. You should see your new contact form in the table, along with a link to view it.','','10.4.5'),(8780,'What are contact forms?','','10.4.5'),(8781,'There are two different types of contact forms provided by the core Contact module: personal contact forms, which allow users to contact other users on the site, and site-wide contact forms, which allow users to contact site managers or administrators. A site can have more than one site-wide contact form; each has its own fields to fill out, recipients, and URL; you can also change the fields that are shown on personal contact forms.','','10.4.5'),(8782,'Site visitors can email registered users on your site by using the personal contact form, without knowing or learning the email address of the recipient. When a user with the correct permissions is viewing another user\'s profile, the viewer will see a <em>Contact</em> tab or link, which leads to the personal contact form if the user whose profile is being viewed has their personal contact form enabled (this is a user account setting).','','10.4.5'),(8783,'Contact form management tasks','','10.4.5'),(8784,'See the related topics below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8785,'Click <em>Edit</em> for the site-wide form you want to be the default.','','10.4.5'),(8786,'Check <em>Make this the default form</em> and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8787,'Tracking overview','','10.4.5'),(8788,'The core History module tracks how recently users have viewed content items, and provides a Views field and filter that can be used to show users content that they haven\'t yet seen.','','10.4.5'),(8789,'If you have one or more tracking modules installed on your site, see the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(8790,'Click <em>Save settings</em>. You should be returned to the <em>Manage fields</em> page, with your new field in the list.','','10.4.5'),(8791,'What content visits are tracked?','','10.4.5'),(8792,'The core History module tracks when each logged-in user has most recently visited each content item page on the site. This allows content to be marked as <em>new</em> or <em>updated</em> for each user, meaning that it was newly created or has been updated since the last time they visited its page. These records are kept for one month, meaning that content older than one month is never marked as new or updated.','','10.4.5'),(8793,'What options are available for using this tracking information?','','10.4.5'),(8794,'You can display the new/updated status of content by creating or editing a view. There is a <em>Has new content</em> field for <em>Content</em> views, which displays the new/updated marker. There is also a <em>Has new content</em> filter, which limits the view to new and updated content.','','10.4.5'),(8795,'Configure and display tracking of how many times content has been viewed on your site, assuming that the core Statistics module is currently installed.','','none'),(8796,'What are the options for displaying popularity tracking?','','none'),(8797,'You can display a <em>content hits</em> counter of how many times a content item has been viewed, at the bottom of content item pages. You can also place a <em>Popular content</em> block in a region of your theme, which shows a list of the most popular and most recently-viewed content.','','none'),(8798,'Check <em>Count content views</em> and click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','none'),(8799,'In the <em>Statistics</em> section, check or uncheck the <em>View content hits</em> permission for each role. Click <em>Save permissions</em>.','','none'),(8800,'Optionally, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Block layout</em>. Place the <em>Popular content</em> block in a region in your theme (you will need to have the core Block module installed; see related topic for more details on block placement).','','none'),(8801,'Assuming that you have the core Activity Tracker module installed, these pages that show recently-updated content are available:','','none'),(8802,'The <em>My recent content</em> tab on the <em>Recent content</em> page (for logged-in users) limits the list to content created or commented on by the user viewing the page.','','none'),(8803,'The <em>Activity</em> tab on a user profile shows the same list for the user whose profile is being viewed.','','none'),(8804,'Whether to force the output to be an absolute link (beginning with http: or https:)','','none'),(8805,'Whether to force this URL to point to a secure location (beginning with https:)','','none'),(8806,'Checked %langcode translation for %project.','','10.4.5'),(8807,'Downloaded %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8808,'Importing %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8809,'Imported %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8810,'It looks like you have content on your new site which <strong>may be overwritten</strong> if you continue to run this upgrade. The upgrade should be performed on a clean Drupal @version installation. For more information see the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":id-conflicts-handbook\">upgrade handbook</a>.','','none'),(8811,'An upgrade has already been performed on this site. To perform a new migration, create a clean and empty new install of Drupal @version. Rollbacks are not yet supported through the user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":url\">upgrading handbook</a>.','','none'),(8812,'Upgrade a site by importing its files and the data from its database into a clean and empty new install of Drupal @version. See the <a href=\":url\">Drupal site upgrades handbook</a> for more information.','','none'),(8813,'This empty Drupal @version installation you will import the old site to.','','none'),(8814,'<strong>Enable all modules on this new site</strong> that are enabled on the old site. For example, if the old site uses the Book module, then enable the Book module on this new site so that the existing data can be imported to it.','','none'),(8815,'The menu name (= set name) for this shortcut link.','','none'),(8816,'There are errors with some installed themes. Visit the <a href=\":link\">status report page</a> for more information.','','none'),(8817,'There are errors with some installed modules. Visit the <a href=\":link\">status report page</a> for more information.','','none'),(8818,'Display machine name must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, or underscores.','','none'),(8819,'Module %name has an entry in the system.schema key/value storage, but is missing from your site. <a href=\":url\">More information about this error</a>.','','none'),(8820,'Module %name has an entry in the system.schema key/value storage, but is not installed. <a href=\":url\">More information about this error</a>.','','none'),(8821,'Missing required data for configuration: %config','','none'),(8822,'Search form (narrow)','','10.2.3'),(8823,'Search form (wide)','','10.2.3'),(8824,'What is a book?','','none'),(8825,'A book is a structured group of content pages, arranged in a hierarchical structure called a <em>book outline</em>. A book hierarchy can be up to nine levels deep, and a book can include <em>Book page</em> content items or other content items. Every book has a default book-specific navigation block, which contains links that lead to the previous and next pages in the book and to the level above the current page in the book\'s structure.','','none'),(8826,'What are the permissions for books?','','none'),(8827,'Allows users to add new books to the site.','','none'),(8828,'Add content and child pages to books and manage their hierarchies','','none'),(8829,'Allows users to add configured types of content to existing books.','','none'),(8830,'Allows users to add <em>any</em> type of content to a book, use the book overview administration page, and rearrange the pages of a book from the book outline page.','','none'),(8831,'Administer site configuration (in the System module section)','','none'),(8832,'Allows users to do many site configuration tasks, including configuring books. This permission has security implications.','','none'),(8833,'Allows users to click the <em>printer-friendly version</em> link to generate a printer-friendly display of the page, which includes pages below it in the book outline.','','none'),(8834,'<em>Book page</em> content permissions (in the Node module section)','','none'),(8835,'Like other content types, the <em>Book page</em> content type has separate permissions for creating, editing, and deleting a user\'s own and any content items of this type.','','none'),(8836,'Managing books','','none'),(8837,'Book management is handled by the core Book module. The topics listed below will help you create, edit, and configure books.','','none'),(8838,'Add a page to an existing book.','','none'),(8839,'Enter a title for the page and some text for the body of the page.','','none'),(8840,'In the vertical tabs area, click <em>Book Outline</em>. Select the book you want to add the page to in the <em>Book</em> select list. If you want to insert this page into the book hierarchy, also select the desired parent page in the <em>Parent item</em> select list.','','none'),(8841,'Select the desired weight for the page in the <em>Weight</em> select list (pages with the same parent item are ordered from lowest to highest weight).','','none'),(8842,'Click <em>Save</em> to add the page to the book.','','none'),(8843,'Configure settings related to books.','','none'),(8844,'Check all of the content types that you would like to use as book pages in the <em>Content types allowed in book outlines</em> field.','','none'),(8845,'In the <em>Content type for the Add child page link</em> field, select the content type that will be created from the <em>Add child page</em> link on a book page.','','none'),(8846,'Create a new book.','','none'),(8847,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em> &gt; <em>Add content</em> &gt; <em>Book page</em>. If you have configured additional content types that can be added to books, you can substitute a different content type for <em>Book page</em>.','','none'),(8848,'Enter a title for the book, and if desired, some text for the body of the book\'s title page.','','none'),(8849,'In the vertical tabs area, click <em>Book Outline</em>. Select <em>- Create a new book -</em> from the <em>Book</em> select list.','','none'),(8850,'Click <em>Save</em> to create the book.','','none'),(8851,'Change the order and titles of pages within a book.','','none'),(8852,'Click <em>Edit order and titles</em> for the book you would like to change.','','none'),(8853,'Drag the book pages to the desired order.','','none'),(8854,'If desired, enter new text for one or more of the page titles within the book.','','none'),(8855,'Click <em>Save book pages</em>.','','none'),(8856,'What are breakpoints?','','10.4.5'),(8857,'Breakpoints are the point at which your site\'s content will respond to provide the user with the best possible layout to consume the information. A breakpoint separates the height or width of viewports (screens, printers, and other media output types) into steps. For instance, a width breakpoint of 40em creates two steps: one for widths up to 40em and one for widths above 40em. Breakpoints can be used to define when layouts should shift from one form to another, when images should be resized, and other changes that need to respond to changes in viewport height or width.','','10.4.5'),(8858,'What are media queries?','','10.4.5'),(8859,'Media  queries are a formal way to encode breakpoints. For instance, a width breakpoint at 40em would be written as the media query \"(min-width: 40em)\". Breakpoints are really just media queries with some additional meta-data, such as a name and multiplier information.','','10.4.5'),(8860,'What are resolution multipliers?','','10.4.5'),(8861,'What is a breakpoint group?','','10.4.5'),(8862,'Managing breakpoints and breakpoint groups overview','','10.4.5'),(8863,'The <em>Breakpoint</em> module allows you to define breakpoints and breakpoint groups in YAML files. Modules and themes can use the API provided by the <em>Breakpoint</em> module to define breakpoints and breakpoint groups, and to assign resolution multipliers to breakpoints.','','10.4.5'),(8864,'W3C standards for media queries','','10.4.5'),(8865,'What is a theme?','','10.4.5'),(8866,'A <em>theme</em> is a set of files that define the visual look and feel of your site. The core software and modules that run on your site determine which content (including HTML text and other data stored in the database, uploaded images, and any other asset files) is displayed on the pages of your site. The theme determines the HTML markup and CSS styling that wraps the content. Several basic themes are supplied with the core software; additional <em>contributed themes</em> can be downloaded separately from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_theme\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>, or you can create your own theme.','','10.4.5'),(8867,'What is a base theme?','','10.4.5'),(8868,'What is a layout?','','10.4.5'),(8869,'Changing site appearance overview','','10.4.5'),(8870,'The core Field UI module provides a user interface for managing fields and their display on entities.','','10.4.5'),(8871,'The core Layout Builder module provides a more flexible user interface for configuring the display of entities.','','10.4.5'),(8872,'What is site performance?','','10.4.5'),(8873,'Site performance, in this context, refers to speed factors such as the page load time and the response time after a user action on a page.','','10.4.5'),(8874,'What is caching?','','10.4.5'),(8875,'Caching is saving already-rendered HTML output and other calculated data for later use the first time it is needed. This saves time, because the next time the same data is needed it can be quickly retrieved instead of recalculated. Automatic caching systems also include mechanisms to delete cached calculations or mark them as no longer valid when the underlying data changes. To facilitate that, cached data has a <em>lifetime</em>, which is the maximum time before the data will be deleted from the cache (forcing recalculation).','','10.4.5'),(8876,'What is file aggregation?','','10.4.5'),(8877,'Aggregation is when CSS and JavaScript files are merged together and compressed into a format that is much smaller than the original. This allows for faster transmission and faster rendering on the other end.','','10.4.5'),(8878,'What can I do to improve my site\'s performance?','','10.4.5'),(8879,'Internal Page Cache module','','10.4.5'),(8880,'Caches pages requested by users who are not logged in (anonymous users). Do not use if your site needs to send different output to different anonymous users.','','10.4.5'),(8881,'Internal Dynamic Page Cache module','','10.4.5'),(8882,'Caches data for both authenticated and anonymous users, with non-cacheable data in the page converted to placeholders and calculated when the page is requested.','','10.4.5'),(8883,'Big Pipe module','','10.4.5'),(8884,'Changes the way pages are sent to users, so that cacheable parts are sent out first with placeholders, and the uncacheable or personalized parts of the page are streamed afterwards. This allows the browser to render the bulk of the page quickly and fill in the details later.','','10.4.5'),(8885,'Performance page settings','','10.4.5'),(8886,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, if you navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Performance</em>, you will find a setting for the maximum cache lifetime, as well as the ability to turn on CSS and JavaScript file aggregation.','','10.4.5'),(8887,'Online documentation for the Internal Page Cache module','','10.4.5'),(8888,'Online documentation for the Internal Dynamic Page Cache module','','10.4.5'),(8889,'Online documentation for the BigPipe module','','10.4.5'),(8890,'What are the parts of a layout?','','none'),(8891,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to create a layout for, and click <em>Manage display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','none'),(8892,'Under <em>Layout options</em>, check <em>Use Layout Builder</em>. You can also check the box below to allow each entity item to have its layout individually customized (if it is left unchecked, the site will use the same layout for all items of this entity sub-type).','','none'),(8893,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Manage display</em> page, but you will no longer see the table of fields of the classic display manager.','','none'),(8894,'Click <em>Manage layout</em> to enter layout management view. A default layout will be set up for you, with a single one-column section containing the fields on your entity sub-type.','','none'),(8895,'To remove the default section and start from an empty layout, find and click the <em>Remove</em> button for the default section, which looks like an X. Confirm by clicking <em>Remove</em> in the pop-up dialog.','','none'),(8896,'Add new sections, each with one to four columns, to your layout. For instance, you might want a one-column section at the top, a two-column section in the middle, and then a one-column section at the bottom. To add a section, click <em>Add section</em> and click the desired number of columns. For multi-column sections, set the column width percentages and click <em>Add section</em> in the pop-up dialog.','','none'),(8897,'In each section, click <em>Add block</em> to add a block. You will see a list of the blocks available on your site, plus a section called <em>Content fields</em> with a block for each field on your content item. Each block can be configured, if desired, with a <em>Title</em>, and for content field blocks, you can also configure the field formatter. Continue to add blocks to your sections until all the desired blocks and fields are displayed.','','none'),(8898,'Verify your layout. You can check <em>Show content preview</em> to show a preview of what your layout will look like, or uncheck it to see the names of the fields and blocks in each section.','','none'),(8899,'If needed, reorder the blocks by dragging them to new locations. If you hover over a block, a contextual menu will appear that will let you change the configuration of the block, remove the block, or <em>Move</em> blocks within the section using a more compact interface.','','none'),(8900,'When you are satisfied with your layout, click <em>Save layout</em>.','','none'),(8901,'Creating layout defaults','','none'),(8902,'Building Layouts Using the Layout Builder UI','','none'),(8903,'Install a core theme, or a contributed theme that has already been downloaded. Choose the default themes to use for the site and for administrative pages.','','10.4.5'),(8904,'Locate the themes that you want to use as the site default theme and for administrative pages.','','10.4.5'),(8905,'For each of these themes, if the theme is in the <em>Uninstalled themes</em> section, click the <em>Install</em> link to install the theme. Wait for the theme to be installed (translations might be downloaded). You should be returned to the <em>Appearance</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(8906,'Locate the theme that you want to be your default theme, which should now be in the <em>Installed themes</em> section. If it is not already labeled as the <em>default theme</em>, click the <em>Set as default</em> link.','','10.4.5'),(8907,'At the bottom of the page, select the <em>Administration theme</em> that you want to use on administrative pages. Click <em>Save configuration</em> if you selected a new theme.','','10.4.5'),(8908,'If you changed the default theme for your site, visit the site home page or another page on the non-administration part of your site and verify that the site is using the new theme. If you changed the administration theme, verify that the new theme is used on administrative pages.','','10.4.5'),(8909,'Uninstall a theme that was previously installed, but is no longer being used on the site.','','10.4.5'),(8910,'Locate the theme that you want to uninstall, in the <em>Installed themes</em> section.','','10.4.5'),(8911,'The form has become outdated. Press the back button, copy any unsaved work in the form, and then reload the page.','','none'),(8912,'Deployment identifier','','none'),(8913,'Configure one or more search pages.','','10.4.5'),(8914,'Scroll down to the <em>Search pages</em> section. You will see a list of the already-configured search pages on your site.','','10.4.5'),(8915,'To configure an existing search page, click <em>Edit</em>. Or, to add a new search page, select the <em>Search page type</em> and click <em>Add search page</em>.','','10.4.5'),(8916,'Enter the desired <em>Label</em> name and URL <em>Path</em> for the search page.','','10.4.5'),(8917,'For <em>Content</em> search pages, select the desired level of influence in ranking search results of the available <em>Content ranking</em> factors.','','10.4.5'),(8918,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Search pages</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(8919,'Verify that the correct search page is listed as <em>Default</em> in the <em>Status</em> column. If not, click <em>Set as default</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list for the correct search page.','','10.4.5'),(8920,'Optionally, disable or delete any search pages that you do not want to have available on the site (disabling is temporary, while deleting is permanent).','','10.4.5'),(8921,'Manage the search index, and make sure that the site is fully indexed for searching.','','10.4.5'),(8922,'What is the search index?','','10.4.5'),(8923,'Under <em>Indexing throttle</em>, select the <em>Number of items to index per cron run</em>. A smaller number will make cron faster and reduce the possibility of timeout; a larger number will make sure more of your site is indexed in fewer cron runs.','','10.4.5'),(8924,'Under <em>Default indexing settings</em>, enter the desired <em>Minimum word length to index</em>. Words smaller than this length will be dropped from both keywords when searching and content when indexing.','','10.4.5'),(8925,'If your site uses Chinese, Japanese, or Korean languages, optionally check <em>Simple CJK handling</em> under <em>Default indexing settings</em> to provide some support for these languages.','','10.4.5'),(8926,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>, and you should be returned to the <em>Search pages</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(8927,'Click <em>Re-index site</em> if you have changed the indexing configuration, or later on, if you believe that the search index has been corrupted.','','10.4.5'),(8928,'After waiting for cron to run several times, verify that the content has been fully indexed for searching. The overall status is listed under <em>Indexing progress</em>, and the status for each search page is shown in the <em>Indexing progress</em> column of the <em>Search pages</em> section.','','10.4.5'),(8929,'What are search pages?','','10.4.5'),(8930,'The core Search module organizes site search into <em>pages</em>. Each page allows users to search a particular type of content with a particular configuration. The configuration includes specifying a URL that starts with <em>search</em>, a name for the page, and additional options for some search page types.','','10.4.5'),(8931,'What modules provide site search?','','10.4.5'),(8932,'The core Search module provides the ability to configure search pages; search page types are provided by both core and contributed modules. The core modules that provide search page types are:','','10.4.5'),(8933,'The Node module, for searching content pages','','10.4.5'),(8934,'The User module, for searching user profiles','','10.4.5'),(8935,'The Help module, for searching help topics','','10.4.5'),(8936,'As an alternative to the core Search module\'s system of search pages, you can use contributed modules to provide site search. For example, the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/apachesolr\">Apache Solr</a> and <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/sphinx\">Sphinx</a> contributed modules use third-party technology to provide site search.','','10.4.5'),(8937,'What are the limitations of the core Search module?','','10.4.5'),(8938,'There are two main limitations of the core Search module. First, it is not appropriate for very large sites -- if you have a large site, look into other search technologies like Apache Solr. Second, the Node search page type only supports exact keyword matching, which is not the behavior that most users will expect. You can improve this by installing a language-specific stemming module for your language (such as <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/porterstemmer\">Porter Stemmer</a> for American English), which makes it so that, for example, a search for the word walk would match pages containing the words walk, walking, and walked.','','10.4.5'),(8939,'What are the search permissions?','','10.4.5'),(8940,'Users with <em>Use search</em> permission can use the <em>Search form</em> block and <em>Search</em> page; this permission is required for any search configured in the core Search module.','','10.4.5'),(8941,'In addition to <em>Use search</em>, <em>View user information</em> permission is needed for searching users.','','10.4.5'),(8942,'In addition to <em>Use search</em>, <em>View published content</em> permission is needed for searching content.','','10.4.5'),(8943,'Users with <em>Use advanced search</em> permission can use more complex search filtering when performing content searches.','','10.4.5'),(8944,'Configuring site search overview','','10.4.5'),(8945,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/documentation/modules/search\">Online documentation for the Search module</a>','','10.4.5'),(8946,'Document root for files','','none'),(8947,'Document root for public files','','none'),(8948,'Document root for private files','','none'),(8949,'Enables the mobile menu toggle at all widths.','','none'),(8950,'Configuring a previously-placed block','','none'),(8951,'Managing blocks','','none'),(8952,'Placing a block','','none'),(8953,'Adding content to a book','','none'),(8954,'Configuring books','','none'),(8955,'Creating a book','','none'),(8956,'Changing the outline of a book','','none'),(8957,'Managing height, width, and resolution breakpoints','','none'),(8958,'Managing the fields of contact forms','','none'),(8959,'Configuring personal contact forms','','none'),(8960,'Creating a new contact form','','none'),(8961,'Managing contact forms','','none'),(8962,'Setting a default contact form','','none'),(8963,'Using contextual links','','none'),(8964,'Changing the appearance of your site','','none'),(8965,'Managing content structure','','none'),(8966,'Running and configuring cron','','none'),(8967,'Extending and modifying your site functionality','','none'),(8968,'Maintaining and troubleshooting your site','','none'),(8969,'Optimizing site performance','','none'),(8970,'Making your site secure','','none'),(8971,'Tracking the content of your website','','none'),(8972,'Accessibility of the administrative interface','','none'),(8973,'Using the administrative interface','','none'),(8974,'Adding a field to an entity sub-type','','none'),(8975,'Configuring field display for an entity sub-type','','none'),(8976,'Configuring the edit form for an entity sub-type','','none'),(8977,'Adding a reference field to an entity sub-type','','none'),(8978,'Tracking which content a user has visited','','none'),(8979,'Changing the layout for an entity','','none'),(8980,'Configuring site search','','none'),(8981,'Creating and using shortcut administrative links','','none'),(8982,'Tracking and displaying popular content','','none'),(8983,'Clearing the site cache','','none'),(8984,'Changing basic site settings','','none'),(8985,'Configuring error responses, including 403/404 pages','','none'),(8986,'Enabling and disabling maintenance mode','','none'),(8987,'Installing a module','','none'),(8988,'Uninstalling a module','','none'),(8989,'Running reports on your site','','none'),(8990,'Installing a theme and setting default themes','','none'),(8991,'Uninstalling an unused theme','','none'),(8992,'Taking tours of administrative pages','','none'),(8993,'Viewing lists of recently-updated content','','none'),(8994,'Creating a user account','','none'),(8995,'Adding a new role','','none'),(8996,'Managing user accounts and site visitors','','none'),(8997,'Modifying the permissions for a role','','none'),(8998,'Configuring how user accounts are created and deleted','','none'),(8999,'Modifying or deleting a user account','','none'),(9000,'Module Link','','none'),(9001,'Site branding background color','','none'),(9002,'<em>You haven’t created any frontpage content yet.</em>','','none'),(9003,'Drupal is an open source platform for building amazing digital experiences. It’s made, used, taught, documented, and marketed by the <a href=\"@drupal_community\">Drupal community</a>. Our community is made up of people from around the world with a shared set of <a href=\"@drupal_values\">values</a>, collaborating together in a respectful manner. As we like to say:','','none'),(9004,'Come for the code, stay for the community.','','none'),(9005,'There are a few ways to get started with Drupal:','','none'),(9006,'<a href=\"@drupal_user_guide\">User Guide:</a> Includes installing, administering, site building, and maintaining the content of a Drupal website.','','none'),(9007,'<a href=\"@create_content\">Create Content:</a> Want to get right to work? Start adding content. <strong>Note:</strong> the information on this page will go away once you add content to your site. Read on and bookmark resources of interest.','','none'),(9008,'<a href=\"@drupal_extend\">Extend Drupal:</a> Drupal’s core software can be extended and customized in remarkable ways. Install additional functionality and change the look of your site using addons contributed by our community.','','none'),(9009,'Bookmark these links to our active Drupal community groups and support resources.','','none'),(9010,'<a href=\"@drupal_global_training_days\">Global Training Days:</a> Helpful information for evaluating Drupal as a framework and as a career path. Taught in your local language.','','none'),(9011,'<a href=\"@drupal_events\">Upcoming Events:</a> Learn and connect with others at conferences and events held around the world.','','none'),(9012,'<a href=\"@drupal_community\">Community Page:</a> List of key Drupal community groups with their own content.','','none'),(9013,'Get support and chat with the Drupal community on <a href=\"@drupal_slack\">Slack</a> or <a href=\"@drupal_chat\">DrupalChat</a>. When you’re looking for a solution to a problem, go to <a href=\"@drupal_answers\">Drupal Answers on Stack Exchange</a>.','','none'),(9014,'Migration failed with source plugin exception: @e in @file line @line','','none'),(9015,'Display %display has set node/% as path. This will not produce what you want. If you want to have multiple versions of the node view, use Layout Builder.','','none'),(9016,'See <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\" target=\"_blank\">the documentation for PHP date formats</a>.','','none'),(9017,'The specified file \'%original_source\' could not be copied because the destination directory \'%destination_directory\' is not properly configured. This may be caused by a problem with file or directory permissions.','','none'),(9018,'A user-defined date format. See the <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\">PHP manual</a> for available options.','','10.4.4'),(9019,'Manage translations for any entity that the user can edit','','10.4.5'),(9020,'The Filter module allows administrators to configure text formats. Text formats change how HTML tags and other text will be <em>processed and displayed</em> in the site. They are used to transform text, and also help to defend your website against potentially damaging input from malicious users. Visual text editors can be associated with text formats by using the <a href=\":editor_help\">Text Editor module</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":filter_do\">online documentation for the Filter module</a>.','','none'),(9021,'There are four main types of data. <em>Content</em> is the information (text, images, etc.) meant to be displayed to website visitors. <em>Configuration</em> is data that defines how the content is displayed; some configuration (such as field labels) may also be visible to site visitors. <em>State</em> is temporary data about the state of your site, such as the last time the system <em>cron</em> jobs ran. <em>Session</em> is a subset of State information, related to users\' interactions with the site, such as site cookies and whether or not they are logged in.','','10.4.5'),(9022,'List (Options module): Stores values chosen from pre-defined lists, where the values can be numbers or text; see section below for more on list fields.','','10.4.5'),(9023,'Reference (core system): Stores entity references; see section above','','10.4.5'),(9024,'Text (Text module): Stores formatted and unformatted text; see section below for more on text fields.','','10.4.5'),(9025,'What settings are available for List field types?','','10.4.5'),(9026,'List fields associate pre-defined <em>keys</em> (or value codes) with <em>labels</em> that the user sees. For example, you might define a list field that shows the user the names of several locations, while behind the scenes a location code is stored in the database. Each list field type corresponds to one type of stored key. For example, a <em>List (integer)</em> field stores integers, while the <em>List (text)</em> field stores text strings. Once you have chosen the field type, the main setting for a list field is the <em>Allowed values</em> list, which associates the keys with the labels.','','10.4.5'),(9027,'What types of Text fields are available?','','10.4.5'),(9028,'There are several types of text fields, with different characteristics. Text fields can be either <em>plain</em> or <em>formatted</em>: plain text fields do not contain HTML, while formatted fields can contain HTML and are processed through <em>text filters</em> (these are provided by the core Filter module; if you have that module enabled, see the related topic below on filters for more information). Text fields can also be regular-length (with a limit of 255 characters) or <em>long</em> (with a very large character limit), and long formatted text fields can include a <em>summary</em> attribute. All possible combinations of these characteristics exist as text field types; for example, <em>Text (plain)</em> and <em>Text (formatted, long, with summary)</em> are two examples of text field types.','','10.4.5'),(9029,'What is a menu?','','10.4.5'),(9030,'A menu is a collection of <em>menu links</em> used to navigate a web site. Menus and menu links can be provided by modules or site administrators.','','10.4.5'),(9031,'Managing menus overview','','10.4.5'),(9032,'The core Menu UI module provides a user interface for managing menus, including creating new menus, reordering menu links, and disabling links provided by modules. It also provides the ability for links to content items to be added to menus while editing, if configured on the content type. The core Custom Menu Links module provides the ability to add custom links to menus. Each menu can be displayed by placing a block in a theme region; some themes also can display a menu outside of the block system. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9033,'Enabling web services','','none'),(9034,'What is a web service?','','10.4.5'),(9035,'A web service allows your site to provide its content and data to other web sites and applications. Typically, the data is transported via <a href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hypertext_Transfer_Protocol\">HTTP</a> in a serialized machine-readable format.','','10.4.5'),(9036,'What is serialization?','','10.4.5'),(9037,'Serialization is the process of converting complex data structures into text strings, so that they can be exchanged and stored. The reverse process is called <em>deserialization</em>. JSON and XML are the two most-commonly-used data serialization formats for web services.','','10.4.5'),(9038,'What is HTTP Basic authentication?','','10.4.5'),(9039,'<a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_access_authentication\">HTTP Basic authentication</a> is a method for authenticating requests by sending a user name and password along with the request.','','10.4.5'),(9040,'What modules provide web services?','','10.4.5'),(9041,'JSON:API module','','10.4.5'),(9042,'RESTful Web Services module','','10.4.5'),(9043,'Serialization module','','10.4.5'),(9044,'Provides a framework for adding specific serialization formats for other modules to use.','','10.4.5'),(9045,'HTTP Basic Authentication module','','10.4.5'),(9046,'There are also contributed modules that provide web services.','','10.4.5'),(9047,'Online documentation for the RESTful Web Services module','','10.4.5'),(9048,'Online documentation for the JSON:API module','','10.4.5'),(9049,'Comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules','','10.4.5'),(9050,'Connecting text editors to text formats','','none'),(9051,'What is a text editor?','','10.4.5'),(9052,'Managing text filters and text formats','','none'),(9053,'Configure text formats on the site.','','10.4.5'),(9054,'What are text filters and text formats?','','10.4.5'),(9055,'A text filter is a processing step that can be applied to text, either to transform it in some way (such as converting URLs in the text into HTML links), or to defend against potentially-dangerous input from site users. A text format is an ordered sequence of text filters. Text filters are provided by modules; text formats are managed by the core Filter module.','','10.4.5'),(9056,'Text fields that have \"formatted\" in the field type name, such as <em>Text (formatted)</em>, use text formats. Users choose the text format when editing the field text; when the field text is shown on the site, it is processed by the chosen text format. Administrators can configure text formats and assign permissions for who can use each format. If the core Text Editor module is enabled, administrators can also associate visual editors with text formats.','','10.4.5'),(9057,'What text filters are available?','','10.4.5'),(9058,'Some of the more commonly used text filters are:','','10.4.5'),(9059,'Limits which HTML tags can be used; useful both for site security and enforcing site design.','','10.4.5'),(9060,'Line breaks in HTML source are displayed as horizontal spaces. This filter converts line breaks into HTML paragraph and line break tags.','','10.4.5'),(9061,'Takes plain URLs in text and turns them into HTML links.','','10.4.5'),(9062,'For text formats that allow HTML image tags, restricts images to URLs within this site.','','10.4.5'),(9063,'Click <em>Configure</em> to configure an existing text format, or <em>+ Add text format</em> to create a new text format.','','10.4.5'),(9064,'Enter the desired <em>Name</em> for the text format.','','10.4.5'),(9065,'Check the <em>Roles</em> that can use this text format. Some HTML tags allow users to embed malicious links or scripts in text. To ensure security, anonymous and untrusted users should only have access to text formats that restrict them to either plain text or a safe set of HTML tags. <strong>Improper text format configuration is a security risk.</strong>','','10.4.5'),(9066,'If the core Text Editor module is installed, see the related topic to connect a text editor to this text format.','','10.4.5'),(9067,'Under <em>Enabled filters</em>, check the text filters that you want to use.','','10.4.5'),(9068,'Under <em>Filter processing order</em>, drag the filters to the correct order. Choose the order carefully; for example, if you have a filter that results in a particular HTML tag being added to the text, that should run after a filter that restricts HTML tags, to avoid deleting the new tags the first filter added.','','10.4.5'),(9069,'Under <em>Filter settings</em>, verify and adjust the settings for each active filter that has configuration options.','','10.4.5'),(9070,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>, which will return you to the <em>Text formats and editors</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(9071,'Repeat these steps if you have additional text formats to configure.','','10.4.5'),(9072,'Creating threaded discussion forums','','none'),(9073,'What is a forum?','','none'),(9074,'A forum is nested hierarchy of discussions, where users post topics and comment on them.','','none'),(9075,'What is the forum hierarchy?','','none'),(9076,'The forum hierarchy consists of:','','none'),(9077,'Optional <em>containers</em> can be used to group similar forums (for example, <em>Recipes</em>). Forums can be inside containers and vice versa.','','none'),(9078,'<em>Comments</em> submitted by users (for example, <em>You wash the potatoes first and then...</em>).','','none'),(9079,'The <em>forums</em> and <em>containers</em> in the hierarchy are implemented as terms in a hierarchical taxonomy vocabulary. The topics are content items posted in forums (not in containers), and replies are comments on each topic item. Deeply nested hierarchies of forums and containers are generally difficult for users to understand and navigate, so it is recommended to keep your hierarchy simple.','','none'),(9080,'Managing and using forums overview','','none'),(9081,'The core Forum module supplies a content type called <em>Forum topic</em>, along with associated comment type and taxonomy vocabulary. As with other comment types, you can configure comments on forum topics to be threaded or unthreaded. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','none'),(9082,'Configuring forums','','none'),(9083,'Configure settings for forums, and set up forum structure.','','none'),(9084,'Choose the desired settings for <em>Hot topic threshold</em>, <em>Topics per page</em>, and <em>Default order</em>. Click <em>Save configuration</em> if you have made any changes.','','none'),(9085,'Create the containers that you want in your forum hierarchy, starting at the top level, if any. To create a container, click <em>Add container</em>, enter the container name and optionally other settings, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9086,'Create the forums that you want in your forum hierarchy, starting at the top level. To create a forum, click <em>Add forum</em> and enter the forum name. If your hierarchy has this forum inside a container or another forum, select the parent forum/container in the <em>Parent</em> field. Review and/or edit the other settings, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9087,'Optionally, delete the provided <em>General discussion</em> forum, if you do not want this forum to be available on your site.','','none'),(9088,'Review and/or edit the permissions related to forums. The administrative permission for editing the forum settings is in the <em>Forum</em> module section of the permissions page, and administrative permissions for editing the forum hierarchy are in the <em>Taxonomy</em> module section. The user permissions for creating forum topics are in the <em>Node</em> module section, and for commenting on topics are in the <em>Comment</em> module section.','','none'),(9089,'Locking a forum topic','','none'),(9090,'Lock a topic to prevent users from making any more comments.','','none'),(9091,'Locate the topic within the forum, and click on the title to view the topic.','','none'),(9092,'Click <em>Edit</em>.','','none'),(9093,'Under <em>Comment settings</em>, check <em>Closed</em>.','','none'),(9094,'Moving a topic to a new forum','','none'),(9095,'Move a forum topic and all of its comments to a new forum.','','none'),(9096,'In the <em>Forums</em> field, select the new forum that you want the topic to move to.','','none'),(9097,'Check <em>Leave shadow copy</em> to create a link in the original forum pointing to the new location.','','none'),(9098,'Starting a forum discussion','','none'),(9099,'Post a new topic in a forum to start a discussion.','','none'),(9100,'Click <em>Add new Forum topic</em>.','','none'),(9101,'Enter the topic\'s <em>Subject</em> and <em>Body</em>.','','none'),(9102,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Block layout</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9103,'Configure menu settings for a content type','','none'),(9104,'For an existing content type, configure the available menus that will be shown as options on content editing screens; links to content items of this type can be added to these menus during editing.','','10.4.5'),(9105,'Locate the content type you want to configure, and click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.4.5'),(9106,'Under <em>Menu settings</em>, check the menus that you want to be available when editing a content item of this type.','','10.4.5'),(9107,'Optionally, select the <em>Default parent item</em>, to put links to content items under a default location in the menu structure.','','10.4.5'),(9108,'Adding a link to a menu','','none'),(9109,'Add a link to a menu. Note that you can also add a link to a menu from the content edit page if menu settings have been configured for the content type.','','10.4.5'),(9110,'Locate the desired menu and click <em>Add link</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.4.5'),(9111,'Enter the <em>Menu link title</em> to be displayed.','','10.4.5'),(9112,'Enter the <em>Link</em>, one of the following:','','10.4.5'),(9113,'An internal path, such as <em>/node/add</em>','','10.4.5'),(9114,'A full external URL','','10.4.5'),(9115,'Start typing the title of a content item and select it when the full title comes up','','10.4.5'),(9116,'<em>&lt;nolink&gt;</em> to display the <em>Menu link title</em> as plain text without a link','','10.4.5'),(9117,'<em>&lt;front&gt;</em> to link to the front page of your site','','10.4.5'),(9118,'Make sure that <em>Enabled</em> is checked; if not, the menu link will not be displayed.','','10.4.5'),(9119,'Optionally, enter a <em>Description</em>, which will be displayed when a user hovers over the link.','','10.4.5'),(9120,'Optionally, check <em>Show as expanded</em> to automatically show the children of this link (if any) when this link is shown.','','10.4.5'),(9121,'Optionally, select the <em>Parent link</em>, if this menu link should be a child of another menu link.','','10.4.5'),(9122,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Add link</em> page to add another link.','','10.4.5'),(9123,'Locate the menu you just added a link to and click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.4.5'),(9124,'Verify that the order of links is correct. If it is not, drag menu links until the order is correct, and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9125,'Creating a menu','','none'),(9126,'Create a new menu.','','10.4.5'),(9127,'Click <em>Add menu</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9128,'Enter the title for the menu, which is used as the default block title if the menu is displayed as a block. If desired, also edit the machine name of the menu, which is by default derived from the title.','','10.4.5'),(9129,'Enter an administrative summary, which is displayed on the <em>Menus</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(9130,'If your site has more than one language, choose the language for the menu.','','10.4.5'),(9131,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be on the menu editing page, ready to add links to the menu if the core Custom Menu Links module is installed; see related topics for further tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9132,'Reordering and disabling menu links','','none'),(9133,'Disable menu links or change the order and hierarchy of menu links.','','10.4.5'),(9134,'Click <em>Edit menu</em> for the menu that you want to edit.','','10.4.5'),(9135,'Drag menu links into a new order, or check/uncheck <em>Enabled</em> to enable or disable menu links.','','10.4.5'),(9136,'Click <em>Save</em> to save your changes.','','10.4.5'),(9137,'<a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\">PHP date format codes reference</a>','','10.4.5'),(9138,'[site:name]: The name of your website.','','10.4.5'),(9139,'[site:url]: The URL of your website.','','10.4.5'),(9140,'Managing content listings (views)','','none'),(9141,'What is a view?','','10.4.5'),(9142,'A <em>view</em> is a listing of items on your site; for example, a block showing the most recent comments, a page listing news items, or a list of registered users. The listings can be formatted in a table, grid, list, calendar, RSS feed, and other formats (some output formats may require you to install additional contributed modules).','','10.4.5'),(9143,'What are the components of a view?','','10.4.5'),(9144,'When you first create a view, you will specify what type of <em>base data</em> is being displayed in the view, which cannot be changed. After choosing a base data type, you can edit the following components, which allow you to specify which data to output, in what order, and in what format:','','10.4.5'),(9145,'<em>Displays</em>: whether the output goes to a page, block, feed, etc.; a single view can have multiple displays, each with different settings.','','10.4.5'),(9146,'<em>Format</em>: the output style for each display, such as content item, grid, table, or HTML list.','','10.4.5'),(9147,'<em>Fields</em>: if the Format allows, the particular fields to display.','','10.4.5'),(9148,'<em>Filter criteria</em>: criteria to limit the data to output, such as whether the content is published, the type of content, etc. Filters can be <em>exposed</em> to let users choose how to filter the data.','','10.4.5'),(9149,'<em>Sort criteria</em>: how to order the data. Sorting can also be exposed to users.','','10.4.5'),(9150,'<em>Header</em> and <em>Footer</em>: content to display at the top or bottom of the view display.','','10.4.5'),(9151,'<em>No results behavior</em>: what to do if the filter criteria result in having no data to display.','','10.4.5'),(9152,'<em>Pager</em>: how many items to display, and how to paginate if there are additional items to display.','','10.4.5'),(9153,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Contextual filters</em>: like regular filters, except the criteria come from the <em>context</em>, such as the current date, page the view is displayed on, etc.','','10.4.5'),(9154,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Relationships</em>: additional data to pull in and display, related in some way to the base data of the view (such as data about the user who created the content item).','','10.4.5'),(9155,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Exposed form</em>: if you have exposed filters or sorts, how to display the form to the user.','','10.4.5'),(9156,'Managing views overview','','10.4.5'),(9157,'The core Views module handles the display of views, and the core Views UI module allows you to create, edit, and delete views in the administrative interface. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks (if the Views UI module is installed).','','10.4.5'),(9158,'Adding a new display to an existing view','','none'),(9159,'Add a new display to an existing view. This will allow you to display similar data to an existing view, using similar settings, in a new block, page, feed, etc.','','10.4.5'),(9160,'Under <em>Displays</em>, click <em>Add</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9161,'In the pop-up list, click the link for the type of display you want to add; the most common types are <em>Page</em> and <em>Block</em>. The new display will be added to your view, and you will be editing that display.','','10.4.5'),(9162,'Optionally, click the link next to <em>Display name</em> and enter a new name to be shown for this display in the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9163,'Creating a new view','','none'),(9164,'Create a new view to list content or other items on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9165,'Click <em>Add view</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9166,'In the <em>View name</em> field, enter a name for the view, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9167,'In <em>View settings</em> &gt; <em>Show</em>, select the base data type to display in your view. This cannot be changed later.','','10.4.5'),(9168,'Optionally, select or enter filtering, sorting, and page/block display settings; these can be added or changed later.','','10.4.5'),(9169,'Click <em>Save and edit</em>. Your view will be created; edit it following the steps in the related topics below.','','10.4.5'),(9170,'Editing an existing view display','','none'),(9171,'Edit an existing view display, to modify what data is displayed or how it is displayed.','','10.4.5'),(9172,'Under <em>Displays</em>, click the display you want to edit.','','10.4.5'),(9173,'For sections containing lists (such as <em>Fields</em> and <em>Filter criteria</em>), to modify or delete an existing item, click the name of the item. To add a new item, click <em>Add</em> in the drop-down list. To change the order of items, click <em>Rearrange</em> in the drop-down list.','','10.4.5'),(9174,'For sections containing individual settings (such as <em>Title</em> and <em>Format</em>), there are often two links for each setting. The first link shows the current value; click that link to change the value. If there is a second link called <em>Settings</em>, click that link to change the settings details. For example, if your <em>Format</em> is currently shown as <em>Unformatted list</em>, click <em>Unformatted list</em> to switch to using a <em>Grid</em> or <em>Table</em> format. Click <em>Settings</em> next to your format type to change the settings for your chosen format.','','10.4.5'),(9175,'When you have finished changing all the settings, verify that the display is correct by clicking <em>Update preview</em>. Return to editing settings if necessary.','','10.4.5'),(9176,'When you have verified the display, click <em>Save</em>. Alternatively, if you have made mistakes and want to discard your changes, click <em>Cancel</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9177,'For accessibility and search engine optimization, all images that convey meaning on websites should have alternate text. Drupal also allows entry of title text for images, but it can lead to confusion for screen reader users and its use is not recommended. Image fields can be configured so that alternate and title text fields are enabled or disabled; if enabled, the fields can be set to be required. The recommended setting is to enable and require alternate text and disable title text.','','none'),(9178,'This must be an internal path such as %add-node. You can also start typing the title of a piece of content to select it. Enter %front to link to the front page. Enter %nolink to display link text only. Enter %button to display keyboard-accessible link text only.','','none'),(9179,'Start typing the title of a piece of content to select it. You can also enter an internal path such as %add-node or an external URL such as %url. Enter %front to link to the front page. Enter %nolink to display link text only. Enter %button to display keyboard-accessible link text only.','','10.4.5'),(9180,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. Refer to <a href=\"https://oembed.com/#section3\">oEmbed Security Considerations</a>.','','none'),(9181,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. <a href=\":url\">You can specify a different domain for serving oEmbed content in the Media settings</a>.','','none'),(9182,'If checked, users creating new media items in the media library will see a summary of their selected media items, and they will be able to insert their selection directly into the media field or text editor.','','none'),(9183,'A flag for whether the link should be rendered in menus. (1 = a disabled menu link that may be shown on admin screens, -1 = a menu callback, 0 = a normal, visible link)','','none'),(9184,'Menu link language code.','','none'),(9185,'Translation set id.','','none'),(9186,'Menu link ID of the source language menu link.','','none'),(9187,'Users with the <em>Administer menus and menu links</em> permission can add, edit, and delete custom menus on the <a href=\":menu\">Menus page</a>. Custom menus can be special site menus, menus of external links, or any combination of internal and external links. You may create an unlimited number of additional menus, each of which will automatically have an associated block (if you have the <a href=\":block_help\">Block module</a> installed). By selecting <em>Edit menu</em>, you can add, edit, or delete links for a given menu. The links listing page provides a drag-and-drop interface for controlling the order of links, and creating a hierarchy within the menu.','','none'),(9188,'Default parent link','','10.4.5'),(9189,'Choose the menu link to be the default parent for a new link in the content authoring form.','','10.4.5'),(9190,'The selected menu link is not under one of the selected menus.','','none'),(9191,'<strong>Warning:</strong> There is currently 1 menu link in %title. It will be deleted (system-defined links will be reset).<strong>Warning:</strong> There are currently @count menu links in %title. They will be deleted (system-defined links will be reset).','','none'),(9192,'Drupal @version module name','','none'),(9193,'Drupal @version machine name','','none'),(9194,'The human-readable name of the mapping','','none'),(9195,'The machine name of the mapping','','none'),(9196,'The group this mapping belongs to','','none'),(9197,'The mappings linked to the breakpoints group','','none'),(9198,'About searching','','10.4.5'),(9199,'You can display your shortcuts by enabling the <em>Shortcuts</em> block on the <a href=\":blocks\">Blocks administration page</a>. Certain administrative modules also display your shortcuts; for example, the core <a href=\":toolbar-help\">Toolbar module</a> provides a corresponding menu link.','','none'),(9200,'The new set is created by copying links from your default shortcut set.','','none'),(9201,'The menu.mlid primary key for this menu link (= shortcut link).','','none'),(9202,'Administer menus and menu links','','10.4.5'),(9203,'The menu is only visible if the menu link for the current page is at this level or below it. Use level 1 to always display this menu.','','none'),(9204,'Menu language.','','none'),(9205,'Menu i18n mode.','','none'),(9206,'Administer roles and permissions','','10.4.5'),(9207,'Flood control blocked login attempt for uid %uid from %ip','','none'),(9208,'Flood control blocked login attempt for uid %uid','','none'),(9209,'Flood control blocked login attempt from %ip','','none'),(9210,'Menu link entry','','none'),(9211,'When providing a menu link as a tab, Drupal needs to know what the parent menu link of that tab will be. Sometimes the parent will already exist, but other times you will need to have one created. The path of a parent link will always be the same path with the last part left off. i.e, if the path to this view is <em>foo/bar/baz</em>, the parent path would be <em>foo/bar</em>.','','none'),(9212,'Normal menu link','','none'),(9213,'If creating a parent menu link, enter the title of the link.','','none'),(9214,'If creating a parent menu link, enter the description of the link.','','none'),(9215,'If the parent menu link is a tab, enter the weight of the tab. Heavier tabs will sink and the lighter tabs will be positioned nearer to the first menu link.','','none'),(9216,'Views cannot create normal menu links for paths with a % in them.','','none'),(9217,'If \"Custom\", see <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\" target=\"_blank\">the PHP docs</a> for date formats. Otherwise, enter the number of different time units to display, which defaults to 2.','','none'),(9218,'Primary Branding Color','','none'),(9219,'A clean, accessible, and flexible Drupal front-end theme.','','10.4.5'),(9220,'Block Layout Page','','none'),(9221,'Blocks are boxes of content rendered into an area, or region, of a web page that can be displayed in regions (such as footer or sidebar) on your page.','','none'),(9222,'Any custom or contributed block can be added to a particular region by clicking on a button Place block. A new block can also be created by clicking on Place Block','','none'),(9223,'By Clicking on \"Configure\" you can go ahead and edit the contents of the block, deal with the visibility settings and even change the placement of where it is on your theme.','','none'),(9224,'Wide (1090)','','10.2.3'),(9225,'Olivero Medium','','10.2.3'),(9226,'j  F,  Y','PHP date format','10.2.3'),(9227,'Content blocks','','10.4.5'),(9228,'Failed to fetch available update data:','','none'),(9229,'See <a href=\"@url\">PHP OpenSSL requirements</a> in the Drupal.org handbook for possible reasons this could happen and what you can do to resolve them.','','none'),(9230,'Check <a href=\"@url\">your local system logs</a> for additional error messages.','','none'),(9231,'Check your local system logs for additional error messages.','','none'),(9232,'Drupal update settings','','none'),(9233,'For security reasons, your upload has been rejected.','','none'),(9234,'Testing themes blocks','','none'),(9235,'Minimal profile for testing block installation of themes.','','none'),(9236,'Testing theme with optional blocks','','none'),(9237,'Testing theme with required blocks','','none'),(9238,'Testing theme without blocks','','none'),(9239,'Exporting your complete site configuration','','none'),(9240,'Click <em>Export</em> and save the archive file.','','10.4.5'),(9241,'Select the <em>Configuration type</em> that you want to export, and then select the specific <em>Configuration name</em> to export.','','10.4.5'),(9242,'Use your browser to copy the text in the box marked <em>Here is your configuration</em> to the clipboard.','','10.4.5'),(9243,'Paste the copied text into a plain-text editor on your computer or other device, and save it using the suggested file name below the text box.','','10.4.5'),(9244,'Importing your complete site configuration','','none'),(9245,'Browse to find the <em>Configuration archive</em> that you want to import.','','10.4.5'),(9246,'Click <em>Upload</em>. Your configuration archive will be unpacked and placed in the configuration synchronization directory, and you will be redirected to the <em>Synchronize</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(9247,'Review the differences between your uploaded configuration and the active configuration, if any, and click <em>Import all</em> to import the changes.','','10.4.5'),(9248,'Select the <em>Configuration type</em> that you want to import.','','10.4.5'),(9249,'On your computer or other device, copy the YAML-format configuration that you want to import to the clipboard.','','10.4.5'),(9250,'Paste the clipboard text into the box labeled <em>Paste your configuration here</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9251,'Click <em>Import</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9252,'Managing and deploying configuration','','none'),(9253,'What is the configuration system?','','10.4.5'),(9254,'The configuration system provides the ability for administrators to customize the site, and to move and synchronize configuration changes between development sites and the live site. It does this in 2 ways:','','10.4.5'),(9255,'Providing storage for configuration','','10.4.5'),(9256,'Providing a process in which configuration changes can be imported and exported between instances of the same site; for example, from \"dev\" to \"staging\" to \"live\"','','10.4.5'),(9257,'What is configuration data?','','10.4.5'),(9258,'Configuration data describes settings that define how your site behaves or is displayed. For example, when a site administrator updates settings using an administrative form, these settings are stored as configuration data. Configuration data describes settings as simple as a site name and as complex as a view or image style.','','10.4.5'),(9259,'What kinds of configuration are there?','','10.4.5'),(9260,'Active configuration','','10.4.5'),(9261,'Active configuration is the current working configuration of a site. Storage of active configuration is defined by the site, and resides in the database by default.','','10.4.5'),(9262,'A simple configuration item is a group of settings, such as the settings for a module or theme. Each simple configuration item has its own unique structure.','','10.4.5'),(9263,'Configuration entities are user-defined configuration items grouped by type, such as views, image styles, and content types. Each configuration entity within a type has a similar structure.','','10.4.5'),(9264,'Default configuration can be defined by a module, theme, or installation profile in its <em>config/install</em> or <em>config/optional</em> directories. Configuration is provided in YAML files (file extension .yml); YAML is a human-readable data serialization standard that is used by the core software for several purposes. Once the default configuration has been imported into the site\'s active configuration (through installing the extension), that configuration is owned by the site, not the extension. This means that future updates of the extension will not override the site\'s active configuration for that extension.','','10.4.5'),(9265,'What is configuration synchronization?','','10.4.5'),(9266,'Configuration synchronization is the process of exporting and importing configuration to keep configuration synchronized between different versions of a site; for example, between a development site and the live site.','','10.4.5'),(9267,'Each site has unique identifier, also called a <em>UUID</em>, which identifies the site to the system in any instance of the site, as long as the site instances have been reproduced as clones (cloning is when the codebase and database are copied to create a new site instance). When site instances are cloned, a \"dev\" instance of the site has the same UUID as the \"live\" instance. When site instances share the same UUID, configuration can be exported from one instance to another.','','10.4.5'),(9268,'The following list contains terms and concepts related to configuration synchronization:','','10.4.5'),(9269,'Exported configuration','','10.4.5'),(9270,'When configuration is exported, the active configuration is exported as a set of files in YAML format. When using the <em>Configuration synchronization</em> administrative UI, configuration can be exported as a full-export or single-item archive. This archive can then be imported into the destination site instance.','','10.4.5'),(9271,'Imported configuration','','10.4.5'),(9272,'Imported configuration is configuration that has been exported from another instance of the site (the \"source\") and is now being imported into another site instance (the \"destination\"), thereby updating its active configuration to match the imported configuration data set.','','10.4.5'),(9273,'The configuration sync directory location is set in the site\'s <em>settings.php</em> file. When configuration is exported, the active configuration is exported and described in YAML files which are stored in the configuration sync directory. After the first export, the system compares the site\'s active configuration with the configuration data in the sync directory and will only export active configuration items that are different than their counterparts in the sync directory.','','10.4.5'),(9274,'Managing configuration overview','','10.4.5'),(9275,'Configuration management tasks, such as exporting or importing configuration and synchronizing configuration, can be done either through the administrative UI provided by the core Configuration Manager module or a command-line interface (CLI) tool. Defining a configuration sync directory path other than the default value requires read/write access to the site\'s <em>settings.php</em> file.','','10.4.5'),(9276,'Most modules and themes also provide settings forms for updating the configuration they provide. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9277,'Managing media','','none'),(9278,'What are media items?','','10.4.5'),(9279,'What is the media library?','','10.4.5'),(9280,'The media library is a visual user interface for managing and reusing media items. Add media items to content using Media reference fields and the Media library field widget.','','10.4.5'),(9281,'What is an image style?','','10.4.5'),(9282,'An image style is a set of processing steps, known as <em>effects</em>, that can be applied to images. Examples of effects include scaling and cropping images to different sizes. Responsive image styles can associate image styles with your theme\'s size breakpoints. This allows serving images sized for the browser width.','','10.4.5'),(9283,'Overview of managing media','','10.4.5'),(9284,'The following modules provide media-related functionality:','','10.4.5'),(9285,'Media items and media types are managed by the core Media module.','','10.4.5'),(9286,'The core Media module provides a Media reference field to add media to content entities. The core File and Image modules also provide reference fields. It is recommended to use the Media reference field because it is more versatile.','','10.4.5'),(9287,'The core Media Library module provides the media library and the Media library field widget. With this module installed, the Media library field widget becomes the default widget for editing Media reference fields.','','10.4.5'),(9288,'The core Image module provides a user interface for defining image styles. The core Responsive Image module provides responsive image styles. Using the core Breakpoint module, and a breakpoint-enabled theme, these responsive styles can serve images sized for the browser.','','10.4.5'),(9289,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/8/core/modules/media\">Media module</a>','','10.4.5'),(9290,'Adding an image style','','none'),(9291,'Click <em>Add image style</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9292,'Enter a descriptive <em>Image style name</em>, and click <em>Create new style</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9293,'Under <em>Effect</em>, choose an effect to apply and click <em>Add</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9294,'Configure the effect on the next page. Most effects require some additional configuration after they are added.  For example, for the <em>Crop</em> effect, enter the <em>Width</em> and <em>Height</em> to crop the image to, and choose the <em>Anchor</em> point. Click <em>Add effect</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9295,'Repeat the previous two steps until all of the effects have been added.','','10.4.5'),(9296,'Drag to change the order of the effects. Then click <em>Save</em> to save the new order.','','10.4.5'),(9297,'The image style can now be used to format a field containing an image in your layouts or traditional field displays. It can also be used as part of a responsive image style. See related topics below for more information.','','10.4.5'),(9298,'Adding a new media type','','none'),(9299,'If there is not already a media type for the type of media you want to use on your site, click <em>Add media type</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9300,'Enter a <em>Name</em> and <em>Description</em> for your media type, and select the <em>Media source</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9301,'For most media sources, there is additional information that will need to be stored with your media item, in a field on your media type. Under <em>Media source configuration</em>, select an existing field to re-use to store this information, or select <em> - Create -</em> to create a new field.','','10.4.5'),(9302,'Note the types of metadata in the <em>Field mapping</em> section that can be mapped to fields on your media type.','','10.4.5'),(9303,'Optionally, add additional fields for the metadata noted above or for other information that you want to store to your media type by clicking on <em>Manage fields</em> (see related topic below).','','10.4.5'),(9304,'If you have added metadata fields, click <em>Edit</em>. Under <em>Field mapping</em>, select the fields you added for each piece of metadata information.','','10.4.5'),(9305,'You can now use this media type by adding a Media reference field to any content entity sub-type. See related topic below.','','10.4.5'),(9306,'Migrating, updating, and upgrading','','none'),(9307,'What are updating, upgrading, and migrating?','','none'),(9308,'<em>Updating</em> is the process of changing from one minor version of the software to a newer version, such as from version 8.3.4 to 8.3.5, or 8.3.5 to 8.4.0. Starting with version 8.x, you can also update to major versions 9, 10, and beyond if your add-on modules, themes, and install profiles are compatible. <em>Upgrading</em> is the process of changing from an older major version of the software to a newer version, such as from version 7 to 8. <em>Migrating</em> is the process of importing data into a site.','','none'),(9309,'To upgrade a site from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 or later, keeping the content and configuration the same, you will install the new version of the software and add-on modules and themes in a new site, and then migrate the content and other data from your old site into the new site.','','none'),(9310,'Overview of Migrating','','none'),(9311,'Provides the underlying API for migrating data.','','none'),(9312,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/upgrading-drupal\">Upgrading Drupal</a>','','none'),(9313,'Migrating data for an upgrade using the user interface','','none'),(9314,'Read the introduction and follow the <em>Preparation steps</em> on the page. Then click <em>Continue</em>.','','none'),(9315,'Select the Drupal version of the source site. Also enter the database credentials and public and private files directories (private file directory is not available when migrating from Drupal 6). Click <em>Review upgrade</em>.','','none'),(9316,'If the next page you see contains a message about conflicting content, that means that the site where you are running the upgrade is not empty. If you continue, you will lose the data in the site. If that is acceptable, click the button to continue; if not, start these steps over in a new, clean Drupal site.','','none'),(9317,'On the <em>What will be upgraded?</em> page, review the list of modules whose data will not be upgraded. If that list is not empty and you want to migrate the data from those modules, you will need to download contributed modules and/or install core or contributed modules, and start these steps over.','','none'),(9318,'When the list of modules that will and will not be upgraded meets your expectations, click <em>Perform upgrade</em> and wait for the upgrade to complete. You will see a message about the number of upgrade tasks that were successful or failed, and you can review the upgrade message log by clicking the link on the results page.','','none'),(9319,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/upgrading-drupal/upgrading-from-drupal-6-or-7-to-drupal-8-and-newer\">Upgrading from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 (and newer)</a>','','none'),(9320,'Configuring a responsive image style','','none'),(9321,'Click <em>Add responsive image style</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9322,'Enter a descriptive <em>Label</em> for your style.','','10.4.5'),(9323,'Select a <em>Breakpoint group</em> from the groups defined by your installed themes and modules.','','10.4.5'),(9324,'On the next page, locate the fieldsets for the breakpoints provided by the selected <em>Breakpoint group</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9325,'For each breakpoint that you want to use, expand the corresponding fieldset. Select the <em>Select a single image style.</em> radio button under <em>Type</em> for the breakpoint, and select the <em>Image style</em> to use for images when that breakpoint is in effect. Repeat this step for the rest of the breakpoints you want to use.','','10.4.5'),(9326,'Click <em>Save</em>','','10.4.5'),(9327,'You can now use this responsive image style to format a field containing an image, in your layouts or traditional field displays. See related topics below for more information.','','10.4.5'),(9328,'Human name of the parent node type.','','none'),(9329,'Machine name of the parent node type.','','none'),(9330,'@title sub-navigation','','none'),(9331,'Moving content between workflow states','','none'),(9332,'Who can change workflow states?','','none'),(9333,'Click <em>Edit</em> to edit the entity.','','none'),(9334,'At the bottom of the page, select the new workflow state under <em>Change to:</em> and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9335,'Who can configure a workflow?','','none'),(9336,'Make a plan for the new workflow:','','none'),(9337,'Decide which workflow states you need; for example, <em>Concept</em>, <em>Review</em>, and <em>Final</em>.','','none'),(9338,'Decide on the settings for each state:','','none'),(9339,'<em>Label</em>: the state name','','none'),(9340,'<em>Published</em>: if checked, when content reaches this state it will be made visible on the site (to users with permission).','','none'),(9341,'<em>Default revision</em>: if checked, when content reaches this state it will become the default revision of the content; published content is automatically the default revision.','','none'),(9342,'Decide which state content should be created in.','','none'),(9343,'Decide on the list of allowed transitions between states. For example, you might want a transition between <em>Concept</em> and <em>Review</em>. Each transition has a label; for example, the Concept to Review transition might be labeled \"Review concept\".','','none'),(9344,'Click <em>Add workflow</em>.','','none'),(9345,'Enter a name in the <em>Label</em> field, select <em>Content moderation</em> from the <em>Workflow type</em> field, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9346,'Verify that the <em>States</em> list matches your planned states. You can add missing states by clicking <em>Add a new state</em>. You can edit or delete states by clicking <em>Edit</em> or <em>Delete</em> under <em>Operations</em> (if the <em>Delete</em> option is not available, you will first need to delete any <em>Transitions</em> to or from this state).','','none'),(9347,'Verify that the <em>Transitions</em> list matches your plan. You can add missing transitions by clicking <em>Add a new transition</em>. You can edit or delete transitions by clicking <em>Edit</em> or <em>Delete</em> under <em>Operations</em>.','','none'),(9348,'Check the entity subtypes that you want to apply the workflow to. For example, you might choose to apply your workflow to the <em>Page</em> content type, but not to <em>Article</em>.','','none'),(9349,'Under <em>Workflow settings</em>, select the <em>Default moderation state</em> for new content.','','none'),(9350,'Click <em>Save</em> to save your workflow.','','none'),(9351,'Optionally (recommended), create a view for your custom workflow, to provide a page for content editors to see what content needs to be moderated. You can do this if the Views UI module is installed, by following the steps in the related <em>Creating a new view</em> topic listed below under <em>Related topics</em>. When creating the view, under <em>View settings</em> &gt; <em>Show</em>, select the revision data type you configured the workflow for, and be sure to display the <em>Workflow State</em> field in your view.','','none'),(9352,'Managing content moderation workflows','','none'),(9353,'What is a content moderation workflow?','','none'),(9354,'On some sites, new content and content revisions need to be <em>moderated</em>. That is, they need to pass through several <em>states</em> before becoming visible to site visitors. The collection of states and the definition of the transitions between states is known as a <em>workflow</em>. For example, new content might start out in a <em>Draft</em> state, and then might need to pass through several <em>Review</em> states before it becomes <em>Published</em> on the live site.','','none'),(9355,'Overview of content moderation workflows','','none'),(9356,'The core Content Moderation module allows you to expand on core software\'s \"unpublished\" and \"published\" states for content. It allows you to have a published version that is live, but have a separate working copy that is undergoing review before it is published. This is achieved by using workflows to apply different states and transitions to entities as needed.','','none'),(9357,'The core Workflows module allows you to manage workflows with states and transitions.','','none'),(9358,'See the related topics listed below for specific tasks and background information.','','none'),(9359,'On-line documentation about Content Moderation','','none'),(9360,'If %identifier is a valid account, an email will be sent with instructions to reset your password.','','none'),(9361,'@language translation was not added. To add a translation, you must modify the configuration.','','10.2.3'),(9362,'No page is specified','','none'),(9363,'Provide markup for the area using any available text format.','','none'),(9364,'Provide markup for the area with minimal filtering.','','none'),(9365,'You may enter data from this view as per the \"Available global token replacements\" above. You may include the following allowed HTML tags: <code>@tags</code>','','none'),(9366,'You may include the following allowed HTML tags with these \"Replacement patterns\": <code>@tags</code>','','none'),(9367,'There are no @entity_type_plural matching \"%value\".','','10.2.3'),(9368,'Many @entity_type_plural are called %value. Specify the one you want by appending the id in parentheses, like \"@value (@id)\".','','none'),(9369,'Multiple @entity_type_plural match this reference; \"%multiple\". Specify the one you want by appending the id in parentheses, like \"@value (@id)\".','','none'),(9370,'The module \'@module_name\' is providing the database driver \'@driver_name\'.','','none'),(9371,'Failed to connect to the server. The server reports the following message: <p class=\"error\">@message</p> For more help adding or updating code on your server, see the <a href=\":handbook_url\">handbook</a>.','','none'),(9372,'Add another module','','none'),(9373,'HTML tables can be created with table headers and caption/summary elements.','','none'),(9374,'Alt text is required by default on images added through CKEditor (note that this can be overridden).','','none'),(9375,'Semantic HTML5 figure/figcaption are available to add captions to images.','','none'),(9376,'This log is not persistent','','none'),(9377,'The Database Logging module logs may be cleared by administrators and automated cron tasks, so they should not be used for <a href=\":audit_trail_wiki\">forensic logging</a>. For forensic purposes, use the Syslog module.','','none'),(9378,'Your upload has been renamed to %filename.','','none'),(9379,'Separate extensions with a comma or space. Each extension can contain alphanumeric characters, \'.\', and \'_\', and should start and end with an alphanumeric character.','','none'),(9380,'The list of allowed extensions is not valid. Allowed characters are a-z, 0-9, \'.\', and \'_\'. The first and last characters cannot be \'.\' or \'_\', and these two characters cannot appear next to each other. Separate extensions with a comma or space.','','none'),(9381,'Add %txt_extension to the list of allowed extensions to securely upload files with a %extension extension. The %txt_extension extension will then be added automatically.','','none'),(9382,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @layout_link.','','10.4.5'),(9383,'Configure the block and click <em>Save block</em>; see @configure_topic for configuration details.','','10.4.5'),(9384,'Translating configuration','','none'),(9385,'For configuration entities, find the specific entity that you want to translate on the next page, and click <em>Translate</em> under <em>Operations</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9386,'Enter translations for the translatable text fields for the configuration item, and save.','','10.4.5'),(9387,'Configuring content language settings and translation','','none'),(9388,'Under <em>Custom language settings</em>, find the content entity types that should have customized language settings on your site. Check the box next to each one. A section will appear below the list with settings for that entity type.','','10.4.5'),(9389,'For each entity type you checked, in the settings section below check the boxes for each entity sub-type that should be <em>Translatable</em> on your site. If the entity type does not have sub-types, there is just one check box for the entity type as a whole.','','10.4.5'),(9390,'For each entity type or subtype, select the <em>Default language</em>. Also, if you want to have languages other than the default available when you create content, check <em>Show language selector on create and edit pages</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9391,'For each <em>Translatable</em> type or sub-type, look through the list of fields for the type or sub-type, and verify that only the fields that should be translatable are checked. For example, you would probably want to translate a <em>Title</em> field, but you might not want to translate a <em>Start date</em> field.','','10.4.5'),(9392,'Click <em>Save configuration</em> when all of your changes are complete.','','10.4.5'),(9393,'Working with languages and translations','','none'),(9394,'What text can be translated in your site?','','10.4.5'),(9395,'There are three types of text that can be translated:','','10.4.5'),(9396,'User interface text that is provided by the core software, your install profile, themes, and modules is provided in English, but can be translated into other languages. You can also download translations that community-members have provided.','','10.4.5'),(9397,'Working with languages overview','','10.4.5'),(9398,'The core Language module lets you add new languages to your site, provides the <em>Language switcher</em> block, and provides the ability to configure block visibility by language; the block and block visibility settings are only available if you have multiple languages configured. The core Content Translation, Configuration Translation, and Interface Translation modules let you translate content, configuration, and the built-in user interface, respectively. The core Update Manager module manages automatic downloads of community-provided translations of default configuration and user-interface text. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9399,'Adding a language','','none'),(9400,'Add a language to your site.','','10.4.5'),(9401,'If your language is in the <em>Language name</em> list, select it and click <em>Add language</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9402,'If your language is not in the list, select <em>Custom language...</em> and enter the <em>Language code</em>, <em>Language name</em>, and <em>Direction</em> for the language. Click <em>Add custom language</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9403,'Wait for the translation system to be updated. Also, if you have the core Update Manager module installed and translations are available for your language, wait for translations to be downloaded. You should be returned to the <em>Languages</em> page when this completes.','','10.4.5'),(9404,'Configuring language detection and selection','','none'),(9405,'Configure the methods used to decide which language will be used to display text on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9406,'What is a language detection method?','','10.4.5'),(9407,'A language detection method is a way for your site to decide what language should be used to display text. This decision is made by evaluating a series of detection methods for languages; the first detection method that gets a result will determine which language is used. If you have more than one language on your site, you can configure the detection methods that are used and the order they are evaluated, for both user interface text and content text. Configuration text always uses the interface text method, and most sites use the same detection methods for all types of text.','','10.4.5'),(9408,'What language detection methods are available?','','10.4.5'),(9409,'The available detection methods depend on what modules you have installed. Some of the most commonly-used language detection methods are:','','10.4.5'),(9410,'Use the language from the URL, which can either be in a path prefix like <em>example.com/fr/page_path</em> for French (fr) language, or in a domain like <em>fr.example.com/page_path</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9411,'For logged in users, use the language they have set in their profiles.','','10.4.5'),(9412,'Use the language preferences from the user\'s browser.','','10.4.5'),(9413,'Use the language most recently selected from a <em>Language switcher</em> block.','','10.4.5'),(9414,'Use the language from a session parameter or a request parameter; for example, adding <em>?language=fr</em> to the end of the URL.','','10.4.5'),(9415,'Check the boxes to enable the desired language detection methods, and uncheck boxes for the methods you do not want to use.','','10.4.5'),(9416,'Drag the methods to change their order, if desired.','','10.4.5'),(9417,'Click <em>Save settings</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9418,'Click <em>Configure</em> on each enabled detection method and verify that its configuration is correct (or update the configuration if not).','','10.4.5'),(9419,'Importing a translation file','','none'),(9420,'Import a file (.po extension) containing translations for user interface text.','','10.4.5'),(9421,'Browse to find the <em>Translation file</em> you want to import. Select the language and check the desired import options.','','10.4.5'),(9422,'Click <em>Import</em> and wait for your file to be imported.','','10.4.5'),(9423,'Translating user interface text','','none'),(9424,'Translate user interface text strings from English into a non-English language that is configured on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9425,'Using the filters, search for a string or set of strings that you want to translate; make sure to select the correct <em>Translation language</em> if you have more than one non-English language on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9426,'Enter new translations and click <em>Save translations</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9427,'Repeat these steps until all of the desired user interface text is translated for all languages on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9428,'Checking interface translation status','','none'),(9429,'Check the current status of interface translations, and see if there are any updates available.','','10.4.5'),(9430,'Look at the <em>Interface translation</em> column in the language table, to find the percentage of user interface text that has been translated for each language.','','10.4.5'),(9431,'Optionally, click <em>Check manually</em> to update the report.','','10.4.5'),(9432,'View the report to find out if any languages have translation updates that you can download.','','10.4.5'),(9433,'You can use the <em>Migration</em> group of modules to perform the migration step of upgrading from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 or later, as well as other migrations. These modules also provide APIs that can be used by programmers to write custom software for migrations. Here are the functions of the core migration modules:','','none'),(9434,'[user:account-name]: The user\'s account name.','','10.4.5'),(9435,'Help search is not fully indexed. Some results may be missing or incorrect.','','none'),(9436,'If an upgrade has been performed on this site, you will be informed.','','none'),(9437,'You need to enter the database credentials of the Drupal site that you want to upgrade. You can also include its files directory in the upgrade. For example local files, /var/www/docroot, or remote files http://www.example.com.','','none'),(9438,'If there is existing content on the site that may be overwritten by this upgrade, you will be informed.','','none'),(9439,'Finally, a message is displayed about the number of upgrade tasks that were successful or failed.','','none'),(9440,'To import private files from your current Drupal site, enter a local file directory containing your site (e.g. /var/www/docroot). Leave blank to use the same value as Public files directory.','','none'),(9441,'Add <a href=\":modules\">contributed modules</a> to extend your site\'s functionality.','','10.4.5'),(9442,'Database driver provided by module','','none'),(9443,'The current database driver is provided by the module: %module. The module is currently not enabled. You should immediately <a href=\":enable\">enable</a> the module.','','none'),(9444,'Adding %project','','none'),(9445,'Error adding / updating','','none'),(9446,'Added / updated %project_name successfully','','none'),(9447,'Files were added successfully. Your site has been taken out of maintenance mode.','','none'),(9448,'Files were added successfully.','','none'),(9449,'File add failed! See the log below for more information.','','none'),(9450,'File add failed! See the log below for more information. Your site is still in maintenance mode.','','none'),(9451,'The Update Manager also allows administrators to add and update modules and themes through the administration interface.','','none'),(9452,'Adding new modules and themes through the Add new pages','','none'),(9453,'You can also add new modules and themes in the same fashion, through the <a href=\":install\">Add new modules and themes page</a>, or by clicking the <em>Add new module/theme</em> links at the top of the <a href=\":modules_page\">Extend page</a> and the <a href=\":themes_page\">Appearance page</a>. In this case, you are prompted to provide either the URL to the download, or to upload a packaged release file from your local computer.','','none'),(9454,'Add new module or theme','','none'),(9455,'Add new module','','10.2.3'),(9456,'Add new theme','','10.2.3'),(9457,'Add from a URL','','none'),(9458,'Upload a module or theme archive','','none'),(9459,'You must either provide a URL or upload an archive file.','','none'),(9460,'%project is already present.','','none'),(9461,'View user email addresses','','10.4.5'),(9462,'Users without this permission will not have access to email addresses on user pages or other places where they might be shown, such as Views and JSON:API responses.','','10.2.3'),(9463,'The username or email address is invalid.','','none'),(9464,'Password reset form was submitted with an unknown or inactive account: %name.','','none'),(9465,'Always show the default display','','none'),(9466,'Publish workspace','','none'),(9467,'Publish %source_label workspace','','none'),(9468,'There are no changes that can be published from %source_label to %target_label.','','none'),(9469,'Would you like to publish the contents of the %label workspace?','','none'),(9470,'Publish workspace contents.','','none'),(9471,'Successful publication.','','none'),(9472,'Publication failed. All errors have been logged.','','none'),(9473,'There is @count item that can be published from %source_label to %target_labelThere are @count items that can be published from %source_label to %target_label','','none'),(9474,'Publish @count item to @targetPublish @count items to @target','','none'),(9475,'Missing help topic %topic','','none'),(9476,'Failed to fetch security advisory data:','','none'),(9477,'See <a href=\":url\">Troubleshooting the advisory feed</a> for possible causes and resolutions.','','none'),(9478,'Check <a href=\":url\">your local system logs</a> for additional error messages.','','none'),(9479,'Critical security advisories','','none'),(9480,'The System module displays highly critical and time-sensitive security announcements to site administrators. Some security announcements will be displayed until a critical security update is installed. Announcements that are not associated with a specific release will appear for a fixed period of time. <a href=\":handbook\">More information on critical security advisories</a>.','','none'),(9481,'Only the most highly critical security announcements will be shown. <a href=\":advisories-list\">View all security announcements</a>.','','none'),(9482,'(<a href=\":system-help\">What are critical security announcements?</a>)','','none'),(9483,'Critical security announcements','','none'),(9484,'Security advisory settings','','none'),(9485,'Display critical security advisories','','none'),(9486,'How often to check for security advisories, in hours','','none'),(9487,'The security advisory JSON feed from Drupal.org could not be decoded.','','none'),(9488,'[user:display-name]\n\nA request to cancel your account has been made at [site:name].\n\nYou may now cancel your account on [site:url-brief] by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:cancel-url]\n\nNOTE: The cancellation of your account is not reversible.\n\nThis link expires in one day and nothing will happen if it is not used.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(9489,'The label of the link.','','none'),(9490,'Pre-header','','none'),(9491,'Banner Top','','none'),(9492,'Hero (full width)','','none'),(9493,'Move content from %from state to %to state.Move content from %from states to %to state.','','none'),(9494,'Your server does not support updating modules and themes from this interface. Instead, update modules and themes by uploading the new versions directly to the server, as documented in <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a>.','','none'),(9495,'Your server does not support adding modules and themes from this interface. Instead, add modules and themes by uploading them directly to the server, as documented in <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a>.','','none'),(9496,'Updating modules and themes requires <strong>@backends access</strong> to your server. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other update methods.Updating modules and themes requires access to your server via one of the following methods: <strong>@backends</strong>. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other update methods.','','none'),(9497,'Adding modules and themes requires <strong>@backends access</strong> to your server. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other methods.Adding modules and themes requires access to your server via one of the following methods: <strong>@backends</strong>. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other methods.','','none'),(9498,'Creating an advanced action','','none'),(9499,'Create an advanced action. You can, for example, create an action to change the author of multiple content items. See @action_overview for more about actions.','','none'),(9500,'Who can create actions?','','none'),(9501,'Users with the <em>@action_permissions</em> permission (typically administrators) can create actions.','','none'),(9502,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>System</em> &gt; <em>@actions</em>. A list of all actions is shown.','','none'),(9503,'Choose an advanced action from the dropdown and click <em>Create</em>.','','none'),(9504,'Enter a name for the action in the <em>Label</em> field. This label will be visible for the user.','','none'),(9505,'Configure any of the other available options. These will depend on the kind of action that you have chosen.','','none'),(9506,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the list of actions, with your new action added to the list.','','none'),(9507,'To edit an action you have previously created, click <em>Configure</em> in the <em>Operations</em> drop-down list. To delete an action you have previously created, click <em>Delete</em> in the <em>Operations</em> drop-down list.','','none'),(9508,'What are actions?','','none'),(9509,'Actions are module-defined tasks that can be executed on the site; for example, unpublishing content, sending an email message, or blocking a user.','','none'),(9510,'What are simple actions?','','none'),(9511,'Simple actions do not require configuration. They are automatically available to be executed, and are always listed as available on the @actions_page.','','none'),(9512,'What are advanced actions?','','none'),(9513,'How are actions executed?','','none'),(9514,'In the core software, actions can be executed through a <em>bulk operations form</em> added to a view; if you have the core Views module installed, see the related topic \"Managing content listings (views)\" for more information about views and bulk operations.','','none'),(9515,'Configuring actions overview','','none'),(9516,'Configuring comments','','none'),(9517,'Configure a content entity type/subtype to allow commenting, using a comment type that you have configured. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields, and @comment_type_topic to configure a comment type.','','10.4.5'),(9518,'Who can configure comments?','','10.4.5'),(9519,'In order to follow these steps, the Field UI module must be installed. You\'ll need the Comment module\'s <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission, in order to change comment settings for a comment field. You\'ll also need to have the appropriate permission for adding fields to the entity type or subtype that the comments are attached to. For example, to add a comment field to content items provided by the Node module, you would need the Node module\'s <em>Administer content types</em> permission.','','10.4.5'),(9520,'Follow the steps in the related <em>Adding a field to an entity sub-type</em> topic to add a field of type <em>Comments</em> to the desired entity type or sub-type.','','10.4.5'),(9521,'On the first field settings page, choose the <em>Comment type</em> to use for this entity type or sub-type. You\'ll also notice that the <em>Allowed number of values</em> field cannot be changed for comment fields.','','10.4.5'),(9522,'On the next field settings page, enter the desired settings for the comment field:','','10.4.5'),(9523,'<em>Threading</em>: whether or not the comments are collected by threads, with people able to reply to particular comments instead of to the content entity itself.','','10.4.5'),(9524,'<em>Comments per page</em>: the maximum number of comments displayed on one page (a pager will be added if you exceed this limit).','','10.4.5'),(9525,'<em>Anonymous commenting</em>: whether or not anonymous commenters are allowed or required to leave contact information with their comments (only applies if anonymous users have permission to post comments).','','10.4.5'),(9526,'<em>Show reply form on the same page as comments</em>: whether the comment reply form is displayed on the same page as the comments. If this is not selected, clicking <em>Reply</em> will open a new page with the reply form.','','10.4.5'),(9527,'<em>Preview comments</em>: whether previewing comments before submission is <em>Required</em>, <em>Optional</em>, or <em>Disabled</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9528,'<em>Default value</em>: each individual entity has its own comment settings, but here you can set defaults for the comment settings for this entity type or subtype. The comment settings values are:','','10.4.5'),(9529,'<em>Open</em>: comments are allowed.','','10.4.5'),(9530,'<em>Closed</em>: past comments remain visible, but no new comments are allowed.','','10.4.5'),(9531,'<em>Hidden</em>: past comments are hidden, and no new comments are allowed.','','10.4.5'),(9532,'Online documentation for content comment settings','','10.4.5'),(9533,'Creating a comment type','','none'),(9534,'Create a new comment type. See @comment_overview_topic for information about comments and comment types.','','10.4.5'),(9535,'Who can create a comment type?','','10.4.5'),(9536,'Users with the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can create comment types.','','10.4.5'),(9537,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@comment_types_link</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9538,'Click <em>Add comment type</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9539,'In the <em>Label</em> field, enter a name for the comment type, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9540,'In the <em>Target entity type</em> field, select the entity type to be commented on. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(9541,'Click <em>Save</em>. The comment type will be created.','','10.4.5'),(9542,'Optionally, if you have the core Field UI module installed you can follow the steps in the related topics to add fields to the new comment type, set up the editing form, and configure the display.','','10.4.5'),(9543,'Disabling comments','','none'),(9544,'Turn off commenting for a particular entity (see @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields). Note that if you want to turn off commenting for all entities of an entity type or subtype, you will need to edit the field settings for the comment field; see @comment_config_topic for more about configuring the comment field.','','10.4.5'),(9545,'Who can disable comments?','','10.4.5'),(9546,'You will need the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission in order to disable commenting. You will also need permission to edit the entity that the comments are on.','','10.4.5'),(9547,'Find the entity you want to disable comments for, and edit it. For example, to turn off comments on a content item, you could find it by navigating in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu to <em>Content</em>, filtering to find the content item, and clicking <em>Edit</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9548,'Under <em>Comment settings</em>, select the desired comment setting:','','10.4.5'),(9549,'Save the entity.','','10.4.5'),(9550,'Moderating comments','','none'),(9551,'Decide which comments are shown on the website.','','10.4.5'),(9552,'Who can moderate comments?','','10.4.5'),(9553,'Users with the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can moderate comments. You will also need the <em>Access the Content Overview page</em> permission from the Node module (if it is installed) to navigate to the comment management page.','','10.4.5'),(9554,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em> &gt; <em>@comment_published_link</em>. A list of all comments is shown.','','10.4.5'),(9555,'To unpublish comments, select one or more comments by checking the boxes on the left side (right side in right-to-left languages). Then select <em>Unpublish comment</em> from the <em>Action</em> select list and click <em>Apply to selected items</em>. If you select the <em>Delete comment</em> action, you can instead delete the unwanted  comments.','','10.4.5'),(9556,'To change the content of a comment click <em>Edit</em> from the dropdown button for a particular comment.','','10.4.5'),(9557,'To publish comments that are not yet visible on the website, navigate to the <em>@comment_unpublished_link</em> tab. Select one or more comments by checking the boxes on the left side (right side in right-to-left languages). Then select <em>Publish comment</em> from the <em>Action</em> select list and click <em>Apply to selected items</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9558,'Online documentation for moderating comments','','10.4.5'),(9559,'Managing comments','','none'),(9560,'What is a comment?','','10.4.5'),(9561,'What is a comment type?','','10.4.5'),(9562,'Comments are divided into <em>comment types</em>, which are the entity sub-types for the comment entity type. Each comment type has its own fields and its own form and display settings; each type can be used to comment on a single entity type. You can set up different comment types for different commenting purposes on your web site; for example, you might set up a comment type for recipes that has fields \"How did it taste?\" and \"Did the instructions work?\", and another comment type for blog entries that has only a generic comment body field.','','10.4.5'),(9563,'What is moderation?','','10.4.5'),(9564,'<em>Moderation</em> is a workflow where comments posted by some users on your site are verified before being published, to prevent spam and other bad behavior. The core software provides basic moderation functionality: you can configure permissions so that new comments posted by some user roles start as unpublished until a user with a different role reviews and publishes them. Contributed modules provide additional moderation and spam-reduction functionality, such as requiring untrusted users pass a CAPTCHA test before submitting comments and letting community members flag comments as possible spam. See @users_overview_topic for more about users, permissions, and roles.','','10.4.5'),(9565,'Overview of managing comments','','10.4.5'),(9566,'The core Comment module provides the following functionality:','','10.4.5'),(9567,'Posting comments','','10.4.5'),(9568,'Creating comment types; the core Field UI module allows you to attach fields to comment types and attach comment reference fields to other entities so that people can comment on them.','','10.4.5'),(9569,'Configuring commenting','','10.4.5'),(9570,'Moderating comments as discussed above','','10.4.5'),(9571,'What is quick editing?','','10.4.5'),(9572,'Click the contextual links <em>Edit</em> button on the toolbar (in most themes, it looks like a pencil). Contextual <em>Edit</em> links with the same icon will appear all over your page.','','10.4.5'),(9573,'Find the contextual link for the part of the page you want to edit. For example, if you want to edit the settings for a block, the link should be in the top-right corner of the block, or top-left for right-to-left languages.','','10.4.5'),(9574,'Make your edits and submit the form.','','10.4.5'),(9575,'The core administrative interface has built-in compliance with many accessibility standards so that most pages are accessible to most users in their default state. However, certain pages become more accessible to some users through the use of a non-default or improved interface. These interfaces include:','','10.4.5'),(9576,'Enabling inline form errors','','10.4.5'),(9577,'Errors that occur when you submit a form, such as not filling in a required field, are sometimes difficult for users to understand and locate. In order to make these errors easier to find, the best practice is to put a summary of the errors at the top of the form page. To make them easier to understand, the best practice is to display error messages with the form fields they are related to. Both of these practices are implemented by the core Inline Form Errors module.','','10.4.5'),(9578,'What administrative interface components are available?','','10.4.5'),(9579,'Accessibility features, to enable all users to perform administrative tasks. See @accessibility_topic for more information.','','10.4.5'),(9580,'What are the sections of the administrative menu?','','10.4.5'),(9581,'The administrative menu, which you can navigate by visiting <em>@admin_link</em> on your site or by using an administrative toolbar, has the following sections (some may not be available, depending on which modules are currently installed on your site, and your permissions):','','10.4.5'),(9582,'<strong>Content:</strong> Find, manage, and create new pages; manage comments and files.','','10.4.5'),(9583,'<strong>Structure:</strong> Place and edit blocks, set up content types and fields, configure menus, administer taxonomy, and configure some contributed modules.','','10.4.5'),(9584,'<strong>Appearance:</strong> Switch between themes, install themes, and update existing themes.','','10.4.5'),(9585,'<strong>Extend:</strong> Update, install, and uninstall modules.','','10.4.5'),(9586,'<strong>Configuration:</strong> Configure the settings for various site functionality, including some contributed modules.','','10.4.5'),(9587,'<strong>People:</strong> Manage user accounts and permissions.','','10.4.5'),(9588,'<strong>Reports:</strong> Display information about site security, necessary updates, and site activity.','','10.4.5'),(9589,'<strong>Help:</strong> Get help on using the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9590,'Install the core modules mentioned above to use the corresponding aspect of the administrative interface. See the related topics listed below for more details on some aspects of the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9591,'Creating a content item','','none'),(9592,'Create and publish a content item. See @content_overview_topic for more about content types and content items.','','10.4.5'),(9593,'Who can create content?','','10.4.5'),(9594,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission can visit the <em>Content</em> page as described in this topic. Each content type has its own create permissions. For example, to create content of type Article, a user would need the Article: Create new content permission. In addition, users with the <em>Bypass content access control</em> or <em>Administer content</em> permission can create content items of all types. Some contributed modules change the permission structure for creating content.','','10.4.5'),(9595,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@content_link</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9596,'Click <em>Add content</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9597,'If there is more than one content type defined on your site that you have permission to create, click the name of the type of content you want to create.','','10.4.5'),(9598,'On the content edit form, enter the <em>Title</em> of your content, which will show as the page title when the content item is displayed on a page, and also as the label for the content item in administration screens.','','10.4.5'),(9599,'Fill in the other fields shown on the edit form for this specific content type.','','10.4.5'),(9600,'Leave the <em>Published</em> field checked to publish the content immediately, or uncheck it to make it unpublished. Unpublished content is generally not shown to non-administrative site users.','','10.4.5'),(9601,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will see the content displayed on a page.','','10.4.5'),(9602,'Creating a content type','','none'),(9603,'Create a new content type. See @content_overview_topic for more about content types.','','10.4.5'),(9604,'Who can create a content type?','','10.4.5'),(9605,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can create new content types.','','10.4.5'),(9606,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@content_types_link</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9607,'Click <em>Add content type.</em>','','10.4.5'),(9608,'In the <em>Name</em> field, enter a name for the content type, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.4.5'),(9609,'Optionally, enter a <em>Description</em> for the content type. You may also want to adjust some of the settings in the vertical tabs section of the edit page.','','10.4.5'),(9610,'Click <em>Save and manage fields</em>. Your content type will be created, and assuming you have the core Field UI module installed, you will be taken to the <em>Manage fields</em> page for the content type. (If you do not have the core Field UI module installed, the button will say <em>Save</em> instead.)','','10.4.5'),(9611,'If you have the core Field UI module installed, follow the steps in the related topics to add fields to the new content type, set up the editing form, and configure the display.','','10.4.5'),(9612,'Editing a content item','','none'),(9613,'Find a content item and edit it, or update a group of content items in bulk. See @node_overview_topic for more about content types and content items.','','10.4.5'),(9614,'Who can find and edit content?','','10.4.5'),(9615,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission can use the <em>Content</em> page to find content. Each content type has its own edit permissions. For example, to edit content of type Article, a user would need the <em>Article: Edit own content</em> permission to edit an article they created, or the <em>Article: Edit any content</em> permission to edit an article someone else created. In addition, users with the <em>Bypass content access control</em> or <em>Administer content</em> permission can edit content items of all types. Some contributed modules change the permission structure for editing content.','','10.4.5'),(9616,'Optionally, use filters to reduce the list of content items shown:','','10.4.5'),(9617,'<em>Title</em>: key word(s) from the title','','10.4.5'),(9618,'<em>Content type</em>','','10.4.5'),(9619,'<em>Published status</em>','','10.4.5'),(9620,'<em>Language</em>','','10.4.5'),(9621,'If you enter or select filter values, click <em>Filter</em> to apply the filters.','','10.4.5'),(9622,'Optionally, sort the list by clicking a column header. Click again to reverse the order.','','10.4.5'),(9623,'To edit the title or other field values for one content item, click <em>Edit</em> in the row of the content item. Update the values and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9624,'A few types of edits can be done in bulk to multiple content items. For example, to publish several unpublished content items, check the boxes in the left column (right column in right-to-left languages) to select the desired content items. For <em>Action</em>, select the <em>Publish content</em> action. Click <em>Apply to selected items</em> to make the change. The other actions under <em>Action</em> work in a similar manner.','','10.4.5'),(9625,'What is a content item?','','10.4.5'),(9626,'A <em>content item</em> is a type of content entity for page-level content, which can have fields that store text, HTML markup, images, attached files, and other data. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(9627,'What is a content type?','','10.4.5'),(9628,'Content items are divided into <em>content types</em>, which are the entity sub-types for the content item entity type; each content type has its own fields and display settings. For example, you might set up content types for pages, articles, recipes, events, and blog entries on your web site.','','10.4.5'),(9629,'Overview of managing content','','10.4.5'),(9630,'The core Node module allows you to define content types, and add and edit content items. The core Field UI module allows you to attach fields to each content type and manage the edit form and display for each content type. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks. Many other core and contributed modules and installation profiles provide pre-defined content types, modify the permission structure for content items, and provide other functionality.','','10.4.5'),(9631,'Creating a URL alias for a content item','','none'),(9632,'Give a content item page a human- or SEO-friendly URL alias; you can follow similar steps to create an alias for a taxonomy term page. See @overview_topic for more about aliases.','','10.4.5'),(9633,'Who can create URL aliases?','','10.4.5'),(9634,'Users with the <em>@path_permissions_link</em> permission can create aliases. To follow the steps in this topic, you will also need permission to edit the content item.','','10.4.5'),(9635,'Locate and open the content edit form for the content item, or create a new content item (see related topics on creating and editing content).','','10.4.5'),(9636,'Under <em>URL alias</em> on the edit form, enter the desired alias (for example, \"/about-us\"). Make sure the alias starts with a \"/\" character.','','10.4.5'),(9637,'Verify that the page can be visited with the new alias, for example <em>https://example.com/about-us</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9638,'Editing a URL alias','','none'),(9639,'Change an existing URL alias, to correct the path or the alias value. See @path_overview_topic for more about aliases.','','10.4.5'),(9640,'Who can manage URL aliases?','','10.4.5'),(9641,'Users with the <em>@path_permissions_link</em> permission can edit aliases.','','10.4.5'),(9642,'In the <em>Manage</em> administration menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Search and metadata</em> &gt; <em>@path_aliases_link</em>. A list of all the site\'s aliases will appear.','','10.4.5'),(9643,'Click <em>Edit</em> in the dropdown button for the alias that you would like to change.','','10.4.5'),(9644,'Make the required changes and click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the URL alias list page.','','10.4.5'),(9645,'Note that you can also add new aliases from this page, for any path on your site.','','10.4.5'),(9646,'Configuring aliases for URLs','','none'),(9647,'What is a URL?','','10.4.5'),(9648,'URL is the abbreviation for \"Uniform Resource Locator\", which is the page\'s address on the web. It is the \"name\" by which a browser identifies a page to display. In the example \"Visit us at <em>example.com</em>.\", <em>https://example.com</em> would be the URL for the home page of your website. Users use URLs to locate content on the web.','','10.4.5'),(9649,'What is a path?','','10.4.5'),(9650,'A path is the unique, last part of the URL for a specific function or piece of content. For example, for a page whose full URL is <em>https://example.com/node/7</em>, the path is <em>node/7</em>. Here are some examples of paths you might find in your site:','','10.4.5'),(9651,'node/7: Path to a particular content item.','','10.4.5'),(9652,'taxonomy/term/6: Path to a taxonomy term page.','','10.4.5'),(9653,'user/3: Path to a user profile page.','','10.4.5'),(9654,'What is an alias?','','10.4.5'),(9655,'The core software allows you to provide more understandable URLs for pages on your site, which are called <em>aliases</em>. For example, if you have an \"About Us\" page with the path <em>node/7</em>, you can set up an alias of <em>about</em> so that your visitors will see it as <em>https://www.example.com/about</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9656,'Overview of configuring paths, aliases, and URLs','','10.4.5'),(9657,'The core Path module provides the URL aliasing functionality. The contributed <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/pathauto\">Pathauto</a> module allows you to configure automatically-generated URL aliases for content items and other pages. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9658,'Configuring taxonomy','','none'),(9659,'Create a taxonomy vocabulary and add a reference field for that vocabulary to a content entity. See @taxonomy_overview_topic for information about taxonomy and @content_structure_topic for more on content entities.','','10.4.5'),(9660,'Who can configure a taxonomy vocabulary?','','10.4.5'),(9661,'Users with the <em>@taxonomy_permissions_link</em> permission can configure a vocabulary. To add a field in the administrative interface, the core Field UI module must be installed, and you will also need the <em>Administer fields</em> permission for the entity you are adding the field to.','','10.4.5'),(9662,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@taxonomy_admin_link</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9663,'Click <em>Add vocabulary</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9664,'In the <em>Name</em> field, enter a name for the vocabulary (for example \"Ingredients\"), which is how it will be shown in the administrative interface. Optionally, add a description.','','10.4.5'),(9665,'Click <em>Save</em>. Your vocabulary will be created and you will see the page that lists all the terms in this vocabulary.','','10.4.5'),(9666,'Optionally, click <em>Add term</em> to add a term to the new vocabulary. In the <em>Name</em> field, enter the term name (for example \"Butter\"). Click <em>Save</em>. You will receive a confirmation about the term you created. You may optionally continue to add more terms.','','10.4.5'),(9667,'If you have the Field UI module installed, follow the instructions on the related <em>Adding a reference field to an entity sub-type</em> topic to add a taxonomy reference field to the entity type of your choice. The settings page will allow you to choose the <em>Vocabulary</em> that you created as the vocabulary to reference.','','10.4.5'),(9668,'You may also want to configure the display and form display of the new field (see related topics).','','10.4.5'),(9669,'Managing taxonomy','','none'),(9670,'What is taxonomy?','','10.4.5'),(9671,'<em>Taxonomy</em> is used to classify website content. One common example of taxonomy is the tags used to classify or categorize posts in a blog website; a cooking website could use an ingredients taxonomy to classify recipes. Individual taxonomy items are known as <em>terms</em> (the blog tags or recipe ingredients in these examples); and a set of terms is known as a <em>vocabulary</em> (the set of all blog post tags, or the set of all recipe ingredients in these examples). Technically, taxonomy terms are an entity type and the entity subtypes are the vocabularies; see @content_structure_topic for more on content entities. Like other entities, taxonomy terms can have fields attached; for instance, you could set up an image field to contain an icon for each term.','','10.4.5'),(9672,'An individual vocabulary can organize its terms in a hierarchy, or it could be flat. For example, blog tags normally have a flat structure, while a recipe ingredients vocabulary could be hierarchical (for example, tomatoes could be a sub-term of vegetables, and under tomatoes, you could have green and red tomatoes).','','10.4.5'),(9673,'Taxonomy terms are normally attached as reference fields to other content entities, which is how you can use them to classify content. When you set up a taxonomy reference field, you can let users enter terms in two ways:','','10.4.5'),(9674,'New terms can be created right on the content editing form.','','10.4.5'),(9675,'Fixed list of terms','','10.4.5'),(9676,'The list of terms is curated and managed outside the content editing form, and users can only select from the existing list when editing content.','','10.4.5'),(9677,'Overview of managing taxonomy','','10.4.5'),(9678,'The core Taxonomy module allows you to create and edit taxonomy vocabularies and taxonomy terms. The core Field UI module provides a user interface for adding fields to entities, including the taxonomy reference field, and configuring field editing and display. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9679,'<em>Page settings</em>, <em>Block settings</em>, etc.: settings specific to the display type, such as the URL for a page display. Most display types support an <em>Access</em> setting, where you can choose a Permission or Role that a user must have in order to see the view.','','10.4.5'),(9680,'What are bulk operations?','','10.4.5'),(9681,'Adding a bulk operations form to a view','','none'),(9682,'Who can edit views?','','10.4.5'),(9683,'The core Views UI module will need to be installed and you will need <em>@views_permissions</em> permission in order to edit a view.','','10.4.5'),(9684,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@views</em>. A list of all views is shown.','','10.4.5'),(9685,'If there is not already an <em>Operations bulk form</em> in the <em>Fields</em> list for the view, click <em>Add</em> in the <em>Fields</em> section to add it. (The exact name of the bulk form field will vary, and may contain keywords like \"bulk update\", \"form element\" or \"operations\" -- not to be confused with <em>operations links</em>, which are applied to each item in a row.) If the bulk operations field already exists, click the field name to edit its settings.','','10.4.5'),(9686,'Check the action(s) you want to make available in the <em>Selected actions</em> list and click <em>Apply (all displays)</em>.','','10.4.5'),(9687,'Verify that the <em>Access</em> settings for the view are at least as restrictive as the permissions necessary to perform the bulk operations. People with permission to see the view, but who don\'t have permission to do the bulk operations, will experience problems.','','10.4.5'),(9688,'Click <em>Save</em>. The action(s) will be available as bulk operations in the view.','','10.4.5'),(9689,'The following permissions are needed to create and manage books; see @user_overview_topic and its related topics for more about permissions.','','none'),(9690,'Create and download an archive containing all your site\'s configuration, exported as YAML files. See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.4.5'),(9691,'Export a single configuration item to a file. See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.4.5'),(9692,'Import the complete configuration of your site from an archive file, such as one that was previously exported (see @export_full_topic). See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.4.5'),(9693,'Import a single configuration item in YAML format, such as one that was previously exported (see @export_single_topic). See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.4.5'),(9694,'Translate your site configuration to another language. See @language_add_topic if you need to add a new language.','','10.4.5'),(9695,'Find either the configuration entity type or the simple configuration item that you want to translate in the <em>Label</em> column of the list. Click <em>List</em> under <em>Operations</em> for a configuration entity, or <em>Translate</em> for simple configuration. (See @config_overview_topic to learn more about types of configuration and configuration entities.)','','10.4.5'),(9696,'The contact form will always have <em>Subject</em> and <em>Message</em> fields. If you want to add more fields, follow the steps in @adding_fields_topic.','','10.4.5'),(9697,'Change the workflow state of a particular entity. See @workflows_overview_topic for an overview of workflows, and @content_structure_topic for an overview of content entities.','','none'),(9698,'Create or edit a workflow with various workflow states (for example <em>Concept</em>, <em>Archived</em>, etc.) for moderating content. See @workflows_overview_topic for more information on workflows.','','none'),(9699,'Decide which roles should have permissions to make each transition; see @user_overview_topic for an overview of roles and permissions.','','none'),(9700,'Decide which <em>entity types</em> and subtypes the workflow should apply to. Only entity types that support revisions are possible to define workflows for. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','none'),(9701,'Configure language and translation settings for one or more content entity types (see @content_structure_topic for an overview of content entities). To do this, you must have at least two languages configured. Afterwards, you will have a <em>Translate</em> operation available for your content entities, either as a tab or link when you are viewing or editing content, or on content administration pages.','','10.4.5'),(9702,'A <em>layout</em> is a template that defines where blocks and other pieces of content should be displayed. The core Layout Discovery module allows modules and themes to register layouts, and the core Layout Builder module provides a visual interface for placing fields and blocks in layouts for entity sub-types and individual entity items (see @content_structure_topic for more on entities and fields).','','10.4.5'),(9703,'Core media items include audio, images, documents, and videos. You can add other media types, such as social media posts, through the use of contributed modules. Media items may be files located in your site\'s file system, or remote items referenced by a URL. Media items are content entities, and they are divided into media types (which are entity sub-types); media types can have fields. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(9704,'Content (blocks, content items, etc.) can be written in English or another language, and can be translated into additional languages. See @content_structure_topic to learn more about content.','','10.4.5'),(9705,'Many configuration items also include text that can be translated. Default configuration provided by your site\'s software is provided in English; you can also download community-provided translations. See @config_overview_topic to learn more about configuration.','','10.4.5'),(9706,'Exposes <em>entities</em> to other applications using a fully compliant implementation of the <a href=\"https://jsonapi.org\">JSON:API Specification</a>. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(9707,'Configure a text format so that when a user is editing text and selects this text format, a text editor installed on your site is shown. Configure the text editor, such as choosing which buttons and functions are available. See @filter_overview_topic for more about text formats.','','10.4.5'),(9708,'Follow the steps on @filter_overview_topic to add a new text format or configure an existing text format; when you reach the step about text editors, return to this topic.','','10.4.5'),(9709,'Return to @filter_overview_topic to complete the text format configuration, and be sure to save the text format.','','10.4.5'),(9710,'Add a field to an entity sub-type; see @content_structure_topic for an overview of entity types and sub-types, as well as an overview of field types.','','10.4.5'),(9711,'In <em>Add a new field</em>, select the type of field you want to add; see @content_structure_topic for an overview of field types.','','10.4.5'),(9712,'Configure the <em>formatters</em> used to display the fields of an entity sub-type, their order in the display, and the formatter settings. See @content_structure_topic for background information.','','10.4.5'),(9713,'Configure the <em>widgets</em> used to edit the fields of an entity sub-type, their order on the form, and the widget settings. See @content_structure_topic for background information.','','10.4.5'),(9714,'Add an entity reference field to an entity sub-type; see @content_structure_topic for more information on entities and reference fields.','','10.4.5'),(9715,'Decide on the hierarchy of containers and forums you want for your site; see @forum_concept_topic for an overview of forum hierarchy.','','none'),(9716,'Check the indexing status of the Help search page. If it is not fully indexed, see @cron_topic about how to run Cron until indexing is complete.','','10.4.5'),(9717,'In the future, you can click <em>Rebuild search index</em> on this page, or @cache_topic, in order to force help topic text to be reindexed for searching. This should be done whenever a module, theme, language, or string translation is updated.','','10.4.5'),(9718,'Add a new image style, which can be used to process and display images. See @media_topic for an overview of image styles.','','10.4.5'),(9719,'Configure an entity sub-type to have its fields displayed using a layout (see @content_structure_topic for more on entities and fields).','','none'),(9720,'A layout consists of one or more <em>sections</em>. Each section can have from one to four <em>columns</em>. You can place blocks, including special blocks for the fields on the entity sub-type, in each column of each section (see @block_overview_topic for more on blocks).','','none'),(9721,'Add a new media type that can be referenced in Media reference fields; media types are a content entity type. See @media_topic for an overview of media items and media types, and @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(9722,'Migrate data into a new, empty site, as part of an upgrade from an older version of Drupal. See @migrate_overview_topic for an overview of migrating and upgrading.','','none'),(9723,'Configure a responsive image style, which can be used to display images at different sizes on different devices. See @media_topic for an overview of responsive image styles, and @breakpoint_overview_topic for an overview of breakpoints.','','10.4.5'),(9724,'Select a <em>Fallback image style</em> to use when none of the other styles apply. See @image_style_topic if you need to add a new style.','','10.4.5'),(9725,'Follow the steps in @search_index_topic to make sure that the search index is updated.','','10.4.5'),(9726,'The <em>Content</em> and <em>Help</em> search types provided by the core software pre-index their content and store the results in several database tables that are collectively called the <em>search index</em>. The process of indexing renders the content and breaks it up into words, which can then be matched more efficiently with keyword queries when users perform searches. Search indexing happens during cron runs; see @cron_topic for more information about cron.','','10.4.5'),(9727,'Follow the steps in @cron_topic to make sure a cron task has been configured.','','10.4.5'),(9728,'In order to configure site search using the core Search module, you will need to configure one or more search pages. You will also need to verify or alter permissions so that the desired user roles can search the site. (See @user_overview_topic for more information about roles and permissions.) For content search, you will also need to make sure that the search index is configured and that the site is fully indexed. Finally, you may wish to place the <em>Search form</em> block on pages of your site, or add the search page to a navigation menu, to give users easy access to search. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9729,'Clear the site cache. See @cache_topic for instructions.','','10.4.5'),(9730,'Uninstall a module. Your site should be in <em>maintenance mode</em> when you uninstall modules. See @maintenance_topic for details.','','10.4.5'),(9731,'Follow the steps in @view_edit_topic to edit the other settings for the display.','','10.4.5'),(9732,'Find the section whose settings you want to change, such as <em>Format</em> or <em>Filter criteria</em>. (See @views_overview_topic for more information.)','','10.4.5'),(9733,'The core software allows you to configure workflows in which each transition has an associated permission that can be granted to a particular role. See @configuring_workflows_topic for more information.','','none'),(9734,'Users with sufficient permissions can change the workflow state of a particular entity. See @changing_states_topic for more information.','','none'),(9735,'Remote oEmbed providers could not be retrieved due to error: @error. Using previously stored data. This may contain out of date information.','','none'),(9736,'Remote oEmbed providers database returned invalid or empty list. Using previously stored data. This may contain out of date information.','','none'),(9737,'Block type settings','','none'),(9738,'@bundle_type is not @bundles or @last','','none'),(9739,'@bundle_type is not @bundle','','none'),(9740,'Are you sure you want to remove the @entity-type %label from the %region region?','','10.4.4'),(9741,'This will remove the block placement. You will need to <a href=\":url\">place it again</a> in order to undo this action.','','10.4.4'),(9742,'The @entity-type %label has been removed from the %region region.','','10.4.4'),(9743,'Destination file \"%file\" exists','','none'),(9744,'The file could not be uploaded because the destination \"%destination\" is invalid.','','none'),(9745,'For more information see the <a href=\":html-specifications\">HTML Living Standard</a> or use your favorite search engine to find other sites that explain HTML.','','10.4.5'),(9746,'Converts an image to a format (such as JPEG).','','none'),(9747,'Determines the content language from the request parameter named \'language_content_entity\'.','','10.4.5'),(9748,'The source field definition for the %type media type is missing.','','none'),(9749,'Author/owner name','','none'),(9750,'Author/owner URL','','none'),(9751,'Media item default name','','none'),(9752,'Thumbnail local URI','','none'),(9753,'Resource source URL','','none'),(9754,'Resource width','','none'),(9755,'Resource height','','none'),(9756,'Resource HTML representation','','none'),(9757,'Module %name has been enabled. Configure <a href=\":link\">related permissions</a>.@count modules have been enabled: %names. Configure <a href=\":link\">related permissions</a>.','','10.2.3'),(9758,'Defined on the <a href=\"@appearance\">Appearance Settings</a> page.','','none'),(9759,'Save and go to list','','none'),(9760,'Automatic updating of Drupal core is not supported. See the <a href=\":update-guide\">Updating Drupal guide</a> for information on how to update Drupal core manually.','','none'),(9761,'You must provide a URL to install.','','none'),(9762,'The role %role has had the following non-existent permission(s) removed: %permissions.','','none'),(9763,'The role %role_list has had non-existent permissions removed. Check the logs for details.The roles %role_list have had non-existent permissions removed. Check the logs for details.','','none'),(9764,'Other permissions pages','','none'),(9765,'The main Permissions page can be overwhelming, so each module that defines permissions has its own page for setting them. There are links to these pages on the <a href=\":modules\">Extend page</a>. When editing a content type, vocabulary, etc., there is also a Manage permissions tab for permissions related to that configuration.','','none'),(9766,'Account %name has been disabled.','','none'),(9767,'Delete the account and make its content belong to the %anonymous-name user. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(9768,'Delete the account and its content. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(9769,'To log in to this site, your browser must accept cookies from the domain %domain.','','none'),(9770,'Cancellation method','','none'),(9771,'This view will be displayed by visiting this path on your site. You may use \"%\" or named route parameters like \"%node\" in your URL to represent values that will be used for contextual filters: For example, \"node/%node/feed\" or \"view_path/%\". Named route parameters are required when this path matches an existing path. For example, paths such as \"taxonomy/term/%taxonomy_term\" or \"user/%user/custom-view\".','','none'),(9772,'Sort field identifier','','none'),(9773,'This will appear in the URL after the ?, as value of \'sort_by\' parameter, to identify this sort field. Cannot be blank. Only letters, digits and the dot (\'.\'), hyphen (\'-\'), underscore (\'_\'), and tilde (\'~\') characters are allowed.','','none'),(9774,'This identifier is already used by %label sort handler.','','none'),(9775,'Switch to this workspace','','none'),(9776,'Workspace changes','','none'),(9777,'This workspace has no changes.','','none'),(9778,'@entity_type_label: @entity_bundle_label','','none'),(9779,'starterkit_theme','','none'),(9780,'admin/reports/dblog/event/{{ wid }}','','10.2.3'),(9781,'admin/content/files/usage/{{ fid }}','','10.2.3'),(9782,'@interval','','10.2.3'),(9783,'Code Block','','10.4.4'),(9784,'The CKEditor 5 module provides a highly-accessible, highly-usable visual text editor and adds a toolbar to text fields. Users can use buttons to format content and to create semantically correct and valid HTML. The CKEditor module uses the framework provided by the <a href=\":text_editor\">Text Editor module</a>. It requires JavaScript to be enabled in the browser. For more information, see the <a href=\":doc_url\">online documentation for the CKEditor 5 module</a> and the <a href=\":cke5_url\">CKEditor 5 website</a>.','','none'),(9785,'Enabling CKEditor 5 for individual text formats','','none'),(9786,'When CKEditor 5 is chosen from the <em>Text editor</em> drop-down menu, its toolbar configuration is displayed. You can add and remove buttons from the <em>Active toolbar</em> by dragging and dropping them. Separators and rows can be added to organize the buttons.','','none'),(9787,'Filtering HTML content','','none'),(9788,'Unlike other text editors, plugin configuration determines the tags and attributes allowed in text formats using CKEditor 5. If using the <em>Limit allowed HTML tags and correct faulty HTML</em> filter, this filter\'s values will be automatically set based on enabled plugins and toolbar items.','','none'),(9789,'Developing CKEditor 5 plugins in Drupal','','none'),(9790,'See the <a href=\":dev_docs_url\">online documentation</a> for detailed information on developing CKEditor 5 plugins for use in Drupal.','','none'),(9791,'The built in WYSIWYG editor (CKEditor 5) comes with a number of accessibility features. CKEditor 5 comes with built in <a href=\":shortcuts\">keyboard shortcuts</a>, which can be beneficial for both power users and keyboard only users.','','none'),(9792,'To support multilingual page content, CKEditor 5 can be configured to include a language button in the toolbar.','','none'),(9793,'With CKEditor 5 this is a\n          read-only field. The allowed HTML tags and attributes are determined\n          by the CKEditor 5 configuration. Manually removing tags would break\n          enabled functionality, and any manually added tags would be removed by\n          CKEditor 5 on render.','','10.4.4'),(9794,'CKEditor 5','','10.4.4'),(9795,'Text Format plus Text Editor pair using CKEditor 5','','none'),(9796,'CKEditor 5 settings','','none'),(9797,'Enabled Headings','','10.4.4'),(9798,'Source Editing','','none'),(9799,'Allowed Tag','','none'),(9800,'Button @name has been copied to the active toolbar.','','10.4.4'),(9801,'The <em>Source Editing</em> plugin was enabled to support tags and/or attributes that are not explicitly supported by any available CKEditor 5 plugins.','','none'),(9802,'The CKEditor 4 button %button does not have a known upgrade path. If it allowed editing markup, then you can do so now through the Source Editing functionality.','','none'),(9803,'The %cke4_plugin_id plugin settings do not have a known upgrade path.','','none'),(9804,'The CKEditor 5 plugin %button has a configurable subset of elements, but does not have a known upgrade path to configure that subset to match your text format. Hence it is now using its default configuration.','','none'),(9805,'These are the headings that will appear in the headings dropdown. If a heading is not chosen here, it does not necessarily mean the corresponding tag is disallowed in the text format.','','10.4.4'),(9806,'Manually editable HTML tags','','10.4.4'),(9807,'A list of HTML tags that can be used while editing source. It is only necessary to add tags that are not already supported by other enabled plugins. For example, if \"Bold\" is enabled, it is not necessary to add the <code>&lt;strong&gt;</code> tag, but it may be necessary to add <code>&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dt&gt;&lt;dd&gt;</code> in a format that does not have a definition list plugin, but requires definition list markup.','','10.4.4'),(9808,'CKEditor 5 toolbar configuration','','none'),(9809,'Press the down arrow key to add to the toolbar.','','10.4.4'),(9810,'Move this button in the toolbar by pressing the left or right arrow keys. Press the up arrow key to remove from the toolbar.','','10.4.4'),(9811,'Invalid toolbar value.','','none'),(9812,'CKEditor 5 element','Validation','none'),(9813,'The following tag is not valid HTML: %provided_element.','','none'),(9814,'CKEditor 5 enabled configurable plugins','Validation','none'),(9815,'Configuration for the enabled plugin \"%plugin_label\" (%plugin_id) is missing.','','none'),(9816,'CKEditor 5 fundamental text format compatibility','Validation','none'),(9817,'CKEditor 5 only works with HTML-based text formats. The \"%filter_label\" (%filter_plugin_id) filter implies this text format is not HTML anymore.','','none'),(9818,'CKEditor 5 needs at least the &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br&gt; tags to be allowed to be able to function. They are not allowed by the \"%filter_label\" (%filter_plugin_id) filter.','','none'),(9819,'The current CKEditor 5 build requires the following elements and attributes: <br><code>@list</code><br>The following elements are not supported: <br><code>@diff</code>','','none'),(9820,'The current CKEditor 5 build requires the following elements and attributes: <br><code>@list</code><br>The following elements are missing: <br><code>@diff</code>','','none'),(9821,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item conditions must be met','Validation','none'),(9822,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires image uploads to be enabled.','','none'),(9823,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %filter filter to be enabled.','','none'),(9824,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %plugin plugin to be enabled.','','none'),(9825,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %plugins plugins to be enabled.','','none'),(9826,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item','Validation','none'),(9827,'The provided toolbar item %toolbar_item is not valid.','','none'),(9828,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item dependency','Validation','none'),(9829,'Depends on %toolbar_item, which is not enabled.','','none'),(9830,'Move a button into the <em>Active toolbar</em> to enable it, or into the list of <em>Available buttons</em> to disable it. Buttons may be moved with the mouse or keyboard arrow keys.','','10.4.4'),(9831,'PostgreSQL pg_trgm extension','','none'),(9832,'Not created','','none'),(9833,'Preview failed','','10.4.5'),(9834,'Drupal Media toolbar','','10.4.5'),(9835,'Link media','','10.4.5'),(9836,'Add %label effect to style %style','','none'),(9837,'Edit %label effect on style %style','','none'),(9838,'Maintenance mode Retry-After header settings','','none'),(9839,'Minimum value for Retry-After header in seconds','','none'),(9840,'Maximum value for Retry-After header in seconds','','none'),(9841,'The MySQL module provides the connection between Drupal and a MySQL, MariaDB or equivalent database. For more information, see the <a href=\":mysql\">online documentation for the MySQL module</a>.','','none'),(9842,'The PostgreSQL module provides the connection between Drupal and a PostgreSQL database. For more information, see the <a href=\":pgsql\">online documentation for the PostgreSQL module</a>.','','none'),(9843,'The SQLite module provides the connection between Drupal and a SQLite database. For more information, see the <a href=\":sqlite\">online documentation for the SQLite module</a>.','','none'),(9844,'Deprecated modules enabled','','none'),(9845,'Deprecated modules found: %module_list.','','10.4.5'),(9846,'Deprecated themes enabled','','none'),(9847,'Deprecated themes found: %theme_list.','','none'),(9848,'Obsolete extensions enabled','','none'),(9849,'Database support for JSON','','10.4.5'),(9850,'Is required in Drupal 10.0.','','10.4.5'),(9851,'Non-stable modules','','none'),(9852,'@lifecycle','','10.4.5'),(9853,'View information on the @lifecycle status of the module @module','','10.4.5'),(9854,'Help <span class=\"visually-hidden\">for @module</span>','','10.4.5'),(9855,'Permissions <span class=\"visually-hidden\">for @module</span>','','10.4.5'),(9856,'Configure <span class=\"visually-hidden\">@module</span>','','10.4.5'),(9857,'Are you sure you wish to enable experimental and deprecated modules?','','none'),(9858,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of Drupal core and the relevant contributed module. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9859,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of this project. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9860,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of Drupal core. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9861,'The @name module is deprecated. (more information)','','none'),(9862,'about the status of the @name module','','none'),(9863,'Are you sure you wish to enable an experimental module?Are you sure you wish to enable experimental modules?','','none'),(9864,'Are you sure you wish to enable a deprecated module?Are you sure you wish to enable deprecated modules?','','none'),(9865,'The following module is experimental: @modules.The following modules are experimental: @modules.','','none'),(9866,'Get the actual @label from a @label revision','','none'),(9867,'Database connection supports the JSON type.','','none'),(9868,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/system-requirements\">Database connection does not support JSON.</a>','','none'),(9869,'Media widget','','10.4.5'),(9870,'Not all functionality may be available because some information could not be retrieved.','','10.4.5'),(9871,'Allow the user to resize images','','10.4.4'),(9872,'PostgreSQL has the pg_trgm extension enabled.','','none'),(9873,'The <a href=\":pg_trgm\">pg_trgm</a> PostgreSQL extension is not present. The extension is required by Drupal 10 to improve performance when using PostgreSQL. See <a href=\":requirements\">Drupal database server requirements</a> for more information.','','none'),(9874,'Drupal could not check for the pg_trgm extension: @error.','','none'),(9875,'Alternative text override','','10.4.5'),(9876,'Default alternative text:','','10.2.3'),(9877,'Override media image alternative text','','10.4.5'),(9878,'Enter media caption','','10.4.5'),(9879,'Caption media','','10.4.5'),(9880,'Toggle caption off','','10.4.5'),(9881,'Toggle caption on','','10.4.5'),(9882,'Post updating @extension','','none'),(9883,'Press the down arrow key to activate','','10.4.4'),(9884,'Decorative image','','10.4.5'),(9885,'Add missing alternative text','','10.4.5'),(9886,'Change image alternative text','','10.4.5'),(9887,'The %last_item theme has ckeditor_stylesheets configured without a corresponding ckeditor5-stylesheets configuration. See the <a href=\":change_record\">change record</a> for details.The %first_items and %last_item themes have ckeditor_stylesheets configured, but without corresponding ckeditor5-stylesheets configurations. See the <a href=\":change_record\">change record</a> for details.','','none'),(9888,'Source editing should only use otherwise unavailable tags and attributes','Validation','none'),(9889,'The following @element_type(s) are already supported by enabled plugins and should not be added to the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field: %overlapping_tags.','','none'),(9890,'The following @element_type(s) are already supported by available plugins and should not be added to the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field. Instead, enable the following plugins to support these @element_types: %overlapping_tags.','','none'),(9891,'There is no staged configuration.','','none'),(9892,'The staged configuration is identical to the active configuration.','','none'),(9893,'The main way to change the overall appearance of your site is to switch the default theme. The core Layout Builder and Layout Discovery modules allow you to define layouts for your site\'s content, and the core Breakpoint module helps themes change appearance for different-sized devices. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.4.5'),(9894,'Using in-line (quick) settings editing','','none'),(9895,'Edit settings in place.','','10.4.5'),(9896,'The core Settings Tray module provides the ability to quickly edit settings inline. It requires the core Contextual Links module in order to expose the links that let you edit in place.','','10.4.5'),(9897,'Who can edit settings in place?','','10.4.5'),(9898,'In order to follow these steps to edit settings in place, the core Settings Tray module must be installed. Also, either the core Toolbar module or a contributed replacement must be installed. You will need to have <em>Use contextual links</em> permission, as well as permission to edit the particular content or settings.','','10.4.5'),(9899,'Find and visit a page on your site that has the settings that you would like to edit.','','10.4.5'),(9900,'Click the link to open the contextual links menu, and click <em>Quick edit</em>. An editing form for the settings should appear on the page.','','10.4.5'),(9901,'In-place or <em>quick</em> editing. In-place editing of configuration is provided by the core Settings Tray module. See @settings_tray_topic for more information.','','10.4.5'),(9902,'Exposes entities and other resources to other applications using a <a href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Representational_state_transfer\">REST</a> implementation. Data is exchanged using a serialization format such as JSON, and transferred using an authentication method such as HTTP Basic Authentication.','','10.4.5'),(9903,'Image loading settings','','none'),(9904,'Loading attribute','','none'),(9905,'Image loading','','none'),(9906,'Lazy render images with native image loading attribute (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>). This improves performance by allowing browsers to lazily load images.','','none'),(9907,'Lazy (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>)','','none'),(9908,'Eager (<em>loading=\"eager\"</em>)','','none'),(9909,'Image loading attribute','','none'),(9910,'Select the loading attribute for images. <a href=\":link\">Learn more about the loading attribute for images.</a>','','none'),(9911,'Delays loading the image until that section of the page is visible in the browser. When in doubt, lazy loading is recommended.','','none'),(9912,'Force browsers to download an image as soon as possible. This is the browser default for legacy reasons. Only use this option when the image is always expected to render.','','none'),(9913,'Image loading: @attribute','','none'),(9914,'Your PHP installation is too old. Drupal requires at least PHP %version. It is recommended to upgrade to PHP version %recommended or higher for the best ongoing support. See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','10.2.3'),(9915,'It is recommended to upgrade to PHP version %recommended or higher for the best ongoing support.  See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(9916,'View information on the @lifecycle status of the theme @theme','','none'),(9917,'Assign or change the region of a block by clicking here. A dropdown list with all the regions will appear. You can place one block in multiple regions.','','none'),(9918,'Allow reverse list','','none'),(9919,'Allow start index','','none'),(9920,'Allow the user to reverse an ordered list','','10.4.4'),(9921,'Allow the user to specify the start index of an ordered list','','10.4.4'),(9922,'Check <a href=\":handbook\">this handbook page</a> for details about compatibility issues of contrib modules.','','none'),(9923,'Source Editing should never allow self-XSS.','Validation','none'),(9924,'The following tag in the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field is a security risk: %dangerous_tag.','','none'),(9925,'Enabled Alignments','','10.4.4'),(9926,'Alignment type','','none'),(9927,'Allow view mode override','','none'),(9928,'These are the alignment types that will appear in the alignment dropdown.','','10.4.4'),(9929,'Allow the user to override the default view mode','','10.4.4'),(9930,'CKEditor 5 Media plugin in sync with filter settings','Validation','none'),(9931,'The CKEditor 5 \"%cke5_media_plugin_label\" plugin\'s \"%cke5_allow_view_mode_override_label\" setting should be in sync with the \"%filter_media_plugin_label\" filter\'s \"%filter_media_allowed_view_modes_label\" setting: when checked, two or more view modes must be allowed by the filter.','','none'),(9932,'View update notifications','','10.2.3'),(9933,'These messages are displayed on most administrative pages when updates become available.','','10.2.3'),(9934,'You can choose to send email only if a security update is available, or to be notified about all newer versions. If there are updates available of Drupal core or any of your installed modules and themes, your site will always print a message on the <a href=\":status_report\">status report</a> page. If there is a security update, an error message will be printed on administration pages for users with <a href=\":update_permissions\">permission to view update notifications</a>.','','none'),(9935,'Congratulations and welcome to the Drupal community.','','none'),(9936,'The %plugin plugin needs another plugin to create <code>@non_creatable_tag</code>, for it to be able to create the following attributes: <code>@attributes_on_tag</code>. Enable a plugin that supports creating this tag. If none exists, you can configure the Source Editing plugin to support it.','','none'),(9937,'Olivero Color Scheme Settings','','none'),(9938,'These settings adjust the look and feel of the Olivero theme. Changing the color below will change the base hue, saturation, and lightness values the Olivero theme uses to determine its internal colors.','','none'),(9939,'Olivero Color Scheme','','none'),(9940,'Enter color in full hexadecimal format (#abc123).','','none'),(9941,'Derivatives will be formed from this color.','','none'),(9942,'Colors must be 7-character string specifying a color hexadecimal format.','','none'),(9943,'Base Primary Color','','none'),(9944,'@fieldName has changed to @fieldValue','','none'),(9945,'Unable to uninstall the %module module because: @reason.','','none'),(9946,'Unable to install the %theme theme since it requires the %required_module module.','','none'),(9947,'If the <em>Source</em> button is available in the toolbar, users can click this button to disable the visual editor and edit the HTML source directly. After toggling back, the visual editor uses the HTML tags allowed via plugin configuration (and not explicity disallowed by filters) to format the text. Tags not enabled via plugin configuration will be stripped out of the HTML source when the user toggles back to the text editor.','','none'),(9948,'@theme theme','','none'),(9949,'Resolve all issues below to continue the installation. For help configuring your database server, see the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/installing-drupal\">installation handbook</a>, or contact your hosting provider.','','none'),(9950,'Updating to Drupal @current_major is only supported from Drupal version @required_min_version or higher. If you are trying to update from an older version, first update to the latest version of Drupal @previous_major. (<a href=\":url\">Drupal upgrade guide</a>)','','none'),(9951,'Migrating an Existing Text Format to CKEditor 5','','none'),(9952,'When switching an existing text format to use CKEditor 5, an automatic process is initiated that helps text formats switching to CKEditor 5 from CKEditor 4 (or no text editor) to do so with minimal effort and zero data loss.','','none'),(9953,'This process is designed for there to be no data loss risk in switching to CKEditor 5. However some of your editor\'s functionality may not be 100% equivalent to what was available previously. In most cases, these changes are minimal. After the process completes, status and/or warning messages will summarize any changes that occurred, and more detailed information will be available in the site\'s logs.','','none'),(9954,'CKEditor 5 will attempt to enable plugins that provide equivalent toolbar items to those used prior to switching to CKEditor 5. All core CKEditor 4 plugins and many popular contrib plugins already have CKEditor 5 equivalents. In some cases, functionality that required contrib modules is now built into CKEditor 5. In instances where a plugin does not have an equivalent, no data loss will occur but elements previously provided via the plugin may need to be added manually as HTML via source editing.','','none'),(9955,'Additional migration considerations for text formats with restricted HTML','','none'),(9956,'The “Allowed HTML tags\" field in the “Limit allowed HTML tags and correct Faulty HTML\" filter is now read-only','','none'),(9957,'This field accurately represents the tags/attributes allowed by a text format, but the allowed tags are based on which plugins are enabled and how they are configured. For example, enabling the Underline plugin adds the &lt;u&gt; tag to “Allowed HTML tags\".','','none'),(9958,'The &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br &gt; tags will be automatically added to your text format.','','none'),(9959,'CKEditor 5 requires the &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br &gt; tags to achieve basic functionality. They will be automatically added to “Allowed HTML tags\" on formats that previously did not allow them.','','none'),(9960,'Tags/attributes that are not explicitly supported by any plugin are supported by Source Editing','','none'),(9961,'When a necessary tag/attribute is not directly supported by an available plugin, the \"Source Editing\" plugin is enabled. This plugin is typically used for by passing the CKEditor 5 UI and editing contents as HTML source. In the settings for Source Editing, tags/attributes that aren\'t available via other plugins are added to Source Editing\'s \"Manually editable HTML tags\" setting so they are supported by the text format.','','none'),(9962,'To maintain the capabilities of this text format, <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":ck_migration_url\">the CKEditor 5 migration</a> did the following:','','none'),(9963,'To maintain the capabilities of this text format, the CKEditor 5 migration did the following:','','none'),(9964,'Enabled these plugins: (%plugins).','','none'),(9965,'Added these tags/attributes to the Source Editing Plugin\'s <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":source_edit_url\">Manually editable HTML tags</a> setting: @tag_list','','none'),(9966,'Added these tags/attributes to the Source Editing Plugin\'s Manually editable HTML tags setting: @tag_list','','none'),(9967,'Additional details are available <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":dblog_url\">in your logs</a>.','','none'),(9968,'Additional details are available in your logs.','','none'),(9969,'Updating to CKEditor 5 added support for some previously unsupported tags/attributes.','','none'),(9970,'A plugin introduced support for the following:','','none'),(9971,'for','Ckeditor 5 tag list','none'),(9972,'The @tag tag was added because it is <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":fundamental_tag_link\">required by CKEditor 5</a>.The @tag tags were added because they are <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":fundamental_tag_link\">required by CKEditor 5</a>.','','none'),(9973,'The @tag tag was added because it is required by CKEditor 5.The @tag tags were added because they are required by CKEditor 5.','','none'),(9974,'The tag %tags;The tags %tags;','','none'),(9975,'This attribute: %attributes;These attributes: %attributes;','','none'),(9976,'The migration of %text_format to CKEditor 5 has been saved.','','none'),(9977,'An error occurred during the execution of the Ajax response: !error','','10.4.5'),(9978,'Date range (Datetime range module): Stores time/date periods with a start and an end','','10.4.5'),(9979,'Find the view that you would like to edit, and click <em>Edit</em> from the dropdown button. Note that bulk operations work best in a view with a Page display, and a Table format.','','10.4.5'),(9980,'Note that anonymous users with this permission are able to edit any content created by any anonymous user.','','10.2.3'),(9981,'Note that anonymous users with this permission are able to delete any content created by any anonymous user.','','10.2.3'),(9982,'The fallback image style is typically the smallest size image you expect to appear in this space. The fallback image should only appear on a site if an error occurs.','','none'),(9983,'The %relationship_name relationship used in %handler_type %handler is not present in the %display_name display.','','none'),(9984,'Configure @type @current of @total: @item','','none'),(9985,'The readme could not be rewritten.','','none'),(9986,'Updates failed for the entity type %entity_type, for %entity_ids. Check the logs.','','none'),(9987,'Unable to update %entity_type %view due to error @message %function (line %line of %file). <pre>@backtrace_string</pre>','','none'),(9988,'Block content entity changed','Validation','none'),(9989,'Style label','','none'),(9990,'Style tag + classes','','none'),(9991,'A list of classes that will be provided in the \"Style\" dropdown. Enter one or more classes on each line in the format: element.classA.classB|Label. Example: h1.title|Title. Advanced example: h1.fancy.title|Fancy title.<br />These styles should be available in your theme\'s CSS file.','','10.4.4'),(9992,'Line @line-number does not contain a valid value. Enter a valid CSS selector containing one or more classes, followed by a pipe symbol and a label.Lines @line-numbers do not contain a valid value. Enter a valid CSS selector containing one or more classes, followed by a pipe symbol and a label.','','none'),(9993,'The following tag is missing the required attribute <code>@required_attribute_name</code>: <code>@provided_element</code>.','','none'),(9994,'The following tag does not have the minimum of @min_attribute_value_count allowed values for the required attribute <code>@required_attribute_name</code>: <code>@provided_element</code>.','','none'),(9995,'Styles can only be specified for already supported tags.','Validation','none'),(9996,'A style can only be specified for an HTML 5 tag. <code>@tag</code> is not an HTML5 tag.','','none'),(9997,'A style must only specify classes not supported by other plugins. The <code>@classes</code> classes on <code>@tag</code> are already supported by the enabled %plugin plugin.','','none'),(9998,'A style must only specify classes not supported by other plugins. The <code>@classes</code> classes on <code>@tag</code> are supported by the %plugin plugin. Remove this style and enable that plugin instead.','','none'),(9999,'Unique label in list','Validation','none'),(10000,'The label %label is not unique.','','10.4.4'),(10001,'To search help, you will need to install the core Search module, configure a search page, and add a search block to the Help page or another administrative page. (A search page is provided automatically, and if you use the core Claro administrative theme, a help search block is shown on the main Help page.) Then users with search permissions, and permission to view help, will be able to search help. See the <a href=\":search_help\">Search module help page</a> for more information.','','none'),(10002,'A base theme is a theme that is not meant to be used directly on a site, but instead acts as a scaffolding for building other themes. The core Stable 9 theme is one example; other base themes can be downloaded from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_theme\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>.','','10.4.5'),(10003,'The core Filter, Responsive Image, and Path modules provide settings and display options for entities and fields.','','10.4.5'),(10004,'A text editor is software (typically, a JavaScript library) that provides buttons and other command mechanisms to make editing HTML text easier. Some editors are called <em>visual</em> or <em>WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get)</em> editors; these editors hide the details of HTML from the user, and instead show formatted output on the screen. The core Text Editor module provides a framework for deploying text editors on your site. The core CKEditor 5 module provides CKEditor 5, which is a widely-used JavaScript text editor that creates clean and valid HTML; the module also enforces the HTML tag restrictions in the associated text format. Various contributed modules provide other editors; to install a new editor, besides installing the module, you may need to download the editor library from a third-party site.','','10.4.5'),(10005,'Select <em>CKEditor 5</em> as the <em>Text editor</em>, or another text editor that you have installed. The rest of these steps assume you selected <em>CKEditor 5</em>.','','10.4.5'),(10006,'Under <em>Toolbar configuration</em>, drag buttons between <em>Available buttons</em> and <em>Active toolbar</em>; only buttons in <em>Active toolbar</em> will be shown to the user. Focusing or hovering over a button will display a tooltip explaining what the button does.','','10.4.5'),(10007,'Drag buttons within <em>Active toolbar</em> to the desired order, and group buttons by dragging them between group identifiers; drag <em>a new group identifier</em> to the toolbar to add additional groups.','','10.4.5'),(10008,'If you add buttons that require configuration, the <em>CKEditor 5 plugin settings</em> section will be visible, and provide their respective configuration forms.','','10.4.5'),(10009,'Click the link for your administrative theme (such as the core Claro theme), near the top of the page, and verify that there is already a search block for help located in the Help region. If not, follow the steps in the related topic to place the <em>Search form</em> block in the Help region. When configuring the block, choose <em>Help</em> as the search page, and in the <em>Pages</em> tab under <em>Visibility</em>, enter <em>/admin/help</em> to make the search form only visible on the main <em>Help</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(10010,'Click the shortcut link to add the page to your shortcut list -- in the core Claro administrative theme, the link looks like a star, and is displayed next to the page title. However, if the page is already in your shortcut set, clicking the shortcut link will remove it from your shortcut set.','','10.4.5'),(10011,'The Shortcut module creates an add/remove link for each page on your site; the link lets you add or remove the current page from the currently-enabled set of shortcuts (if your theme displays it and you have permission to edit your shortcut set). The core Claro administration theme displays this link next to the page title, as a gray or yellow star. If you click on the gray star, you will add that page to your preferred set of shortcuts. If the page is already part of your shortcut set, the link will be a yellow star, and will allow you to remove the current page from your shortcut set.','','none'),(10012,'PHP %version has <a href=\":bug_url\">an OPcache bug that can cause fatal errors with class autoloading</a>. This can be fixed by upgrading to PHP 8.1.6 or later. See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(10013,'Grid - Responsive','','none'),(10014,'Maximum number of columns','','none'),(10015,'Minimum cell width','','none'),(10016,'The maximum number of columns that will be displayed within the grid.','','none'),(10017,'Minimum grid cell width','','none'),(10018,'The minimum width of the grid cells. If the grid container becomes narrow, the grid cells will reflow onto the next row as needed.','','none'),(10019,'Grid gutter spacing','','none'),(10020,'The spacing between the grid cells.','','none'),(10021,'Failed to download remote thumbnail file due to \"%error\".','','none'),(10022,'CKEditor 5 plugin settings','','10.4.4'),(10023,'Enter a value like \"512\" (bytes), \"80 KB\" (kilobytes) or \"50 MB\" (megabytes) in order to restrict the allowed file size. If left empty the file sizes could be limited only by PHP\'s maximum post and file upload sizes (current limit <strong>%limit</strong>).','','none'),